
0 










Copightl^? 


COPYRIGHT DEPOSITS 









The Pacific Series 


Number IV 

At School in the Cannibal Islamds 


THE PACIFIC SERIES 

By Edwin J. Houston, Ph. D. (Princeton) 

In Four Volumes 

Distinctly individual and yet connected 


/. Five Months on a Derelict 

A small party, two men and two boys, 
are wrecked in the China Sea, and find 
safety and refuge on a derelict brig. Full 
of exciting adventures. 

//. Wrecked on a Coral Island 

The brig is finally wrecked on a coral 
island in the Pacific Ocean. The party, 
augmented by Charley Pleasanton, forms 
a settlement there, and finds all sorts of 
interesting experience. 

III, In Captivity in the Pacific 

Charley and Harold, of the party on 
Harding Island, are taken captive and car- 
ried in war canoes to another neighboring 
large island. Their adventures are most 
stirring. 

IV, At School in the Cannibal Islands 

A school is finally formed on Harding 
Island. Besides studies, the boys have lots 
of fun. An attack by cannibals forms an 
exciting episode. 


These volumes are in plain, large type, fully illustrated with 
maps and half-tones. Price, per copy, $ 1 .25 











- . * * 4 ‘* '“ > ■ S’? ^t.' . '**'' ■ 

;..;■■■ -j f?-.-*.-^ '^’ y-^m 

A- * ■ T* -*i^“ *4 ■» -'^ ‘“-'W* 1 

^ •‘. •■ Tr » ^ ‘> -^ if 





* ^0r^’ 

* L 

. • \ :\. 



' ti»'3U 


■ ■’■ 


• • 



■^' i' 


' JSI ^ 


♦ •'f 




' I 


> - t«<i 


w 


h il.- 


‘4***''’:^ " -'," ' '-li ’ 

■V' , P 1 ' -• ■• ' - “ '■* ^ ■ 


- 4 « 4 - ^ .'^W- 

^MJL^ . ^ , . N • r' A h, 




r* ffc h. » ■* 

;y v=^-. 

^ ^ W^k/- - 

ffC*' ^ I 

’ - ■ ."^ f-.i*: .•.- 

, ^ ^ : '.:^ V>» 





■■ The Harding Schoolhonse and dormi- 
tories mere noiv nearly completed ” 

Page 32 


At School in the 
Cannibal Islands 


\ 


Edwin J. Houston^ Ph. D. (Princeton) 


Author of “Five Months on a Derelict/' “Wrecked on a Coral 
Island/’ “ In Captivity in the Pacific/’ “ The Boy Prospector/’ 
“The Boy Electrician/’ “The Search for the North 
Pole/’ “The Discovery of the North Pole/’ 

“Cast Away at the North Pole/’ etc., etc. 




Philadelphia 


The Griffith & Rowland Press 

Boston Chicago St. Louis 
Atlanta ^ rlAlU#^ 



Copyright 1909 by 
A. J. ROWLAND, Secretary 

Published September, 1909 




PREFACE 


In the fourth volume of The Pacific Series,” “At 
School in the Cannibal Islands,” the author tells of 
further adventures of the characters described in the 
preceding volumes. 

A school has been established on Harding Island, 
at which, besides our old friends — Jack, Charley, and 
Harold — three other white lads and some six Poly- 
nesian lads are enrolled. The masters are Captain 
Harding and Doctor Parsons, and an assistant, a Mr. 
Clarkson, who has come to the South Pacific in order 
to study the Polynesian language so as to permit him 
to begin his lifework as a missionary to the people in 
this part of the world. 

While all the ordinary school branches are taught 
at the Harding School, yet by reason of the position 
of the island, the opportunities afforded for studying 
the life of the land and sea, as well as the ripe knowl- 
edge of the captain and the doctor in natural history, 
resulted in the special teaching of some of the more 
interesting branches of zoology. 

During the progress of the story much information 
is given concerning natural history. Like the other 
books of the series^ however, the facts of natural 
science, no matter how interesting, are not permitted 
to crowd out those more interesting scenes of fun and 


PREFACE 


adventure that young readers naturally look for in a 
book of this character. 

As the name, “ At School in the Cannibal Islands,” 
indicates, there is given in this volume an account of 
the many exciting experiences that both the people of 
Harding Island, as well as the boys of the Harding 
School, had when the island was invaded by a fleet 
of cannibal canoes with an army of warriors greatly 
exceeding in number the forces on Harding Island. 
The manner in which the invading army was prac- 
tically isolated on Twin Island No. i, and how it was 
finally routed by the people on Harding Island when 
aided by the warriors of Mahinee and Otoa are told. 
It was in this connection that Harding Island, together 
with the four islands of its lagoon, have been re- 
christened The Cannibal Islands.” 


Philadelphia, June, 1909, 


E. J. H. 


CONTENTS 

Chapter ^ 

Page 

I. On Parker Cliffs 1 1 

II. More Old Acquaintances 22 

III. Miranda Eliza Higgenson Higgenbotham ... 32 

IV. Arrival of the Steamer and the New Boys . . 42 

V. The Whimples, Primus and Secundus, and David 

G. Bates 

VI. Whimple Secundus 64 

VII. A Day at the Harding School 73 

VIII. Two-days’ Holiday 8$ 

IX, A Lesson in Swimming 96 

X. An Out-of-door Class 108 

XI. Other Out-of-door Lessons 121 

XI 1 . Sea Serpents, Legendary and Real 132 

XHI. Sponges. A Shark Hunt ‘ 144 

XIV. The Whimples, Harding, and Pleasanton 

Company 159 

XV. Continued Operations OF THE Company . . . .170 

XVI. Charley’s Talk on Mollusks 185 

XVH. Some Curiosities of Mollusks 196 

XVIII. Armored Animals of the Sea 208 


CONTENTS 


Chapter Page 

XIX. Charley’s Grotto on Parker Cliffs 219 

XX. Frank and Mrs. Higgenbotham 233 

XXI. Adventures of Frank and Flora ...... 242 

XXII. An Undesirable Inhabitant of Harding Island 255 

XXIII. The Theft and Escape of the Thieves .... 268 

XXIV. A Boat Voyage for the Sake of Science . . 281 

XXV. Invasion of Harding Island by the Cannibals 290 

XXVI. Frank, Kooloo, and Otoa Captured by the 

Cannibals 301 

XXVH. Feast of the Cannibals on Twin Island No. i . 311 

XXVHI. The Pursuit. Hiding in the Grotto 324 

XXIX. The Fight in the Grotto 336 

XXX. Charley and Harold Prisoners in the Dead 

Man’s House 348 

XXXI. Preparations for the Battle 359 

XXXIL The Battle at Jackson House 370 

XXXHI. Timely Arrival of Mahinee, Otoa, and the 

Scientific Expedition. Conclusion . . .381 


Appendices 


393 


LIST OF FULL-PAGED ILLUSTRATIONS 


Page 

The Harding schoolhouse and dormitories were 

now nearly completed'' ^2 ^ 

^ I am sorry, now.. It hurts more than I thought 

it would ' " P 5 -- 

The chambered nautilus" ^97 

In a few moments terrified screams were heard 

from them" ^77 "" 

They were led by a guard of four men to the ^ 
Dead Man's House " 354 


CHARACTERS 


Charles Young Pleasanton^ of the derelict brig 
and the Harding Coral Island. 

Harold Arthur Harding^ of the derelict brig and 
the Harding Coral Island. 

John Parker Jackson, of the derelict brig and the 
Harding Coral Island. 

Captain Arthur Harding, head master of the 
school. 

Dr. Chas. B. Parsons, or Miconareo, assistant 
master. 

Mr. Herbert Clarkson, assistant teacher of Hard- 
ing School. 

Oliver Stanley Whimple, Frank Yates Whim- 
PLE, brothers from London. 

David Greenleaf Bates, an Australian lad. 

Kooloo, Otoa, and Waheatoua, Polynesian lads, 
and other pupils of the Harding School. 

Hiram Higgenbotham, former boatswain of '' The 
Ketrel.’’ 

Miranda Eliza Higgenson Higgenbotham, Hiram’s 
wife. 

Mahinee and Otoa, Polynesian kings. 

Waheatoua, Kapiau, Mauai, Otu, etc., Polynesians. 

Rompey, a full-blooded collie dog. 

Flora, or Flo, Rompey ’s mate. 


At School in the Cannibal Islands 


CHAPTER I 
On Parker Cliffs 

“ Can you still see it? ” 

“ No; I lost sight of it a few minutes ago.’^ 

Then try my glasses. You can still see it through 
them.” 

The speakers, two lads of about fifteen and a half 
years, were standing near the edge of a limestone cliff 
on the northeastern part of a fairly large coral island, 
or atoll, in the South Pacific. They were looking 
through field-glasses at some object near the north- 
western horizon. A beautiful collie dog, standing near 
them, was gazing up into their faces and wagging his 
tail as if begging to be noticed. 

The island, one of the Paumotus, is the Harding 
Island referred to in the second and third volumes of 
“ The Pacific Series.” The boys are our friends, 
Charles Young Pleasanton and Harold Arthur Hard- 
ing. The cliffs on which they are standing are the 
Parker Cliffs, the highest point of land on the island. 
The collie dog is our friend Rompey. 

Though nearly two years have passed since we first 
saw these boys on a derelict brig in the Pacific, neither 
has increased much in height, as boys are so apt to do 
II 




AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


at their age. They were the same good-looking, bright, 
merry, fun-loving boys that we became acquainted with 
in the other books of this series. 

There is, however, a great difference in the clothing 
the boys now wore and that we saw on them while on 
the coral island. Instead of the old striped blue-and- 
white bed-ticking they had been forced, after they 
had been some time on Harding Island, to make up 
into clothes that made them resemble escaped convicts, 
they were now clad in comfortable garments suitable 
for a tropical climate that had been fitted and made by 
the best tailors of London and Melbourne. 

It was Charley who had handed his glasses to Har- 
old. After his friend had looked through them for a 
few moments, he inquired : 

“ How do you like my glasses, Harold ? ” 

“ They beat mine all hollow, Charley. How is it I 
can see so much farther through your glasses than 
through mine?” 

Although both boys were of the same age, Charley 
was the brighter of the two; and this is saying no 
little, for Harold was an unusually bright lad. Count- 
ing the time they had spent on the brig, on the coral 
island, in captivity with Mahinee, and in Europe and 
Australia, about two years had passed. During nearly 
all this time the boys had been almost constantly to- 
gether, and Harold had learned by experience that 
Charley was generally able to answer all questions he 
put to him. He had fallen into the habit of ask- 
ing Charley questions, that he often might have an- 
12 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


swered himself if he had only taken the trouble to 
think. So, when he inquired how it was he could see 
so much better through Charley’s glasses than through 
his own, his friend replied : 

“ It is because the big ends of my glasses are so 
much larger than yours, Harold. They take in more 
light and enable you to see farther.” 

“ Although they are much bigger, Charley, they are 
awfully light. I don’t think they weigh as much as 
mine. Why is that ? ” 

“ Because the tubes are made of a very light metal 
called aluminium,” was the reply. 

The boys had been looking at a faint streak on the 
northwestern horizon that marked the position of a 
distant steamer. Every now and then Rompey would 
jump up and place his paws on Charley’s shoulders, 
wagging his tail and beginning a series of barks in an 
effort to attract his attention. He was satisfied, how- 
ever, if his young master would only pet him a little. 

At last Harold stopped looking at the distant 
steamer and handed his glasses to Charley without 
saying anything. From the expression on his face 
it was evident there was something on the distant 
vessel that was steaming away so rapidly toward the 
northwest, he greatly missed. Seeing this, Charley 
said : 

“You’re sort of broken up, Harold, aren’t you? 
Well, I don’t wonder. I feel that way myself.” 

“ Of course I feel broken up,” was the reply ; “ and 
I’m not surprised that you are. Our parents are on 

13 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


that steamer and we won’t see them again for at least 
six months.” 

“That’s so, Harold,” replied Charley; “but don’t 
forget, both your parents and mine gave us the choice 
of remaining on Harding Island, or of going back with 
them to England and Australia. We chose to stay 
here, and I am sure if you again had the choice to make 
you would decide to remain.” 

“ Of course I’d choose to stay,” replied Harold. 
“ Think of the jolly times we’ll have in the Harding 
School with Uncle Arthur and Doctor Parsons as 
teachers. Think of the fun we’ll have in the swim- 
ming-pool, in the boats on the lagoons, in the grotto, 
in the cabin of the brigantine, on the smaller islands 
in the lagoon, and all the other jolly things at which a 
fellow can have lots of fun. Of course I would again 
choose to stay, Charley. I don’t believe there are 
many people in the world who know how to teach 
natural history as well as Uncle Arthur, and I think 
that Doctor Parsons is, perhaps, almost as good.” 
With this opinion Charley fully agreed. 

It should be mentioned here that both boys were 
very fond of natural history. Though young, they 
had obtained, either by actual observation, by the cap- 
tain’s teaching, or by reading a choice collection of 
books in their library, a greater amount of informa- 
tion concerning such things than most boys of their 
age possess. 

But by this time even Charley’s powerful glasses 
were unable to show any signs of the distant steamer. 

14 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


So turning to Harold, and pointing to a group of 
people near them, who had also been looking at the 
steamer, Charley said : 

“ Let us join the others. I see they are getting ready 
to leave the cliffs.” 

For the sake of those who have not read the three 
preceding volumes of “ The Pacific Series,” it will be 
well to give a short description of each of them. 

In “ Five Months on a Derelict ” are given the exci- 
ting adventures of two men and three boys on a dere- 
lict brig; i. e., a brig that, although abandoned by its 
people in the belief it was about ready to sink, yet 
continued to float for a long time afterward. The 
men and two of the boys had been passengers on a 
full-rigged ship, the Ketrel of London, bound for 
Japan. This ship was wrecked in the China Sea during 
a severe storm. All her crew, except those in a boat 
under the command of Lieutenant Harding, then the 
first mate of the ship, safely reached the coast of China. 

In the boat commanded by Lieutenant Harding were 
four men and two boys ; two of the men were swept off 
the boat while it was battling with the storm. After 
they had left the vessel, on the night of the fifth day, 
their boat was wrecked by a derelict brig they safely 
boarded. 

After they had been for some time on the brig, they 
picked up at sea a ship’s boat containing the dead bodies 
of four men, and a boy, Charley, who was almost dead 
from starvation and thirst. 

The two men and the three boys had spent five 

15 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


months on that derelict brig in the different portions of 
the Pacific to which it was carried by the winds and 
the ocean currents. 

The party on the derelict had many interesting and 
startling adventures until, at the end of five months, it 
was wrecked during a severe storm on a small coral' 
reef, situated a short distance off the shore of a coral 
island. 

The second volume, Wrecked on a Coral Island,’' 
describes the adventures of the same people after 
they safely reached the island, and had transferred to 
it many things of value from the wrecked brig. They 
called the island Harding Island after their captain. 
The splendid times they had on this island, as well 
as the dangers they experienced, are told. Among 
other exciting incidents was the discovery in a clear- 
ing on one of the islands in the lagoon, of an old 
hut, in which was the skeleton of a man whose hand 
rested on a box containing a written sheet of paper 
giving information of a treasure of pearls they after- 
ward succeeded in securing. This volume also tells of 
a fight with a huge octopus Charley and Harold had 
in one of the limestone grottoes of Parker Cliffs; 
of the dangerous voyage Charley and Harold had when 
they rescued the captain and Hiram from a lonely coral 
islet several days’ journey from Harding Island; and, 
finally, of the manner in which Charley and Harold 
were captured by savages who visited the island in a 
war canoe and carried them away to one of the islands 
of the Marquesas group. 

i6 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The third volume, In Captivity in the Pacific,’’ re- 
lates the exciting adventures of Charley and Harold 
while in the hands of the savages. The boys showed so 
little fear at being carried away that they excited the 
admiration and so gained the good-will of the savages. 
They were subsequently adopted into the family of 
Mahinee, king of the island, and became close friends 
with his only son, Kooloo. 

It is the custom of the Polynesians to cover their 
faces and bodies with tattooings so as to give them- 
selves an awful appearance. This they hope will 
frighten their enemies. Charley and Harold had much 
difficulty in escaping having their faces and bodies 
marked in this manner. It was only because Charley, 
who was a ventriloquist, made the islanders believe 
their gods had placed him and Harold under the protec- 
tion of the taboo, a curious religious belief and custom 
in this part of the world, that they escaped being thus 
disfigured for life. 

An account is also given in this volume of the won- 
derful adventures of Captain Harding, Hiram, and 
Jack, who take one of their boats and Rompey, and 
make the long journey to Mahinee’s island in order to 
rescue Charley and Harold. 

The third volume also contains an account of how 
Charley, Kooloo, and a Polynesian interpreter, named 
Marbonna, were taken prisoners by the people of a 
neighboring valley on the Island of Captivity, the in- 
habitants of which were cannibals. Charley, Kooloo, 
and Marbonna barely escaped being killed and eaten by 
B ly 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


these people. Aided by one of the high priests, a man 
named Miconareo, who they afterward discovered was 
the Doctor Parsons who, according to the log-book 
of the derelict brig, had been its passenger and had 
occupied the cabin, they finally made their escape. A 
battle was fought near the summit of one of the moun- 
tain peaks, and thanks to the timely arrival of Mahi- 
nee and his warriors, with the captain, Hiram, and 
Jack, they conquered their enemies. 

In the battle Kooloo was dangerously wounded on 
the head by a blow intended for his father, Mahinee. 
Doctor Parsons saved the lad’s life by a surgical opera- 
tion. The white people, together with Mahinee and 
Kooloo, returned safely to Harding Island. 

While on the brig, the captain had adopted the plan 
of throwing overboard sealed bottles containing a de- 
scription of the derelict, and requesting that if picked 
up they should be sent to George Harding, Harold’s 
father, at the British consulate at Tokyo. One of 
these bottles was picked up by a ship on board of 
which were Mr. and Mrs. Pleasanton. Mr. Pleasanton, 
a very rich man, in connection with Mr. Harding, 
chartered a steam yacht for the purpose of searching 
for the derelict brig. While on this search the}^ meet 
Waheatoua and Kapiau, two Polynesians, who had 
been on Harding Island, and who showed the yacht the 
way to that island. 

The yacht took them all back to Australia and Eu- 
rope, except the doctor, who was so disfigured by tat- 
tooings that he was unwilling to be seen in a civilized 
l8 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


community. Waheatoua and Kapiau, the Polynesians 
who had settled on Harding Island with their families, 
however, remained on the island with the doctor, only 
making short excursions in their canoes in the neigh- 
borhood. 

The captain had taken with him to Australia and 
Europe a number of pearls the doctor had collected in 
the different islands he had visited, and also the Mad- 
dox pearls they had obtained from the wreck of the 
brigantine. The doctor had requested the captain to 
expend the money obtained from the sale of his pearls 
in the purchase of scientific instruments, books, house- 
hold goods, food stuffs, and such other things as would 
enable him to live comfortably on the island. The 
money obtained from the sale of the Maddox pearls 
was divided by the captain in equal parts between him- 
self, Hiram, Jack, Charley, and Harold. Since the 
captain had determined to return to Harding Island 
and join the doctor, he had expended his share of the 
money in the purchase of articles similar to those he 
had bought for him. He looked forward with great 
pleasure to his sojourn on the island with his old friend, 
since it would give him an opportunity of not only 
continuing his scientific studies, but would also per- 
mit him to take part in the preparation of the doctor’s 
great book, The Physical Geography of the Sea.” 

Before leaving the island. Jack had asked the cap- 
tain as a special favor to permit him, provided his 
guardian was willing, to return with him to the island 
and there continue his studies. The question then arose 

19 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


between the captain and the doctor whether, if this 
permission were granted, it might not be feasible to 
give regular lessons to Charley and Harold as well as 
to such other boys as might desire to enter the school. 
When the matter was presented to Jack’s guardian and 
to the parents of Charley and Harold, they willingly 
gave the boys the choice of going to a boarding-school 
in England or Australia, or going to live for several 
years on Harding Island. 

It did not take either of them a long time to decide. 

“ I will study with Uncle Arthur on Harding Is- 
land,” said Harold. ‘‘ I am sure I can learn more with 
him than at any regular school. I hope you will come 
with me, Charley. Think of the fun we can have,” he 
added. 

“ Don’t worry about that,” said Charley laughing. 
“ Since father and mother have left the choice with me 
I shall certainly choose going to school with the cap- 
tain and the doctor, for they are splendid, jolly men.” 

The sum Hiram obtained from his portion of the 
Maddox pearls caused him to regard himself as very 
wealthy. He had therefore married and, returning to 
the island, had brought his wife with htm. 

When the opening of a school on Harding Island 
had been decided on, Mr. Pleasanton and Mr. Hard- 
ing, who were both rich, insisted on providing the 
materials for the erection of a schoolhouse and dor- 
mitories. They had purchased the steam yacht em- 
ployed in searching the Pacific, and had returned in 
it to the island with the captain. Jack, Charley and 
20 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Harold, and Hiram and his wife. The materials for 
the construction of the schoolhouse and dormitories 
had also been brought over on the yacht. 

While in Australia and Europe the captain had made 
arrangements for the entrance of two pupils from Eng- 
land and one from Australia, and had selected an as- 
sistant teacher, a Mr. Herbert Clarkson, a graduate of 
Oxford University, who was to come with the new 
boys on the ship that was to bring the furniture for the 
school and dormitories. 

The parents of both Charley and Harold had only 
remained in the island for a few days, since both Mr. 
Pleasanton and Mr. Harding had important business 
that required their presence in Australia. They had 
left the island on the yacht. It was this at which the 
boys on the cliffs had been looking as related in the be- 
ginning of this chapter. 


21 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER II 

More Old Acquaintances 

But let us return to the two boys who are standing 
with Rompey on Parker Cliffs. Charley had just said : 

Let us join the others, Harold. I see they are get- 
ting ready to leave the cliffs.” 

The boys now approached a group of people who 
had also been observing the steamer through field- 
glasses. This group included more of our old friends, 
Captain Harding, Doctor Parsons, Hiram, and Jack. 
As the boys approached, the captain said : 

“ Our friends are safely off, boys. I imagine you 
feel pretty blue parting with your parents, but six 
months will soon pass and you will see them again.” 

I know that. Uncle Arthur,” replied Harold. And, 
as if he thought this would be a good time for making 
a request, he added : Uncle, I hope you will give the 
boys of the Harding School plenty of chances of being 
out in the open air, won’t you? ” 

Charley said nothing but listened eagerly for the re- 
ply. Like Harold, he was especially fond of out- 
door life. 

Don’t worry about that, Harold,” was the reply. 

One of the most important classes in our school will 
be that in natural history; but since Doctor Parsons 
22 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


will have charge of that class, I will let him answer 
your question.” 

There will be plenty of chances of your being in 
the open, my lads,” replied the doctor. “ In teaching 
natural history on an island like Harding Island, we 
will find it more convenient to go to our specimens 
than to attempt to bring them to the school. Of course 
we will prepare specimens for our museum, but most 
of our study of natural history will be outside the 
schoolroom. I intend that portions of at least three 
afternoons in every week shall be spent in the boats, 
or on different parts of the island.” 

‘‘ Three cheers for that ! ” cried Charley. ‘‘ I was 
almost certain about the captain, but I did not know 
how you would feel, doctor. Both Harold and I are 
very fond of natural history, and intend making the 
most of our chance of having you as a teacher.” 

And so shall I,” said Jack. ‘‘ I hope too, doctor, 
you will let me help some little in copying the manu- 
script of your great book, most of which I have al- 
ready gone over with the captain.” 

While the above conversation had been going on, 
Hiram said nothing; but when it was finished, turning 
to the doctor, he remarked : 

Ef ye and the cap’n be willing, Hiram Higgen- 
botham would like to jine them classes. He kain’t larn 
things like the lads, but he kin help in gitting speci- 
mens and sich like.” 

You shall certainly join the class, Hiram,” said 
the doctor. 


23 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Two Polynesians who had been standing some little 
distance off now joined them. They did not say any- 
thing, but the captain saw by the expression of their 
faces what they wanted to ask, and turning to the 
doctor, said: 

I think you will find that Waheatoua can aid you 
no little in your out-of-door classes. Waheatoua has 
a far better acquaintance with the life of the ocean and 
the air in this part of the world than most people. He 
has spent so much of his life in his canoe, and has 
visited so many of the islands in the neighborhood, that 
he is well acquainted with the plants and animals of 
the water and the air.” 

When Waheatoua heard what the captain said, he 
grinned and remarked: 

'' Waheatoua know heap about such things. Wa- 
heatoua glad to help you in boat on ocean or on la- 
goon. You let Kapiau come along too ? ” 

‘‘Yes,” was the reply; “both you and Kapiau can 
help us in our out-of-door work.” 

“ Then,” said Charley, turning toward Hiram and 
the two Polynesians, taking off his hat and making a 
pretended reverential bow, “ I respectfully salute the 
outside professors of the Harding School.” 

It was now about two hours before sunset, so they 
got ready to return to Jackson House. 

Descending the sides of the cliffs to a part of Hard- 
ing Channel near the ocean, they got into boat No. 13, 
and Waheatoua and Kapiau into their canoes, and soon 
they' were taking their boats along the northern shore 
24 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


of the channel. Doctor Parsons began asking ques- 
tions about the formation of the channel. 

Did I not understand you to tell me, Harding,” he 
said, that this channel was formed while you were on 
the island ? ” 

It was formed by an earthquake shock that visited 
the island a few months after we had been cast on it,” 
was the reply. 

And did you not tell me that the place where the 
channel is now situated was then high land like the 
cliffs off which we are now rowing? ” 

Yes, Parsons. But then you see the cliffs here had 
been so honeycombed by grottoes cut in them by the 
rain-water that the earthquake shock threw them 
down.” 

But how does it happen,” inquired the doctor, 
“ that the water is so deep here ? I should think if 
the cliffs had been as high as these off which we now 
are, they would have left shallow water.” 

They were higher,” replied the captain ; but they 
had been deeply undermined by the water.” 

“ Tell the doctor about the big grotto in which 
Harold and I were attacked by the giant squid or 
devil-fish,” whispered Charley to the captain. 

'' What’s that? ” said the doctor, who had very acute 
hearing. 

The captain gave a brief description, not only of the 
condition in which he and his companions had found 
a portion of Parker Cliffs, but also of the grotto in 
which Charley and Harold had been shut up during 

25 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


a tide. He also referred to a grotto in which the 
boys had been in the habit of hiding their boat. 

Is that last grotto still standing, Charley ? ” in- 
quired the doctor. “ If so, show it to me.” 

They were then almost directly opposite the grotto, 
so they soon entered it. On seeing it the doctor said : 

“ Harding, during your absence in Europe, I have 
been thinking much about the curious formation of 
this part of Harding Island. Now that I have seen 
the grotto I should like to come here some day with 
you, Hiram, and the boys, and make a careful examina- 
tion of this part of the coast. I see no reason why there 
should not be still other grottoes in the Parker Cliffs. 
Would you like to go with us, boys ? ” he said. 

“ Try us, doctor,” said Charley laughing. ** Would 
it not be great fun, Harold ? ” 

“ It would that,” was the reply. 

After making a short examination of the grotto, the 
boat was taken through the channel toward Jackson 
House. 

But what is this we hear? It sounds like the bark- 
ing of a dog. It cannot be Rompey, for there he stands 
intently listening to the barkings he evidently recog- 
nizes. Charley and Harold have turned their glasses 
to the distant boat-landing, when Charley said: 

There comes Flo. Don’t you see Flo, Rompey? ” 
he said, turning to the dog. 

Rompey certainly acted as if he understood all that 
was said to him ; for, with glad barkings, he answered 
those of the distant dog. 


26 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


As the boat drew near the landing a handsome full- 
blooded collie dog, somewhat younger than Rompey, 
was seen standing at the end of the boat-landing, bark- 
ing a welcome to those in the boat. As soon as the 
boat touched the landing, Rompey jumped out and 
began a game of romps with her. 

I am glad, Charley, you brought Flora with you 
from Australia,” said the doctor. She will be a good 
mate for Rompey.” 

“ She is a pure breed of collie,” said Charley, and 
will be splendid company for Rompey.” 

As already described in “ Five Months on a Dere- 
lict,” Rompey had a coat of long, flat, thick hair, a long 
tapering head, small partially erect ears, and a slightly 
curved tail. His ears and the back of his head were 
jet black, while his forelegs, the front of the face, a 
large portion of the neck, especially in front, and the 
tip of the tail was snow-white. The other parts of 
his body were jet black. 

Flora, or, as she was called, Flo, on the contrary, 
was curiously reversed as to color. The portions of 
Rompey that were respectively black and white, were 
in her case white and black; for. Flora’s ears back of 
the head were snow-white, while her forelegs, front of 
the face, and much of the neck were jet black, while 
the rest of her body was snow-white. 

After supper on their return from Parker Cliffs, the 
captain said to his companion : 

'' We have so much to do, doctor, that I think we had 
better get Hiram and the boys help us unpack the 
27 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


books and physical apparatus, and put them in the 
library and other rooms on the second floor.” 

The goods referred to by the captain had been 
brought over on the steam yacht, but there had been 
so many other things to be done, before the yacht left 
the island with Mr. and Mrs. Pleasanton and Mr. and 
Mrs. Harding, that they had not yet taken them out 
of the packing cases. 

There were many books to be unboxed, so that it 
was late before they were through. The captain had 
collected a magnificent library on physics, chemistry, 
botany, zoology, mineralogy, and allied subjects, but 
chiefly works on general natural history. 

“ You have certainly picked out a splendid lot of 
books, Harding,” said the doctor, who could hardly be 
persuaded to go on with the work, so interested did he 
become when he opened one book after another, read- 
ing a bit here and a bit there, until the captain good- 
naturedly insisted on his aiding in getting all the books 
out. 

It was but natural the doctor should act in this way. 
He was a well-educated man, who had formerly spent 
much of his time among books. During the absence of 
the captain and the others, he had spent most of his 
time in again eagerly reading the books his friends had 
rescued from the brig. It was therefore a great temp- 
tation as he opened one after another of the new books 
the captain had bought, and saw at a glance instance 
after instance in which old ideas had been replaced by 
new ones, that he should stop now and then to see how 
28 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


far these changes went. However, recalled by the 
captain’s request to aid in the work of unpacking, he 
contented himself by saying : 

“ It will be strange, Harding, if you and I don’t have 
a magnificent time in studying these books.” 

The scientific apparatus was not unpacked until the 
next day. It included the more important devices 
employed in physics and chemistry, especially appa- 
ratus for measuring the pressure and velocity of the 
wind, mercurial and aneroid barometers for measur- 
ing air pressures, various sounding apparatus for de- 
termining the depth of water, apparatus and chemicals 
for a complete chemical laboratory, together with sev- 
eral splendid cameras and a complete equipment for 
the photographic darkroom. 

The next morning they continued unpacking a great 
lot of goods, much of which appealed especially to 
Hiram. These were some forty or fifty kegs of 
wrought-iron nails and spikes of all sizes, as well as 
several hundredweight of pieces of iron and steel of 
such shapes and sizes as would especially increase their 
value to the eyes of the natives, as being suited for the 
heads of spears, lances, hooks, and other similar de- 
vices. Then followed an assortment of cotton goods 
and groceries. Nor had the captain forgotten to bring 
with him a collection of such trees, plants, bulbs, and 
seeds as he thought, from his knowledge on the sub- 
ject, would thrive in the rich moist soil of the islands 
of the South Pacific. 

‘‘ And now,” said the captain, when the unpacking 
29 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


of the goods and instruments had been completed, “ we 
have only commenced to get out the goods the yacht 
has brought over with her. There still remains the 
material intended for the construction of the school- 
house and dormitories. We must get at this work the 
first thing to-morrow. As you all know, we have al- 
ready built the foundations, and will now begin work 
on the erection of the buildings. 

The site selected for the schoolhouse and the dormi- 
tories was on the mainland, about five hundred yards 
east of Jackson House. As in the case of the Jackson 
House, this site was situated on the highest point of 
land on this part of the reef, nearly midway between 
the ocean and the lagoon. The captain placed the 
erection of the house under the charge of Hiram. 

ril get Waheatoua and Kapiau,” said Hiram, to 
help me build it. I hev already spoke to them about 
the matter. They be both wery handy men at sich 
work.” 

“ As we won’t begin this work until to-morrow, 
Hiram,” said the captain, “ suppose we help you un- 
pack your goods to-night.” 

I reckon I’d rather wait until the schoolhouse and 
dormitories be finished. Afore I unpack I want to put 
up a workshop.” 

It did not take more than three weeks to complete the 
schoolhouse and dormitories. The material for their 
construction had been prepared in such a manner that 
it required very little putting together. In this respect 
it was like the material for the cottages they had found 

30 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


on the derelict brig, only here the separate sections of 
the different portions of the building were more nearly 
complete. The work, therefore, progressed rapidly. 
There remained nothing to do but to wait until the 
arrival of the steamer that was to bring them the school 
and dormitory furnishings. 


31 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER III 

Miranda Eliza Higgenson Higgenbotham 

The Harding schoolhouse and dormitories were now 
nearly completed. As soon as the steamer that was 
to bring the assistant teacher, the new white boys, and 
the school furniture, reached the island, and Mahinee, 
the king of the Island of Captivity, had come in his 
canoes with the Polynesian boys, everything would be 
ready to begin school work. 

The school furniture included, besides other things, 
desks, blackboards, globes, and a large clock that was 
to be placed in the main schoolroom. The dormitory 
furniture included the usual bedsteads and bedding, 
chairs, bureaus, looking-glasses, etc. Although it was 
not intended to begin school with more than twelve 
boys, yet the building had been planned so as to make 
it possible greatly to increase the number of pupils 
should the necessity arise. Besides the furniture for 
the school and dormitories, they were to receive the 
necessary articles for a new kitchen that had been 
erected for the preparation of meals for the boys. 

“ I would be obleeged, my lads,” said Hiram, one 
day after the work at the schoolhouse and dormitories 
was as nearly completed as possible until the steamer 
arrived, “ ef ye help me put away some things I brung 

32 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


from Europe. As ye know, Hiram Higgenbotham in- 
tends living on this bloomin’ island for the rest of his 
life. Ef course he may, now and then, take a trip to 
Australey or to Europe where he hez kept a part of 
his money. He asks ye now to help him git some of 
his things stored away.” 

“ Glad to do it, Hiram,” said the boys. 

“ And we will help you also,” said the captain and 
the doctor. 

‘‘ Then come with me,” said Hiram grinning, and 
ril show ye some of the stuff wot I brung with me.” 

‘‘We have already seen the best thing you brought 
to the island, Hiram,” said the captain laughing. 

“ And wot be thet, ef ye please ? ” inquired Hiram, at 
a loss to understand what the captain meant. 

“ Mrs. Higgenbotham, of course, Hiram.” 

“ I reckon ye’re right thar, sir,” said Hiram with a 
grin. “ Mandy, fer thet’s wot she axes me to call her, 
is sartinly the best thing I brung with me.” 

“ What is her full name, Hiram? ” inquired Charley. 

“ Miranda Eliza Higgenson Higgenbotham,” said 
Hiram proudly. 

“ That’s a great name, Hiram,” said Charley soberly. 

“ Thar’s no doubt about thet,” said Hiram, much 
pleased. 

They had all met Hiram’s wife before on the steam 
yacht and had learned to like her greatly. She was 
nearly Hiram’s age, probably in the neighborhood of 
forty, and was a comely, healthy, happy-looking wo- 
man. As to weight she was perhaps two hundred 
c 33 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


pounds or over. She was an English woman whom 
Hiram had been courting on and off for the last twenty 
years. They had only been waiting until they got a lit- 
tle money together in order to live comfortably, so that 
when Hiram received his share of the money received 
from the sale of the pearls, they had been promptly 
married, the bride accompanying her husband to Hard- 
ing Island. 

Hiram leading the way, they entered the kitchen of 
Jackson House, where they found Mrs. Higgenbotham 
busy in looking after some work. 

“ Mandy, I hev brung the captain, the doctor, and 
the boys to help me put away some of my stuff.” 

“ I be glad you ’ave. Tram. Those things ’ave been 
cluttering up the room long enough. Will you store 
them in the hattic? ” 

“ No, Mandy,” replied Hiram, “ the attic won’t an- 
swer.” And then turning to the captain, he said : “ I 
hev brung a forge and anvil, a lot of carpenter’s and 
cabinet-maker’s tools, a foot lathe for metal working, 
and the like. I reckon they’ll be of great help to us. 
Then I hev brung different kinds of wood and metal, 
sich as iron, steel, and brass, pretty much the same as 
ye hev, captain,” he continued, pointing proudly to 
thirty or forty kegs, which he informed them were 
filled with spikes, nails, screws, together with iron and 
steel rods and plates. 

“ Why, Hiram,” exclaimed the captain, you will 
never be able to use all these things.” 

“ The things wot I kaint use, cap’n,” said Hiram, 

34 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


''Waheatoua and Kapiau kin trade off. They kin take 
them in their boats to the different islands, and in this 
way a wery pretty business kin be established.” 

“ Well, Hiram,” said the captain laughing, you 
have certainly been burning your money.” 

“ I hev thet, captain,” said Hiram grinning, “ but I 
ain’t spent it all, neither. I hev one pretty bank ac- 
count in Australey and another in England; fer ye 
must not forgit thet Hiram Higgenbotham got sich a 
pile of money fer his share of the pearls thet he be a 
rich man.” 

Hiram now approached three huge boxes that had 
not been opened, and said proudly : 

“ Now what would ye say I hed in here, cap’n ? ” he 
inquired, pointing to the boxes. 

“ I am sure I don’t know, Hiram,” was the reply. 

Kin ye tell, doctor? ” he said, turning to that gen- 
•"jeman. 

“ No, Hiram, I cannot.” 

‘‘ Well then, Mr. Charley and Mr. Harold and Mr. 
Jack, what do ye say? ” 

“ I suspect they are cannon,” said Charley laughing. 

“ I agree with Charley, Hiram,” said Jack. 

And so do I,” said Harold, ‘‘ but what can you do 
with cannon, Hiram ? ” 

‘‘ Wall,” said Hiram, turning to the captain, whom 
he answered rather than Harold, ever sence we guv 
the great ' make-thunder ’ to Mahinee, Hiram Higgen- 
botham hez said to hisself thet the fust time he could 
do so he would hev some big ‘ make-thunders ’ on 
35 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Harding Island. I allow thet a thing like a gun is not 
wanted often, but when it is wanted it’s wanted pretty 
bad.” 

“ You are right there, Hiram,” said the captain. 

What are you thinking of doing with the guns ? ” 
Wall, sir,” was the reply, “ ef ye and the doctor 
don’t object we might mount the big fellow and one 
of the little fellows on Parker Cliffs, so they kin be 
pointed either toward the ocean or the lagoon, and the 
other in front of Jackson House, so that it kin be 
pinted toward the lagoon.” 

“ That will be an excellent disposition of the guns ; 
don’t you think so, doctor?” 

“I do,” said the doctor; and without wishing to 
excite any unnecessary alarm I would say that in my 
opinion it is not at all improbable that a time may come 
when we may need these guns. If the news is spread 
among the people of the neighboring islands, and I do 
not see how this can be avoided, that there are such 
treasures here as are to be found in these kegs, it is 
not improbable that an expedition may be sent against 
the island for the purpose of seizing all our goods.” 

They now unpacked the three boxes that contained 
one large gun and two smaller ones, with their car- 
riages, etc., complete. They were good-sized guns, the 
smaller ones being much larger than the bronze “ make- 
thunder ” Hiram referred to as having been presented 
to Mahinee, king of the Island of Captivity. 

“ ’Iram,” said Mrs. Higgenbotham, you hain’t yet 
showed the captain and doctor the beautiful things 

36 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


you bought for me. Perhaps they would like to see 
them, for they are mighty pretty.’' 

All right, Mandy,” said Hiram proudly, “ I will 
leave you to do the showing.” 

It was evidently a matter of great pride to Mrs. 
Higgenbotham when she brought out of their bedroom 
various articles in the way of silk stuffs, bonnets, 
shawls, dresses, etc., in far from subdued colors. One 
of the things that appeared especially to please both 
Hiram and his wife was a huge Merry Widow ” hat, 
fully three feet in diameter. 

‘‘ Put it on, Mandy, and let ’em all see how beautiful 
it be.” 

After no little trouble this was done to the mutual 
satisfaction of Hiram and Mrs. Higgenbotham, as well 
as to the amusement of the boys. 

'‘Ye see,” he remarked proudly to the captain, " thet 
sence I be a rich man I thought while I was about it 
I would give Mandy ez good a sized hat ez any of 
them I had seen in London or Australey.” 

" I suppose, Hiram,” inquired the captain, " you 
have brought powder and balls for the guns.” 

"I hev,” said Hiram grinning; “and hev stored 
them some distance from Jackson House. I calc’late 
we’ll keep a most of the powder and balls in the grotto 
on Parker Cliffs, and the rest in some place near 
Jackson House.” 

When they had finished an inspection of Mr. and 
Mrs. Higgenbotham’s valuables, they went with the 
captain and the doctor to Jackson House. After some 
37 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


comments about Hiram’s purchases, the doctor, turn- 
ing to the boys, said : 

‘‘ And now how about you, boys ? ” inquired the doc- 
tor. I imagine your money burned your pockets, 
did it not, or did your parents make you put it all 
away at interest? ” 

“ It was not so bad as that, doctor,” said Charley 
laughing. And Jack and Harold tell me that, like 
myself, they were permitted to spend this money as 
they wished. We agreed, however, not to tell you 
anything about our purchases until the work of putting 
up the schoolhouse and dormitory buildings had been 
gotten out of the way.” 

We got rather tired waiting, uncle,” said Harold; 
but when we remembered that this would be your 
birthday we were all the more willing to wait.” 

‘^Gracious!” cried the captain, “this is my birth- 
day. I had forgotten all about it.” 

“ But I had not,” cried Harold. 

“ Nor we,” said Jack and Charley. 

“ If you don’t mind telling me I would like to hear 
just how each of you has spent his money,” said the 
doctor. “ Suppose I begin with you. Jack? ” 

“ All right, sir,” said Jack. “ I bought a compound 
microscope, the best I could find in London, as a 
present to both you and the captain. The captain 
did not know anything about this when I bought it, 
for I wished to surprise him on our arrival at the 
island. However, I consulted people who were up in 
microscopes and I think you will find it all right.” 

38 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ It is a magnificent instrument/’ said the doctor and 
the captain, who at once began examining it when Jack 
handed it to them. 

The things I purchased for the doctor and myself,” 
said the captain, cost me so much that I could not 
afford to buy an instrument like this.” 

It’s a splendid instrument. Jack,” said the doctor, 
who had already tried it with a test object. I see it 
is provided with the one-twentieth of an inch oil- 
immersion lens. What else did you buy ? ” 

‘‘ Oh, a few odds and ends, some books, and a 
smaller microscope for my own use.” 

And now, Charley, let us hear what you did with 
your money ? ” 

“ Well,” said Charley, I talked the matter over 
with the captain, and he agreed with me at least as to 
some of my purchases.” And then turning to the doc- 
tor, he said, ‘‘ Here is something Harold and I clubbed 
together and bought for you, doctor,” handing him a 
magnificent full-jeweled gold watch. Please ac- 
cept this from us as something you might perhaps care 
to have about you.” 

Thank you, boys,” said the doctor. “ You have 
indeed greatly surprised me. It is a magnificent watch. 
I have greatly missed having a good timepiece.” 

And this,” said Harold, at a sign from Charley, 
is something that Charley and I clubbed together to 
purchase. We didn’t say anything to you about it. 
Uncle Arthur, but we were sure we would be safe in 
buying it.” With that he handed the captain another 
39 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


watch, adding, “ As you will see, it is a companion 
watch to the doctor’s.” 

“ Then,” said the captain, I know it is a fine time- 
piece. I am much obliged to you, boys.” 

“ And now tell me what else you bought, Charley,” 
said the doctor. 

‘‘ I purchased something for Mahinee,” said Char- 
ley; “ for he was certainly kind to us on the island. I 
have also bought a few trinkets for Kooloo, Marbonna, 
Waheatoua, and Kapiau.” 

“ And what else have you bought, Harold? ” 

I also have bought some things for Mahinee, Koo- 
loo, Otoa, and others of our acquaintances on the Is- 
land of Captivity.” 

'' You haven’t forgotten, Charley,” said the doctor, 
to bring a lot of drawing materials with you, have 
you?” 

‘‘ No,” was the reply; “ I have bought a lot of that 
kind of stuff and also some apparatus for legerdemain.” 

‘‘ What do you mean ? ” inquired the doctor. 
Things for showing sleight of hand, or what peo- 
ple call magic.” 

‘‘ That’s very good, Charley,” said the doctor, “ but 
I think it might be well to keep the knowledge of such 
apparatus from the savages here. A time may come 
when you would like to show them such things to 
prove that you are indeed a great white priest.” 

‘‘ I thought of that, doctor,” said Charley, “ and 
came to the same conclusion.” 

“ Captain,” inquired Charley one day, when do 
40 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


you expect Mr. Clarkson, the assistant teacher, and the 
boys from Europe and Australia to reach Harding 
Island ? ” 

“ They may be here now almost any time during the 
next week,’’ was the reply. 

“ And when do you think Mahinee and Otoa will 
arrive with the boys from the Marquesas ? ” 

I am not certain,” was the reply, ‘‘ but probably 
they will also arrive some time next week.” 


41 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER IV 

Arrival of the Steamer and the New Boys 

Our boys were greatly interested in the new school and 
frequently discussed its prospects among themselves. 

“ It will be an all right school,” said Charley. “ I 
don’t care how hard a thing may seem to be, when 
the captain begins to explain it becomes so easy that a 
fellow is surprised he ever should have thought it 
difficult.” 

Uncle Arthur is a great teacher,” said Harold, 
who was proud of his uncle. 

He is a magnificent teacher,” said Jack, who was 
especially attached to the captain. 

‘‘ And the doctor is all right too,” remarked Harold. 

I have been talking with him lately and have dis- 
covered what a jolly man he is, especially when he is 
out walking. It is all nonsense to suppose because a 
man is full of knowledge that his knowledge knocks 
all the fun out of him.” 

That’s so,” said Charley. It’s certainly true of 
the captain and of the doctor too. Indeed, I sometimes 
think it is because these men know so much that they 
are so jolly. As for the doctor, he is all the time talk- 
ing about the things he sees, and as to making a thing 
clear, when he begins to explain it he can make it as 
42 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


dear as the captain himself. I am sure I can say noth- 
ing stronger than that.” 

“ Yes,” said Harold, “ the doctor is certainly a 
splendid teacher. He has been talking to me about 
some of the animals and plants on the island. He 
seems to know all about them.” 

It might, perhaps, for the sake of those who have 
not read the other volumes of ‘‘ The Pacific Series,” be 
well to give a description of Harding Island on which 
most of the events to be recorded in this book will 
take place. Harding Island was a coral island of the 
regular lagoon type; that is, it consisted of a narrow, 
irregular, ring-shaped strip of land that almost com- 
pletely surounded a body of water called a lagoon. 

The width of most of this ring of land was only a 
third or a half-mile, so that by walking directly across 
it from the ocean toward the lagoon the latter body of 
water was soon reached. The land was quite low, not 
reaching in most places a height greater than about 
eighteen feet above mean tide. On the northeastern 
part of the island, however, the land was much higher, 
it having been considerably raised at a place called 
Parker Cliffs, already referred to in the first chapter. 

When they first reached Harding Island the lagoon 
was completely cut off from the ocean; at least it ap- 
peared to be, but as they afterward discovered, while 
exploring a limestone grotto in Parker Cliffs, an un- 
derground channel extended between the two bodies 
of water. At the present time a considerable portion 
of the high land had been thrown down during an 
43 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


earthquake, forming, as already mentioned, a ship 
channel they called the Harding Channel. 

In the waters of the Harding Lagoon were four is- 
lands extending partly across the lagoon from the 
southeast to the northwest. They called the two 
largest the Twin Islands, and distinguished them as 
Twin Island No. i, and Twin Island No. 2. Twin 
Island No. i was situated nearest to Harding Channel, 
and Twin Island No. 2 came next to it toward the 
northwest. The two smaller islands were called Rom- 
pey and Satan, but had been named by Jack the 
Kids,” in order to poke fun at Charley and Harold, 
and were sometimes known as Kid Island No i and 
Kid Island No. 2. 

With the exception of Kid Island No. 2, or Satan 
Island, all the islands had separate lagoons. That of 
Twin Island No. i was completely shut off from the 
waters of the main lagoon at low tide, but at high 
tide waves dashed over a portion of flat smooth lime- 
stone rock down which they poured into the lagoon 
itself. It was on this island that the boys had dis- 
covered a magnificent swimming-pool. The inclina- 
tion, down which the waters poured at high tide, 
served as a splendid sliding-board of polished marble. 

The portion of Twin Island No. i that received in 
this way the waters from the Harding Lagoon, over a 
portion of its rim of land, was situated almost directly 
opposite the Harding Channel, so that the water that 
was poured over it into its lagoon came almost directly 
from the ocean outside. 


44 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


It was on Twin Island No. i that they found a 
clearing they called Maddox Clearing, where quite an 
extent of land had been cultivated as a vegetable gar- 
den. The ground for the garden had been cleared 
by an English sailor, named Maddox, whose skeleton 
they found stretched on a bed in a rude hut near the 
clearing. 

As regards the two smaller islands. Kid Island No. 
I had a lagoon that was almost dried up, so that the 
waters were far shallower and, indeed, in some parts 
of the lagoon had dried up so as to leave a mud flat. 
On Kid Island No. 2 the lagoon was completely dried 
up. 

The three boys had good reason to remember the 
first swim they took in the pool in company with the 
doctor. It was on a certain afternoon when they were 
about starting for a bath in the pool that the doctor 
said : 

‘‘ Don't you want a companion, boys ? I would like 
to take a swim with you if you don't object." 

That would be jolly, doctor," replied Charley. 
‘‘ Come and look at our pool and tell us if you have 
ever seen a better one." 

“ If you are going, doctor, I think I'll go too," said 
the captain. 

“ That's splendid," said the boys enthusiastically. 

It did not take them long to row from Jackson 
House to the eastern side of Twin Island, and when 
once there they were soon all in the water having a 
great time. 


45 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The boys soon made two discoveries; viz., that the 
doctor was a better swimmer than any of them, and 
that when he so chose he could come very near being 
more like a boy than any of them ; for he entered into 
the fun of the swimming as if he were no older than 
Charley or Harold. As a profound scholar the doctor 
could be dignified — and generally was so when in the 
schoolroom, but when out with the boys he could 
readily throw off this dignity and become a boy again. 

This is the j oiliest swimming-pool I have ever 
seen, boys,’^ cried the doctor, and I can tell you I 
have seen a great many. I am so fond of swimming 
that I almost always try every new swimming-place 
I come across. I tell you honestly I have never seen 
water more magnificently clear and as splendid in tem- 
perature as this. Then it is quite deep enough here for a 
good header. As for the sliding-board, I don’t suppose 
there is another like it in any other part of the world.” 

I hope, doctor,” said Charley, ‘‘ you will come here 
often with us.” 

‘‘I certainly will,” said the doctor; ‘‘and there is 
one thing we must remember to do. Every boy who 
comes to the Harding School must be taught to swim. 
He must learn to swim just as he learns any of his 
other lessons.” 

“ Then, doctor,” said Charley, “ you will certainly 
have the swimming-classes out in the open air. And 
you will have to come here if you teach the boys to 
swim. And to do this you will have to go into the 
water yourself, will you not?” 

46 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ I will, you young scamp,” replied the doctor in a 
good-natured tone, ‘‘ just as I am going into the water 
now for you,” and making a plunge he started after 
Charley, who had run away as soon as he had finished 
speaking. 

The doctor had no easy task, for Charley was a fine 
swimmer, but then so was the doctor, who had, more- 
over, the advantage of greater strength. In a little 
while he caught the lad and, motioning to him to take a 
good breath, plunged with him under the water and 
placed Charley on the bottom at about a depth of 
twelve feet, and sat on him for a few moments holding 
him down. Then releasing him they both rapidly 
reached the surface where they took a good breath. 

“ That was a good one on me, doctor,” said Charley. 
“ I owe you something for this and I’ll pay you now,” 
and throwing two good handfuls of water into the 
doctor’s eyes was able to make his escape while the 
doctor was rubbing out the water. 

While dressing after their bath they saw Kapiau 
and Waheatoua approaching rapidly in their canoes 
through the Harding Channel. 

“ Better wait for them, doctor,” said the captain. 
‘‘ I think they have news for us.” 

As the men approached, Waheatoua said to them in 
an excited tone: 

Waheatoua and Kapiau see big fire-ship. You 
think fire-ship come to Harding Island soon ? ” 

‘‘ Yes,” was the reply, ‘‘ we are looking for a ship. 
Why do you ask ? ” 


47 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Waheatoua and Kapiau see big fire-ship. Think 
ship coming here.” 

“How far is it from the island?” inquired the 
doctor. 

“ Ship get here pretty soon,” was the reply. 

“ Let us go to Parker Cliffs and watch the steamer 
with our glasses, Harding,” said the doctor. 

They could see from the cliffs that the vessel was 
steaming directly for the island. In an hour or so they 
could recognize its general shape, etc. 

“ Do you know the steamer that was to bring our 
supplies and people, Harding? ” inquired the doctor. 

“ Only that it was a steamer of about the size of the 
one at which we are now looking,” was the reply. 

“ Then this most probably is the one we have been 
expecting,” said the doctor, as he examined it through 
his glasses. 

The vessel at last came so near that they could dis- 
tinctly see it without their glasses. The doctor said 
to Harold and Charley: 

“ You are not expecting your parents to come on this 
steamer, are you, boys ? ” 

“ No, doctor,” was the reply, “ they told us not to 
look for them until six months from the time they left.” 

“ I hope the new boys will be pleasant fellows,” said 
Jack. “ Do you know anything about them, captain ? ” 
he said, turning to that gentleman. 

“ I know some little about the two boys from Eng- 
land. They are brothers ; the older boy, Oliver Stanley 
Whimple, is just about your age, Harold, fifteen and a 
48 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


half years. The other boy, his brother, is Frank Yates 
Whimple, and is not quite seven years of age.’^ 

“ That’s rather young, is it not, Harding? ” inquired 
the doctor. 

‘‘ There’s no doubt about that,” was the reply ; 
but the lad’s parents were obliged to go to South 
America, where they expect to be absent for at least a 
year. They talked the matter over with me and con- 
cluded to send both boys to the school if I was willing 
to let the younger one enter. The elder brother is 
much attached to the little fellow, and will take much of 
the trouble of looking after him off our hands.” 

“ What kind of boys are they. Uncle Arthur? ” in- 
quired Harold. 

‘‘What do you mean, Harold?” inquired the cap- 
tain, quizzing him. “ Do you mean mentally, physic- 
ally, or socially? ” 

“ Please stop jollying me, uncle,” replied Harold. 

“ I mean ” and then stopping to determine what he 

did mean, he added : “ I mean — well, to begin with, are 
they bright? ” 

“ Very bright,” was the reply. “ Indeed, I think 
you will find they can both hold their own with Jack, 
Charley, or you.” 

“ And physically, uncle. Are they strapping big fel- 
lows ? ” 

“ Not at all,” was the reply. “ They are very much 
like you and Charley. I think the older boy will prove 
a pleasant companion for all of you.” 

“ As to their social standing,” said Harold, “ I 

49 


D 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


don’t think I care much for that as long as they are 
decent fellows.” 

“ They come from some of the best people in Lon- 
don,” was the reply. ‘‘ Indeed, their father is one of 
the English nobility, but very sensibly insists that his 
children shall be known simply as the children of Mr. 
Mortimer Louden Whimple.” 

“ And how about the little fellow, uncle ? ” inquired 
Harold. 

“ Very bright,” was the reply, ‘‘ but far from well 
physically.” 

“ Hello,” said the doctor, does that mean I’m to 
have a patient here ? ” 

That is very probable,” was the reply. Indeed, 
the Whimples especially inquired as to whether I 
would be able to look after the health of their child, and 
even thought of sending a physician along; for they 
are well-to-do people. They were much relieved when 
I told them that an able American physician was living 
on the island. The little boy, Frankie, as they call him, 
has no trouble that can be seen, yeHie appears to be far 
from well. His appetite is pooV ant^ his sleep is bad. 
The Whimples’ family doctor,^ celebrated English 
physician, had already advised them to send the lad 
to some place in the South Pacific, and when he heard 
of the Harding School and the character of the work 
it intended to carry on, he advised them by all means 
to let the little fellow go with his brother to this 
school.” 

‘‘ Then the Whimples’ physician,” said the doctor, 

50 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


must be a very sensible man, and I shall be glad to do 
all I can for the youngster. I would not, however, ad- 
vise you, Harding,” he continued, “ to keep him too 
close at his studies. Let him as far as possible spend 
most of his time out of doors.” 

“ I agree with you, doctor,” said the captain. “ I 
had come to that conclusion.” 

“ How about the other boy, captain? ” inquired Jack. 

“ His name is David Greenleaf Bates,” was the re- 
ply. “ I don’t know much about him. I understand 
that the doctor knew his father very well.” 

‘‘ How old is the lad, Harding ? ” inquired the 
doctor. 

‘‘ About eighteen years,” was the reply. 

‘‘ While I don’t know the lad,” replied the doctor, 
‘‘ I know his father who was a very good friend of 
mine. If the boy is at all like him we will find him 
peculiar, yet I hope that at the bottom he will be found 
to be a very nice fellow.” 

‘‘ And now, captain,” said Charley smiling, “ please 
tell us about the assistant teacher, Mr. Herbert Max- 
well Clarkson. I hope he’s all right.” 

I’ll leave that to you to discover, boys,” said the 
captain. I will only say that if you are not delighted 
with him I shall be greatly surprised. He is a grad- 
uate of Oxford University, and intends devoting his 
life as a missionary to the people in these parts of the 
world. He was delighted with the opportunity of be- 
ginning the study of the Polynesian language, and 
yet at the same time to be able to set aside the money 

51 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


he earned as teacher for the support of his only sister 
who lives in Liverpool.” 

‘‘ If Clarkson is a graduate of Oxford University,” 
said the doctor, “ he should be ready to begin the 
study of the Polynesian language. I will be glad to 
help him in these studies.” 

The steamer was now rapidly approaching the island. 
Waheatoua and Kapiau, who had gone out to meet it 
in a canoe, had boarded her and were piloting her into 
the Harding Lagoon through the channel. 


52 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER V 

The Whimples, Primus and Secundus^ and 
David G. Bates 

As soon as the steamer came to anchor, the captain, 
the doctor, and the boys boarded her. 

Glad to see you, Clarkson,” said the captain, step- 
ping up to a young man about twenty-five years of 
age, and shaking him warmly by the hand. Let me 
introduce you to Doctor Parsons.” 

As the two men shook hands, the doctor, seeing the 
young man was surprised at the appearance produced 
by his tattooing, remarked : 

I don’t look like one of the white race, Mr. Clark- 
son, do I ? But I am for all that. I am American, 
and I hope we shall have very pleasant times together 
in the school.” 

‘T’m glad to know you, doctor,” said the young man, 
grasping him warmly by the hand. Markings are 
only skin deep. I feel sure we shall be good friends.” 

While the above conversation had been going on, the 
boys were carefully looking each other over, as boys 
are in the habit of doing when they first meet. Our 
boys. Jack, Harold, and Charley, were sizing up the 
three new boys as well as Mr. Clarkson, and the new 
boys were similarly examining them. 

53 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Clarkson,” said the captain, will you not in- 
troduce the boys ? ” 

‘‘ This is Oliver Stanley Whimple,” said Mr. Clark- 
son, turning to one of the lads who was about fifteen 
and a half-years of age. And this,” he said, turning 
to a little fellow standing near Oliver 

But without waiting for Mr. Clarkson to finish 
speaking, the youngster said : 

I am Whimple Secundus. Whimple Primus is 
my brother. He is fifteen and a half years old. I am 
almost seven. Fll be seven the day before next 
Christmas.” 

The youngster said all this in a matter-of-fact way 
without the least appearance of forwardness. He was 
such a bright little chap who looked straight into the 
eyes of the people with whom he was talking, that 
Charley and Harold took to him at once. But as much 
as the lads liked the youngster there was one who 
fairly fell in love with him, and that was the doctor. 
Seeing, however, that Charley was about to speak, the 
doctor remained silent. 

“What is your first name, Whimple?” inquired 
Charley of the little boy. 

“ Secundus,” was the reply. “ I am called Secundus 
because I come next to Oliver, who is Primus. That 
is what they called me at the great London school 
where I went before I came to the island.” 

“Yes,” replied Charley laughing, “but you have 
another name, have you not?” 

“ Oh, yes,” was the reply, “ I am sometimes called 

54 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Frank. Oliver sometimes calls me ‘ Little Brother.’ ” 
Frank was called Secundus in the London school,” 
said Oliver. “ He always insists on being called by this 
name by people until he gets to like them. Then he asks 
them to call him Frank.” 

“ Then,” said Charley laughing, “ I hope you will 
be Frank to me. My name is Charley. This is Harold, 
and the big boy,” he said, turning to Jack with a 
laugh, is Jack or John.” 

Turning to the other lad, Mr. Clarkson said: 

“ This is David Greenleaf Bates, an Australian lad. 
Doctor,” he said, turning to Doctor Parsons, “ I un- 
derstand you were acquainted with his people. They 
determined on sending him to the Harding School 
when they learned you would be one of its teachers.” 

‘‘ Yes, David,” said the doctor, shaking the lad by 
the hand, I knew your father very well some years 
ago. Was he in good health when you last saw him? ” 

“ Oh, he was all right,” said David in a far from 
courteous manner, and then turning to Jack he said: 

Pm glad to see there is at least one good-sized boy 
in the school, and that they are not all kids like these,” 
turning in a contemptuous manner toward Charley, 
Harold, and Oliver. 

There was a surprised look on the faces of all who 
heard this ungentlemanly remark. But nothing was 
said. The lad, turning to the captain, then remarked : 

“ Please tell some one to show me the room I am to 
occupy in the school, and have them carry my things 
there as soon as possible.” 


55 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The captain gave the boy a look that greatly aston- 
ished him. He was silent for a full minute, when he 
finally said : 

Your room will be shown you when we are ready 
to do so. As to your things you can carry them over 
to the schoolhouse yourself.” 

You are making a bad beginning, David,” said 
the doctor. Unless you make friends with the peo- 
ple here you will have a very poor time on Harding 
Island.” 

The disagreeable silence that again followed was 
fortunately broken by the younger Whimple who, turn- 
ing to Charley, said: 

You see, I am Secundus Whimple to that boy,” 
pointing to David, ‘‘ because I don’t like him.” 

Our boys now again began closely examining Mr. 
Clarkson, who was a splendid specimen of manhood, 
being at least six feet three inches in his stocking feet, 
with well-developed muscles. Indeed, as they after- 
ward learned, he was the crack athlete of his univer- 
sity. Though necessarily brief, this examination 
proved entirely satisfactory to the boys. Mr. Clark- 
son, who saw what they were doing, said in a pleasant 
manner : 

'' Well, boys, I see you are looking me over. Will 
I pass? Come, now, be frank with me. What do you 
think. Jack? ” he said, turning to that lad. 

I beg your pardon, Mr. Clarkson,” said Jack, 
blushing, ‘‘ if I seemed to be examining you too 
closely.” 


56 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ That’s all right, Jack,” was the reply; but please 
answer my question.” 

‘‘ Then,” said Jack, I am certain I shall like you.” 

‘‘ What do you say ? ” he said, turning to Harold and 
Charley. 

You are all right,” was the reply. We’ll like you 
sure.” 

‘‘ I guess,” said Frank, coming up to Charley and 
Harold, that to you my name will be Frank and not 
Secundus.” 

Glad to hear that, Frank,” said Charley. “ I am 
sure Harold and I will be great chums with you and 
Oliver.” 

What does he mean by chums, Ollie ? ” inquired 
the little fellow of his brother. 

“ I’ll tell you more about it after a while, Frank,” 
said Oliver. ‘‘ But he means he hopes you and I 
will be with him and Harold a great deal, and that 
we will like one another.” 

Then you shall be my chummies,” said Frank, who 
had not remembered the exact name. 

We shall for sure,” said Charley laughing. 

After making arrangements with the captain of the 
ship for transporting their goods to Jackson House, 
and inviting the officers to take dinner with them, they 
left in the boat, and landing at Jackson House went 
with Mr. Clarkson to the school-building where the 
boys had their rooms pointed out to them, explaining 
that the furniture, etc., would be placed in them as 
soon as it was brought from the steamer. 

57 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ For a time at least,” said the captain, turning to 
Jack, Charley, and Harold, you will room with us at 
Jackson House as you have done in the past. Indeed,” 
he added, “ I may leave you to choose whether you 
will stay there permanently or take up your quarters 
in the school dormitories.” 

Knowing the fun it is possible for a crowd of bright, 
wide-awake boys to have when rooming together in a 
building, Charley, turning to Harold, whispered: 

“ I think we will choose to sleep in the school dormi- 
tories, don’t you ? ” 

“ Sure,” was the reply. 

As soon as the captain and the doctor were together, 
the doctor, turning to his friend, said : 

“ Harding, I am afraid we shall have trouble with 
that boy David. Shall I take him in hand or leave 
him to himself for a while ? ” 

“ Leave him to himself,” was the reply. He is sure 
to get into a fight with some of the boys before long, 
and I trust that he will get a thrashing that will do him 
much good.” 

All right,” said the doctor. I rather think you’re 
right. I imagine he has never gone to school before, 
and has been coddled and spoiled by his mother; for 
I believe his father is away from home most of the 
time.” 

“ We will give him a chance,” said the captain ; “ but 
of course we will stand no nonsense. It sometimes 
happens that boys like David make fine men, if they 
only have the nonsense knocked out of them. But if 

58 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


he doesn’t improve I’ll pack him off to Australia. I do 
not intend to let a boy like him upset our school.” 

After the boys were shown their living-rooms and 
had put away their things, Mr. Clarkson went over 
to Jackson House to talk matters over with the captain, 
while David remained in his room. Charley, Harold, 
Oliver, and Frank were left together. The conversa- 
tion naturally turned on the school, especially about the 
captain and the doctor, concerning whom Oliver 
wished to get information. 

I am sure I shall like the captain and the doctor,” 
said Oliver. ‘‘ I don’t know why it is but I seem to 
be drawn toward both of them.” 

‘‘ You will like them all the more when you get to 
know them,” was the reply. ‘‘ They are both splendid 
men.” 

Charley,” said Oliver, there ought to be plenty 
of good swimming here.” 

“ I should say there was,” replied Charley, and then 
commenced telling him about their swimming-pool. 

‘‘ The first thing for me to do is to learn to swim,” 
said Oliver. I have been wanting to do this for 
many years, but have never had the chance.” 

Cannot swim ! ” cried Charley in surprise. “ Gra- 
cious, what fun you have lost. We will teach you, and 
will give you the first lesson to-morrow.” 

The boys then began telling in glowing terms all 
about the swimming-pool, the sliding-board, and other 
things that they were sure would interest the new boys. 

‘‘ A number of Polynesian boys will probably come 

59 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


to the school to-morrow,” said Harold. Two of 
them are the sons of the kings of two islands of the 
Marquesas. One of them, Kooloo, is a great swimmer. 
He is about our age and I think you will like him. But 
tell me what kind of a man is Mr. Clarkson ? I feel sure 
I shall be fond of him.” 

“ You will find him all right,” replied Oliver. ‘‘ I 
think from what I have seen of him he will make a 
good teacher. He knows I cannot swim and has 
offered to teach me.” 

‘‘ Then,” said Charley, we will ask him to go with 
us to-morrow when we will give you your first lesson.” 

‘‘ And, Ollie,” said Frank, who had been listening to 
the conversation, '' when you and Charley go, please 
take me. I want to learn to swim too. I won’t go in 
to-morrow. I want to see the place first and get used 
to it.” 

‘‘ What do you say, Charley ? ” inquired Oliver. 
‘‘ Will Frank be in the way ? I always like to have him 
around me.” 

'Hn the way ?” was the reply. '' Not at all. We will 
be glad to have the youngster with us.” 

The next day Mahinee and Otoa arrived with their 
canoes. Mahinee had brought five war canoes and 
Otoa two. As was usually the case they had brought 
crews large enough to keep up the paddling both day 
and night. They were in all some ninety-six warriors, 
together with six of their boys for the school. Kooloo, 
Otoa, the only son of Otoa, the king of Waheatoua’s 
island, together with three boys, sons of Mahinee’s 
6o 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


chiefs, and the son of Waheatoua. All of these boys 
were about the same age as Harold and Charley. 

The Polynesian boys were shown their rooms in the 
school building by Mr. Clarkson. The dormitories 
were on the second floor of the school building. This 
greatly surprised the Polynesian lads. Then too, the 
idea of sleeping in beds instead of on mats spread on 
the floor was quite novel to them. Kooloo, however, 
who as described in ‘‘ In Captivity in the Pacific,” had 
become accustomed to a bed, told his companions how 
very pleasant a good mattress and bed are. 

Kooloo, who had now entirely recovered from the 
effects of the blow he had received on his head during 
the fight at the lava cave, described in the third volume 
of this series, was very glad to see Charley and Harold 
again. 

Mahinee appeared delighted to see them. 

Mahinee is glad to see his half-sons, Charleyo 
Mahinee and Harealdo Mahinee. Did they have a 
good time in big ship that took them across the great 
water ? Are their people well ? ” 

“We had a great time and left our parents in good 
health,” replied Charley. “ They will come again to 
the island in six months.” 

Among the things Charley and Harold had pur- 
chased with a portion of their share of the money re- 
ceived from the sale of the Maddox pearls, were two 
powerful binocular glasses and two handsomely orna- 
mented daggers. 

Taking the first opportunity when Mahinee, Otoa, 
6i 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


and Kooloo were alone with them, Charley said to 
Mahinee : 

“ Charleyo Mahinee and Harealdo Mahinee are very 
happy to see their half-father, Mahinee, his son, Koo- 
loo, and the great Otoa, friend of Mahinee. Will not 
the great Mahinee and Otoa give his half-sons the 
great happiness of accepting these little gifts they 
have brought for them from the country across the 
great water? ” 

Mahinee and Otoa were greatly pleased with the 
gifts, especially with the steel dagger and the beautiful 
sheath in which it was kept. Kooloo was made happy 
by a bugle the boys gave him, especially when Charley 
sounded on it different calls. Kooloo tried to do the 
same, but was unable since the bugle requires no little 
skill to use properly. 

Perhaps,’’ said Mahinee anxiously, “ Charleyo will 
show Kooloo how to make these beautiful sounds.” 

‘‘ I certainly will,” was Charley’s reply. 

Besides these gifts the boys had purchased some 
trinkets for Waheatoua and Kapiau that greatly de- 
lighted them. 

But what pleased Mahinee as much as anything was 
the manner in which little Frank was drawn toward 
him. The tattooings on his face and body appeared in 
the eyes of the youngster so wonderful and beautiful, 
that he was constantly hanging around Mahinee in 
order the better to observe them. This greatly pleased 
the chief, so that a friendship between them grew 
rapidly. Mahinee called him the ‘‘ Little White Chief.” 

62 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


During this visit to the island, Mahinee and Otoa 
definitely located the site for a colony of Polynesians 
from both of their islands. This site was in the south- 
eastern part of the island, about a mile from the 
southern shore of the Harding Channel. It was ar- 
ranged that the colonists should leave for Harding 
Island shortly after Mahinee and Otoa reached their 
islands. This would bring them to Harding Island 
probably during the next month. 

Mahinee's and Otoa’s boats had brought with them 
in the way of presents to their white friends, large sup- 
plies of delicious fruit, which was greatly enjoyed. 
After taking on fresh water and food they left in their 
canoes for their respective islands. 


63 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER VI 
Whimple Secundus 

In accordance with their plan of not keeping the 
younger Whimple too much indoors, he was permitted 
to leave the schoolroom pretty much as he liked. 
Since there were no wild animals to be feared, and no 
dangers could befall him if he only kept away from the 
water, they permitted him to wander anywhere in the 
neighborhood of the school, that he might desire. He 
was, however, strictly forbidden to go into a boat 
alone until he had learned how to swim. 

There was one place the little fellow especially liked 
to visit. This was Hiram’s workshop. He greatly en- 
joyed sitting there watching Hiram make things out 
of wood and sometimes even out of iron on his foot 
lathe. It is needless to say that he was always wel- 
comed by Hiram who was fond of children. Another 
place where he could also frequently be found, was in 
the kitchen that was now presided over by Mrs. Hig- 
genbotham. This good lady was especially pleased 
to have the young boy, whom she called “ her little 
laddie,” come to see her, and was politic enough to 
make his visits attractive by reason of the eatables of 
which she soon learned the youngster was especially 
fond. 




64 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The tattooings on Doctor Parsons, like those on 
Mahinee, possessed a strong fascination for the little 
fellow. This greatly pleased the doctor, who did his 
best to please his little friend, so it soon happened 
that the two were frequently seen together. 

Although they had now been on the island but for 
a short time, it was long enough for the doctor to see 
that his little companion was in a delicate state of 
health that might lead to lung trouble if not carefully 
looked after. He was therefore especially anxious 
that the lad should live in the open air as much as pos- 
sible during the time the sun was shining. He en- 
couraged him to accompany him when he was in the 
boat or on the land, and had also permitted Hiram 
to take him to the Maddox Clearing whenever he 
visited it to look after the vegetable garden. Now 
they had a greater number to feed there was a necessity 
for increasing their vegetable products. Waheatoua 
and Kapiau, and those of their families who could aid 
in the work, spent some of their time with Hiram at 
the clearing. 

Frank was always glad to go on these excursions. 
A part of the time he would spend watching Hiram at 
his work and talking with him. During the rest of the 
time he would wander about the neighborhood. 

There was one place the little fellow especially liked 
to visit. This was the Maddox log cabin with the 
cocoanut palm growing near the middle of the room, 
and the old wooden bedstead on which they had found 
the skeleton. 


E 


6s 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The youngster, who had been told the story of what 
had been found in it, always called this place, “ The 
Dead Man's House." Frequently, when Hiram and 
the others were busy working at the clearing, the little 
fellow would wander off to the cottage and would play 
either in the Dead Man’s House or on the outside in 
the neighborhood. 

There was another place that also strongly attracted 
him. This was the cabin of the coral-encrusted brigan- 
tine. Before the time of the earthquake they had found 
it resting in fairly deep water off the shore near Parker 
Cliffs. During the earthquake, however, it had been 
washed ashore by a great wave, and was now resting 
high and dry on the coast. When Waheatoua and 
Kapiau, who often took the youngster in their canoe, 
were in the neighborhood fishing, they would leave 
him in the cabin for hours together, taking him back 
with them on their return to Jackson House. 

But it was a special favor to the youngster when his 
brother, Charley, and Harold would accompany him 
in his out-of-door wanderings, and especially when 
they would sit with him in the cabin of the brigantine. 
On these occasions he would also claim a story from 
Charley who never disappointed him. 

One day, on entering Hiram’s workshop, the little 
lad said: 

“ Mr. Hiram, if you get time to-day won’t you make 
something for me ? ’’ 

Hiram’ll be glad to do so, laddie,’’ was the reply. 

What do ye want? ’’ 


66 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ Please make me a boat with little sails that I can 
play with on the lagoon.” 

ril sartinly do thet,” said Hiram; ‘‘but ye must 
only take it to a place where I show ye where the water 
is not deep. Frank must learn to swim as soon as he 
can, and then he kin play anywhere.” 

“ Mr. Charley and Mr. Clarkson have promised to 
teach me soon how to swim.” 

“ I reckon then ye’ll soon be paddling around in the 
water way over your head.” 

“ Won’t that be great? ” said the youngster. 

“ It will fer sartin,” was Hiram’s reply. “ But ye’ll 
promise only to sail the boat where I pint out to ye ? ” 

“ I’ll promise,” was the reply. 

“ Then I’ll make it now,” was the reply, “ and ye kin 
sit here and watch me.” 

School work had now fairly commenced, and things 
were going on in a satisfactory manner. There was 
only one boy who was not thoroughly enjoying himself 
and that was David Bates. 

Though secretly in awe of Captain Harding, the 
lad had not yet been conquered. He was only sub- 
dued for the time. He felt out of sorts with every one, 
especially with himself. Of this fact, however, he was 
ignorant. Like most people of his kind he firmly be- 
lieved the people of Harding Island were treating him 
unfairly, so that he began to look on himself as a kind 
of martyr. 

One afternoon, after the close of school, not caring 

67 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


to remain with the boys who, indeed, did not hesitate 
to let him see plainly that his company was not de- 
sired, David strolled off by himself to the lagoon back 
of Jackson House. It was the day Hiram had made a 
boat for the younger Whimple, and taking him to a 
part of the lagoon where the water was shallow, after 
showing him how to sail it and bring it back again by 
means of an attached string, had gone off leaving the 
youngster by himself. 

When David saw that the little fellow was by himself 
he began to bully him. 

“ What are you doing here, kid? ” he exclaimed. 

‘‘ I am sailing my boat,” was the reply. ‘‘ Mr. Hi- 
ram has just made it for me. I think it is a very beauti- 
ful boat, don’t you ? ” he inquired of David. 

“ No, I don’t,” said David roughly. '' It’s a very 
poor boat, and you don’t know how to sail it. Here, 
I’ll show you.” 

“ But I don’t want you to show me,” said the young- 
ster. 

David said nothing, but snatching the string from 
the boy’s hand hauled in the boat and, pulling off the 
string, placed it in the water where, caught by the wind, 
it was soon blown out of reach. 

“ Now, see what you have done,” cried Frank. “ I 
think you ought to be ashamed of yourself to treat a 
little boy in this way.” 

“ See here, youngster,” replied David, don’t get 
too fresh or I’ll wallop you.” 

Frank was about to say something when David get- 

68 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


ting angry struck the little fellow a blow that hurt him 
no little; and was about to strike again when he was 
surprised by seeing Charley running toward him. 

It was on one of those rare occasions when Charley 
was not accompanied by Harold. He had strolled 
alone down to the lagoon for the purpose of making a 
sketch. Running quickly to David he said : 

“ You lubberly coward, aren’t you ashamed of your- 
self to strike a little fellow like that ? ” 

Hello,” said the bully, “ here’s another kid. I 
suppose I’ll have to thrash you as well as the little one. 
Well, I’ll begin with you now. So get ready to take 
your thrashing.” 

‘‘ That is, if you are able to thrash me,” replied Char- 
ley, throwing off his coat. 

Charley was so much smaller than David that the 
latter did not for a moment suppose there would be 
any trouble in thrashing him. He therefore said: 

You had better look out. You are going to get 
a terrible thrashing.” 

I’ll look out all right,” said Charley. Before you 
talk about thrashing me you had better be sure you can 
do it.” 

“ Oh, stop your bragging,” cried David, at the same 
time making a rush at Charley. 

Now boxing was one of the things that had been 
taught in the school to which Charley had gone while 
in Australia. He had always been fond of it, and had 
become an adept in the art of self-defense. David, 
who had never gone to school, knew nothing whatever 
69 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


about it. He had an idea that the only thing necessary 
to do was to rush at his opponent, strike him two or 
three blows, grab him, throw him down, sit on him, 
and then continue to pummel him until he got tired. 

It was not long, however, before David discovered 
there were things in boxing he had never dreamed of. 
When he rushed at Charley and tried to strike him a 
savage blow, Charley quietly stepped to one side, and 
gave him a blow between the eyes that made him see 
stars, and at the same time made his nose bleed. How- 
ever, he kept his feet, and growing very angry made 
another rush at Charley. But somehow or other he 
could not manage to get any blow in on Charley, 
though he soon received a blow in his left eye that 
quickly put it in what is known in the boxing world as 
“ in mourning.” As David was about to withdraw he 
received another blow with Charley’s other hand in the 
other eye that made him feel queer all over. He kept 
his feet, however, and that was all he did keep. As to 
his temper, he lost it completely, and being no longer 
cool he cried out : 

Wait until I catch you and I’ll show you what I’ll 

do.” 

But Charley said nothing. When David made 
another rush at him Charley continued planting blows 
both in his face and on his body. Finding he had met 
his master, David soon stopped all efforts to strike 
Charley and began to blubber. 

Have you had enough, or shall I give you some 
more ? ” inquired Charley. 

70 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ IVe had enough,” was the reply. 

“ Will you promise never again to bully the little 
fellow?” 

David, who was thoroughly conquered, made the 
promise. 

‘‘ Then,” said Charley, pointing to Frank’s boat, 
which was now far out in the lagoon, “ take off 
your clothes and go get that boat. I know you 
can swim.” 

‘‘ What ! ” exclaimed David again angry, “ get that 
little kid’s boat? I guess not.” 

Then you’ve not had enough,” said Charley, again 
beginning to pummel him. 

“ Here, stop that,” cried the boy ; “ I’ll go get it.” 
And undressing he waded out through the shallow 
water where Frank had been playing, and plunging into 
the deep water swam to the boat, returned with it, and 
handed it to Charley. 

‘‘ Now,” said Charley, put your clothes on and get 
out of here. Frank and I are going to have some fun 
with this boat and don’t want you around.” 

“ Thank you, Charley,” said Frank. I’m glad you 
thrashed David. It served him right.” 

When David appeared at the supper-table that night 
with both eyes blackened, neither the captain nor the 
doctor said anything. Somehow or other, though not 
by Charley’s telling, the story of the fight had spread 
among the boys who openly rejoiced at David’s ap- 
pearance. Jack, who had heard nothing about the 
fight, having spent the afternoon with the captain, 

71 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


suspecting what had occurred, and hearing Charley’s 
name connected with the fight said to him : 

‘‘ Have you and David had a fight, Charley ? ” 

‘‘ Yes,” was the reply. ‘‘ I caught him bullying 
Frank.” 

“ I hope you licked him well.” 

‘‘Ask the little fellow,” was the reply; “but don’t 
say anything to the captain or to the doctor.” 

Now it happened that just before the fight, Mr. 
Clarkson had been near enough to see what was going 
on. When he saw David strike the little fellow he hur- 
ried forward just in time to see Charley running ahead 
of him. Feeling sure, from what he had seen of Char- 
ley, that he was able to do all that was necessary with- 
out any help, he said nothing and stood watching 
everything, and did not even let his presence be known 
until some time after the fight was over. 

After supper, when the captain, the doctor, and Mr. 
Clarkson were together, the captain said to the doctor 
in a smiling tone : 

“ It looks as if some one had been thrashing 
David.” 

“ There is very little doubt about it in my mind,” said 
the doctor, and then turning to Mr. Clarkson he said : 
“ You have seen David, Mr. Clarkson. What do you 
think?” 

“ I can tell you all about it,” was the reply. “ I saw 
the whole affair. I was walking near the lagoon when 
I saw David strike Frank, and ran forward to stop it 
when Charley, who had the lead on me, reached him 

72 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


first. I felt sure Charley could take care of David,” 
and then he gave them an account of all that happened, 
telling them of the final result of the fight, and how 
Charley had made the big fellow undress and go into 
the lagoon to recover the boat. 

The story appeared to please both the captain and the 
doctor, especially the latter, who repeatedly chuckled as 
Mr. Clarkson described the fight. It could easily be 
seen by the manner of this description that both Mr. 
Clarkson and the doctor were well up in the art of 
boxing ; and, indeed, for the matter of that, so was the 
captain. 

Clarkson,” said the doctor, tell me about Char- 
ley. Does he box well ? ” 

He is a splendid boxer,” was the reply. Cap- 
tain,” he added, ‘‘ if you have no objections, I should 
like to give Charley some lessons in this art.” 

‘‘ I wish you would, Clarkson,” was the reply. 

Wishing to know if the captain and the doctor ap- 
proved of his having let the fight go on to the finish, 
Mr. Clarkson said : 

I trust, gentlemen, you will not think I was un- 
warranted in permitting the boys to go on with the 
fight. I have been carefully observing both Charley 
and Harold, and was certain from their muscular de- 
velopment that either of them could easily manage the 
fellow. I felt sure that it would be better for all to let 
David be severely punished by a younger boy; that it 
was in this way only would matters right themselves. 
Had I interfered and thrashed the fellow myself the 
73 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


fight between the two boys would only have taken place 
the first time they were afterward alone.” 

“ You were quite right, Clarkson,” said the captain. 
'' I thoroughly approve of what you have done.” 

And so do I,” said the doctor. 


74 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER VII 

A Day at the Harding School 

The boys of the Harding School were equally di- 
vided as to color. Jack, Charley, Harold, the two 
Whimples, and David made six white, and Kooloo, 
Otoa, and three sons of some of Mahinee’s chiefs, and 
a son of Waheatoua made the same number of brown 
boys. 

The schoolroom was arranged to as to be divided 
readily into three separate classrooms by means of 
sliding-sashes, and could of course be as easily thrown 
into a single assembly room. 

There was nothing remarkable about the arrange- 
ment of the schoolroom to the white boys, but to the 
brown lads it was a most wonderful place. The great 
clock that struck the half-hours and the hours, with a 
chime of bells, was regarded as the greatest piece of 
magic the white men had yet shown them ; for here was 
something, that all by itself, and apparently without 
any one to start it, would at regular times make these 
beautiful sounds. The boys soon learned to tell the 
time from the position of the hour and minute hands 
on the clock face, and this novelty did not wear off for 
many months after their entrance into the school. 
They would look eagerly for the time, as indicated by 
75 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the position of the hands, when the wonderful sounds 
would again be heard. 

But there was another reason why the Polynesian 
boys got into the habit of watching the position of the 
hands on the face of the clock. They were unaccus- 
tomed to remain so long a time indoors. Like the 
white boys, they eagerly waited for the school to be 
dismissed, and of course associated this time with the 
position of the hands of the clock. There was a 
morning and an afternoon session of the school, but in 
each session there were two intervals of fifteen minutes 
each, during which the boys were in the open air. 

The announcement was made by the captain that 
three afternoons in every week; i, e., on Mondays, 
Wednesdays, and Fridays, would be given to a class 
taught either by himself or the doctor in the open air, 
either on the main island or in the boats on some of 
the lagoons, greatly pleased them. In these out-of- 
door classes, he explained, would be given the opportu- 
nity of learning something about the plants and ani- 
mals of the land and the water. 

It was impossible to teach the white and the brown 
lads together; for most of the white boys were fairly 
advanced in their studies and were taking up Latin and 
Greek as well as English. It was, therefore, necessary 
to form a number of classes that included white boys 
only. 

There was, however, one thing at which the entire 
school was on nearly equal terms. It had not only been 
determined to teach the Polynesian lads English, but 
76 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


also the English boys Polynesian. To do this it was 
necessary that both should study how to spell and write 
these languages. 

It has been so long a time since any of my readers 
wrestled with the names and shapes of the letters of 
the English alphabet that they probably cannot remem- 
ber how difficult a task it was. There is such a per- 
plexing similarity in the shapes of some of the letters 
that, until these are mastered, it is easy to confuse one 
letter with another. Of course, after one has mastered 
the alphabet he can see that a Q differs from an O in 
having a little foot to stand on ; that a C is not unlike a 
G, except that the latter has been flattened a little at 
one of its bends ; so too, the E and the F somewhat re- 
semble each other, as also do J, T, and L. For these 
reasons Mr. Clarkson had considerable difficulty in 
teaching the Polynesian boys the letters of the English 
alphabet. 

On looking over the school material that had been 
sent in the steamer, Mr. Clarkson was pleased to find 
a large alphabet card with each letter illustrated by 
some well-known animal or other object. Now it may 
aid an English-speaking child to be told that A stands 
for ark, since the conventional Noah’s Ark is one of the 
first things a child hears about. So too, it helps to be 
told that G stands for giraffe, and L for lion; H for 
horse, and so on, since all these objects have been seen 
either in the menageries or in the streets. But to the 
native lads who had never seen them the card gave no 
help whatever. It is no wonder, therefore, that com- 
77 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


paratively little progress was made by this particular 
class. 

On talking the difficulty over with the captain, the 
latter said : 

‘‘ Clarkson, I think we will try to get the white boys 
to help us in this thing.” 

‘‘ How can we do that? ” inquired Mr. Clarkson. 

“ I will offer the boys a two-days’ holiday if within 
two weeks from to-day the native boys are able to 
name all the letters of the English alphabet.” 

When the announcement was made to the school, 
Charley said : 

‘‘ Where do the white boys come in, captain ? ” 

Possibly some of my older readers may be surprised 
and shocked that the captain should permit such a 
familiarity in the schoolroom. But the captain had 
methods of his own, and saw no objection whatever 
to the boys speaking out in the class, provided it was 
done in a respectful, gentlemanly manner. Instead, 
therefore, of being surprised he replied : 

That’s just it, Pleasanton. If the brown boys can 
master all the letters of the alphabet within two weeks 
I will give a two-days’ holiday to the whole school.” 

A cheer went up from the boys. It was a splendid 
offer the captain had made. 

As soon as the school had quieted, the captain said ; 

“ If you wish to win this prize, boys, I would advise 
the white boys to become interested in the work of the 
others. When you are together outside the school 
don’t forget to help them in the matter.” 

78 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


During the next week there was much hard study 
and work put on the English alphabet, both on the 
part of the brown boys in learning as well as in the 
white boys in teaching. While at the swimming-pool 
Charley would draw pictures of the letters in the sand 
and drill the boys in their names, and woe betide the 
unlucky lad who failed to remember the names of 
these letters; for he would be promptly ducked as a 
proper punishment for his want of attention. 

One day, while the boys were in swimming, the 
captain, the doctor, Mr. Clarkson, and Hiram, who 
had been at the Maddox Clearing, walked over to the 
pool. Something so interested the boys that they did 
not notice their approach. 

‘‘ I wonder what they are doing ? ’’ said the captain. 
“ Let’s wait here. I think it may be worth seeing.” 

“ I have very little doubt of that,” said the doctor. 

That boy Charley appears to be holding a meeting 
of some sort.” 

‘‘ It’s nothing wrong, I’m sure,” said Mr. Clarkson, 
who had formed a very high opinion of Charley from 
what he had seen. 

** I have no fear of that,” said the captain. I am 
sure I can trust Charley.” 

‘‘ The lad be all right,” said Hiram with a chuckle. 
‘‘Don’t ye see what he is a-doing? He’s holding 
a school out here and laming the brown lads their 
letters.” 

Evidently something that Charley had just said met 
with the approval of his audience; for there was a 

79 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


shout of laughter and clapping of hands. It was an 
open question whether it was the white or the brown 
boys from whom the greater part of the applause 
came. 

“ Let us hear what the lad is saying/’ said the doctor, 
who approached quietly with his companions without 
being seen. 

Charley was teaching the boys in a manner that 
clearly met their approval. He alternately imperson- 
ated Mr. Clarkson as a teacher, and the boys as 
pupils. He had provided for this teaching a huge 
alphabet card, on which he had marked the letters of 
the alphabet, and underneath them had drawn excellent 
representations of objects known to the brown boys 
whose pictures they could at once recognize and whose 
names he carefully taught them, these names beginning 
with the different letters of the English alphabet under 
which they were placed. After having in this manner 
gone carefully over a line or two of the letters, he 
would call, name by name, the different boys to recite. 
If they made any mistakes he would explain the matter 
again and again. 

It was the way in which Charley was able to make 
his face express surprise, ridicule, astonishment, dis- 
gust, or approbation, that kept his audience in a con- 
tinual roar. 

Having concluded the make-believe examination be- 
tween Mr. Clarkson and the different boys, Charley 
would again call on actual boys and put them through 
the different letters of the alphabet. The desire of 
8o 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the brown boys to master the task and so win Charley's 
approbation, caused them to give a closer attention 
than they had ever given in the schoolroom, and it 
surprised the men who were listening to know how far 
the boys had actually gone toward mastering the let- 
ters of the alphabet. 

It was when mistakes were made that Charley 
showed his ability as a teacher. He only ridiculed 
those who constantly made the same mistake. Instead 
of laughing at a mistake he would again go carefully 
over the matter, showing the boy the difference in the 
letter he had mistaken and the letter for whose name he 
had been asked. He pointed out the differences in the 
shapes of the letters that were mistaken for one another 
in a very comical way. Some of these explanations 
were so strange and queer that the boys appeared to 
thus learn these differences thoroughly. 

It Was interesting to note the patience with which 
Charley would go again and again over the matter, 
and the rapidity with which he would call up boy after 
boy, taking him through all the doubtful letters. 

That’s capital teaching, is it not, Clarkson ? ” in- 
quired the doctor. 

It is wonderful,” was the reply. ‘‘ Charley is a 
great boy; I never remember meeting his equal.” 

Let us join them,” said the captain. 

As the men approached, the boys set up a great hur- 
rah. It spoke well for the Harding School that its 
three teachers could be received so heartily out of 
school bounds. Ther^ was nothing insincere about 
F 8i 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


these cheers. It was evident from the manner in which 
they were given that the men were thoroughly wel- 
come. The boys knew that in a little while the men 
would be in swimming with them when, according to 
custom, they would be permitted to duck them, pro- 
vided they were able to do so. 

“ That’s good teaching, Charley,” said the captain, 
as he approached the lad. 

“We intend winning the two days’ holiday, cap- 
tain,” remarked Charley laughing. 

“ It seems to me that you have already won it, or 
that you will certainly do so,” replied Mr. Clarkson. 

“ If you would like to have the boys examined now, 
Charley,” said the captain to him, “ I will ask Mr. 
Clarkson to make the trial.” 

“Will they have another chance if they fail?” 
quickly inquired Charley. 

“Yes,” was the reply; “provided the trial is made 
within the two weeks given.” 

“ Then please make the trial now, Mr. Clarkson,” 
said Charley. 

The result was that there was not a single brown 
boy who failed to answer all the tests put to him. 

“ Then,” said the captain, “ the school has won the 
two-days’ holiday. I will make the announcement of 
the day next Monday at school.” 

There were great rejoicings when this announce- 
ment was made. When the excitement was over the 
boys crowded around the men, begging them to join 
them in the pool. 


82 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ Come and have a swim,” they said. 

Of course we will,” said the doctor. Do you 
think that on so hot a day as this wedl fail to take a 
swim in so magnificent a pool? ” 

They were soon all in the water. Even Hiram who, 
when they first came to the island was only an indif- 
ferent swimmer, had been taken in hand by the boys, 
and was now a sufficiently good swimmer to enjoy the 
sport, joined them. 

It was an amusing sight to see an almost continu- 
ous procession sliding merrily down the smooth marble 
incline, disappearing for a moment in the deep waters 
of the lagoon, only, however, rapidly to scramble up 
to the land again and rush up to the top of the incline 
to go down again. 

The doctor was as big a boy in this sport as any of 
them. He even remembered what boys are apt to say 
in such cases, for he called out : 

“ Keep the mill going, boys.” 

And the boys, at least the white boys, understood 
what he meant, for they saw to it that breaks in the 
line were few and far between. Whether the brown 
boys understood it or not, they enjoyed this kind of 
sport so much that when a failure occurred now and 
then in keeping up an unbroken line it did not come 
from them. 

When they tired of the sliding-board, Kooloo, re- 
membering a game of leap-frog Charley, Harold, and 
he had with a crowd of boys on the Island of Captivity, 
started the game at the swimming-pool along a stretch 

83 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


of sandy beach. It was great fun to see the doctor, 
captain, Mr. Clarkson, and Hiram vault over the 
backs and shoulders of the boys. But it was especially 
great when Mr. Clarkson, with all his six feet and over, 
would hold himself so as to make the height to suit 
the boys. When it came Charley’s time to vault over 
him, however, he would stand almost straight. But 
somehow or other Charley always managed to get 
safely over. 

While dressing and talking over the good times they 
had had that day, turning to Mr. Clarkson, at a mo- 
ment when all the boys were quiet, Charley inquired : 

“ What is your height, Mr. Clarkson? ” 

‘‘ I am six feet and four inches,” was the reply. 

“ In your bare feet or with your shoes on? ” inquired 
Charley. 

‘‘ In my bare feet,” was the reply. 

‘‘ Then it would be correct to say : ‘ Pon my soul, I 
am six feet four inches,’ would it not?” inquired 
Charley. 

There was a roar of laughter from the boys. Char- 
ley seeing that Mr. Clarkson intended to punish him for 
this awful joke, jumped into the lagoon and Mr. Clark- 
son after him, for both of them had only begun dress- 
ing. 

Charley gave Mr. Clarkson a good swim, but was at 
last caught and ducked, when the two came back smil- 
ing and dressed. 


84 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER VIII 
Two-Days'' Holiday 

The fact that their two-days’ holiday had been won 
by them did not at all belittle it in the minds of the 
boys. Nor did the native lads feel disposed unduly to 
magnify the part they had played in its winning. All 
were ready to acknowledge the aid Charley had given 
them in learning the alphabet. The examination of 
the boys had been made on Saturday afternoon, and 
the captain had notified the school on the Monday fol- 
lowing that he would leave to the boys what days they 
wished for the holiday. They promptly selected Tues- 
day and Wednesday. This choice having been made, 
the captain said to them : 

I will leave it to you to say where and how you 
will spend these holidays. You are at liberty to spend 
them anywhere except on the waters of the ocean out- 
side the island.” 

At Charley’s request the captain made the following 
announcement : 

Pleasanton wishes you to remain a few moments 
after school in order to determine how you will spend 
the holidays.” 

They had always watched the face of the great 
clock in the main schoolroom, but to-day this scrutiny 

8s 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


was closer than ever before. At last, however, the 
hands indicated the time for the ringing of the chime 
of bells that would proclaim the dismissal of the school. 

There was one attendant at the Harding School to 
whom the hands of the clock also possessed a great fas- 
cination. This was Rompey. The intelligent dog was 
unable to understand why his young masters should 
spend so much of their time cooped up in a school- 
room, when it was so much more pleasant outside. He 
was in the habit of going into the room and looking up 
into their faces as if he was trying to say to them: 

“ Please come outside, take a walk and have some 
fun,” and when the boys motioned to him to be quiet, 
he would lay himself down at their feet anxiously 
awaiting the dismissal of the school. 

Now Rompey was a very observant animal, probably 
more so than many of the boys. It was not long be- 
fore he saw the eyes of many of the pupils every now 
and then turned toward the face of the great clock 
back of the desk of one of the teachers. You may be- 
lieve it or not, as you choose, but before long Rompey 
actually made the discovery that when the hour and 
the minute hands occupied certain positions, differing 
for the morning and afternoon hours, the chime of 
bells sounded and the school was dismissed. Conse- 
quently, as the hands in their slow movement over the 
clock dial slowly approached one of these positions, 
Rompey’s look toward the clock face would become 
more and more intense and, indeed, often a short time 
before the hands reached the long-wished-for position, 
86 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


he would leave his place at his young masters’ feet and 
going quietly toward the door would eagerly await 
their coming out. Of course the boys soon noticed 
Rompey’s behavior and greatly applauded his intelli- 
gence. 

On that particular Monday afternoon, when the cap- 
tain had notified the boys to remain for a few moments 
after the close of the school, Rompey was at his place 
near the boys on the floor closely watching the slow 
movements of the hands. A few moments before the 
time of the dismissal bell to ring he arose and went 
quietly to the door where he stood wagging his tail. 
The bell rang but, to his evident surprise, no one left 
the room. What Rompey had done greatly pleased not 
only the boys but also the captain, the doctor, and Mr. 
Clarkson. 

‘‘ Rompey is the most intelligent dog I have ever 
seen, Harding,” remarked the doctor. He seems to 
have learned to tell by the clock just when the school is 
to be dismissed.” 

At the meeting held by the boys there was at first 
some difference of opinion as to how best to spend the 
holiday, but when Charley began talking about the fun 
they could have in Twin Island No. i, where they could 
arrange to spend the night, sleeping on the floors of 
some of the rooms at Maddox House, and the great 
times they could have not only at the swimming-pool 
but in the boat on the lagoon, it was unanimously 
agreed that the holiday would be best spent on the 
island. 


87 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


I will not attempt to relate all the boys did on those 
two days. I will only say that being bright lads they 
made the most of the time, and practically none of it 
was lost from a boy’s standpoint. 

On the first night they built a campfire on the shore 
of the lagoon near Maddox House, and sat around it 
singing and telling stories. As a story teller, Charley 
so greatly excelled the others that he was frequently 
requested to tell story after story, and what seemed odd 
to those of the other boys who did not know him well, 
he was always ready with a new one. ' 

What a wonderful chap you are, Charley ! ” said 
Oliver Whimple. “ Where do you learn so many as- 
tonishing stories ? ” 

“ He makes them up, right out of his head, Ollie,” 
cried Frank, who was of course with them. When- 
ever I ask Charley to tell me a story he tells me one 
right away. I am sure he makes these stories up ; for 
when he asks me what I wish the story to be about, and 
I tell him the kind I want to hear, he goes right on 
telling it to me.” 

“ Great boy, Charley,” said Harold laughing. ‘‘ Big 
white medicine-man. Heap bright.” 

It is significant as to the relations between the boys 
and their teachers, that instead of wishing to get off 
by themselves they had requested the doctor, the cap- 
tain, and Mr. Clarkson to be with them a part of the 
time. Nor had they reason to regret this ; for they not 
only had great times in the swimming-pool, but also 
greatly enjoyed many wonderful new games these 
88 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


men, especially the doctor, apparently invented for 
them. 

It must not be supposed that the boys kept together 
during all this time. While in the pool, at the camp- 
fire, and in some of their games, they were all to- 
gether; during much of the time they broke up into 
scattering groups according to their different tastes, it 
being understood that when Charley sounded the call 
on his bugle all were to return to the Maddox House 
for meals. 

One of these scattered groups consisted at first of 
Charley, Harold, and Oliver. Harold and Oliver 
wished Charley to accompany them in a search for 
certain plants they intended to take to the doctor, as 
they had become very fond of natural history, and this 
fondness had greatly increased under his skilful teach- 
ing, for they found he greatly excelled the captain in 
this branch of science. Charley, however, excused 
himself, saying he wished to finish a sketch of the is- 
lands of the lagoon as seen from the landing at* the 
Maddox House. 

Another group consisted of Jack and David who, to 
the great surprise of all, wandered off together. Jack 
was adding to his collection of minerals of the island, 
and David, who had a decided ability for chemistry, 
had become interested in this collection and was be- 
ginning to make one of his own. In fact, lately, the 
two boys had become fairly chummy. 

“ David is not so bad a fellow as he seems to be,” 
said Jack to Harold. 


89 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ I am glad to hear you say that, Jack,” was the 
reply. It’s beastly unpleasant to have a fellow around 
you can’t care for. But I’m afraid,” he added to Char- 
ley, so that no one else could hear him, that Jack 
don’t understand how mean a fellow David is.” 

I would not be surprised, Harold,” said Charley, 
if you are right. However, let’s give the fellow a 
chance. He may turn out better than we imagine.” 

As for Frank he was such a general favorite that he 
would have had no difficulty in finding pleasant com- 
panions. But the youngster had plans of his own he 
did not care to talk about. Like most young lads, 
Frank was a great hero worshiper, and had lately 
found an ideal in the doctor. The particular thing 
about the doctor that attracted the youngster was his 
tattooings. Somehow or other, these seemed to him to 
possess exceeding beauty, so he had made up his mind 
he would try hard to ornament himself in a like 
manner. 

The youngster had laid his plans with no little skill. 
He had observed Charley sitting on the boat-landing 
sketching. This time he was making a sketch in India 
ink. On several other occasions the lad had asked Char- 
ley about tattooings, getting him to explain these mark- 
ings and how they were fixed in the skin. Charley ex- 
plained these markings to him and at the same time 
told him of the narrow escape he and Harold had had 
on the Island of Captivity, when some of the people 
there wished to cover their faces and bodies with the 
m.arkings. 


90 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ I don’t see why you did not wish to have these 
beautiful markings on your face. I should like very 
much to have my face and body covered with them.” 

“ You might like it now,” replied Charley, “ but you 
would feel very badly about it when you grow older. 
Think how Doctor Parsons has been marked. It is 
because he thinks these markings are so ugly that he 
has made up his mind to live on this island always. He 
would be ashamed to walk through the streets of a 
big city for fear the people would laugh at or make 
fun of him.” 

The above conversation had occurred several days 
before the holidays, and Charley had forgotten all 
about it. 

As the youngster approached him as he was sketch- 
ing, he said: 

May I sit here and watch you, Charley? ” 

** Why, certainly,” was the reply. Glad to have 
your company.” 

The youngster sat down and was silent for a while. 
At last he said : 

“ Won’t you please paint something on my arm, 
Charley?” 

Oh, I understand,” said Charley laughing; ''you 
want to pretend to be tattooed. All right, I’ll do it. 
You can easily wash it off when you get tired of it.” 
And then making the little fellow roll up the shirt 
sleeve on the right arm he rapidly sketched the initials 
F. W. in India ink. " There,” he said, " F. W. stands 
for Frank Whimple.” 


91 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Thank you, Charley ; I think these are very pretty. 
Are you going to stay here long? ” 

Yes,” was the reply; ‘‘ I wish to finish this sketch,” 

‘‘ Then I think I’ll take a walk,” said Frank. 

“ All right, but don’t forget to be back at Maddox 
House in time for dinner. You have nearly three- 
quarters of an hour before I sound the bugle calling the 
boys in.” 

The India ink of the initials on his arm had now 
dried, so pulling down his shirt sleeve so as to hide 
them, he went to Hiram, who was busy preparing din- 
ner for the boys, and said : 

“ Hiram, won’t you please lend me a needle? ” 
What’s the matter, laddie ; hev ye torn • your 
breeches and want to mend ’em? Ef so, I’ll mend ’em. 
fer ye.” 

“ I won’t trouble you, Hiram,” said the youngster. 

I can do what I want with the needle.” So obtaining 
it he turned to go. 

“Be ye going far from here, laddie?” inquired 
Hiram. 

“ Not far,” was the reply, “ only to the Dead Man’s 
House.” 

“ All right,” said Hiram. “ I reckon ye kin hear Mr. 
Charley sound the bugle fer dinner-time.” 

“All right,” was the reply; and the youngster, ap- 
parently anxious to get off, hurried himself away. 

The notes of the bugle, a few moments before din- 
ner-time, brought all the hungry boys to the table with 
the exception of Frank. At first nothing was thought of 

9 ^ 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


his absence, for they expected he would come in at any 
moment. But when dinner was over without his ap- 
pearing, Doctor Parsons, growing anxious, organized 
a search and soon the boys were spread out in all 
directions looking for the lad. 

“ Keep on the land, boys,’' said the doctor. '' He * 
cannot swim and I am sure he will not go on any of the 
boats.” 

Before going off with the rest of the boys in the 
search, Charley visited Hiram in the kitchen. He now 
remembered Frank’s desire to be tattooed as well as 
the initials he had painted on the lad’s arm in India 
ink. 

“ I am afraid the little chap has fooled me,” he said 
to himself. 

Finding Hiram in the kitchen, he inquired : 

“ Have you seen Frank to-day, Hiram? ” 

‘‘ The laddie wuz here a’most an hour ago,” was the 
reply, “ and axed me to loan him a needle.” 

“ Did he say where he was going, Hiram ? ” 

‘‘ When I told him to be back in time fer dinner he 
said : ‘ I’m not going far, Hiram. I’m only going to 
play in the Dead Man’s House.’ ” 

“ Thank you,” said Charley laughing, and then 
added to himself as he ran away : ‘‘ I’m almost sure now 
the little fellow has fooled us both. He borrowed that 
needle so as to prick the initials he got me to mark on 
his arm. He has gone to Maddox House where he 
will not be seen. I’ll get there as soon as I can before 
he disfigures his arm for life.” 

93 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


As he was hurrying away to the log cabin he met the 
doctor, to whom he said : 

Come with me, please ; I think I know where Frank 
has gone,” and then told him all that had occurred. 

Rapidly reaching the cabin they saw the little fellow 
sitting by himself on the side of the bed where the 
skeleton had been found. He had rolled up the shirt 
sleeve on his right arm, and had evidently been prick- 
ing it with the needle. 

Fortunately Hiram had given the lad a large needle 
thinking it would be easier to thread. Being unac- 
customed to the work, the lad had plunged the needle 
deep enough into his arm to make it bleed, so that 
the blood was slowly trickling from the wounds he had 
made. 

It was evident that the few prickings he had in his 
arm were paining him considerably, for they heard 
him saying to himself : 

“ It does hurt. I guess I’ll wait a little while before 
I stick it any more. Fm going to try to stick all of it 
so I can have a beautiful mark like the doctor.” 

Without waiting any longer they entered the room, 
when Charley cried out : 

“ So you don’t believe what I told you, Frank, and 
have been trying to tattoo yourself? ” 

The little fellow was greatly ashamed to have been 
caught in this way, and turning to Charley said : 

‘‘ I want to make this beautiful drawing stay on my 
arm.” 

“ You must not do such things, Frank,” said the 

94 



‘ / am sorry now. It 
thought it would’” 


hurts more than 1 
Page 93 


i 


t 



i 

■ 





« 

0 


t ' 





\ 




r 


t 


$ 




» 








./ r 



A 


/ 





« • 


# 


*• > 


i 


4 




« 





% 


ir 


« 




•' .» 

0 


t 






t 


V 


! 


I 


•( 


I 


v\ 


V 

*K 


\ 



w 


« 




« 


% 


4 


% 




» 


% 






/ 


I 


• f 



« 

i 


0 




9 


f 




-T 


« 


y 


/ 








f 






f 






\ 





n 



<% 





« 




« 

> 





1 



I 


t 



< 



\ 



t 


« 


4 

4 I . .. 


0 



4 



( 


I 

I 

! 

4 


» 


.’•v 


Vv 



' . % 

. I 

• * . A 


• V 


I 


I 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


doctor. ‘‘ You will be very sorry about this some time.” 

“ I am sorry now,” was the reply. “ It hurts more 
than I thought it would.” 

Now, Frank,” said the doctor, ‘‘ I want you to 
promise me you will never again try to do such a fool- 
ish thing.” 

‘‘ I promise, doctor,” said Frank. 

The rest of the boys had a good laugh when they 
heard what the little chap had been doing. The brown- 
skinned lads, however, appeared to be greatly pleased. 
They thought it very sensible, and could not under- 
stand why the white people should object to such beau- 
tiful markings. 


95 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER IX 
A Lesson in Swimming 

Under the competent instructions of Charley, Harold, 
and Mr. Clarkson, Oliver Whimple had learned to 
swim. He could now not only swim out into water 
over his head, but did not hesitate to enter the lagoon 
by the way of the sliding-board, or by taking a header 
into its deep waters. He had learned rapidly not only 
because his teachers knew what they were doing, but 
especially because he was practically fearless. 

But it was very different with his little brother. Al- 
though the lad greatly wished to learn, yet there was 
something that caused him to fear making the attempt. 
He did not wish to make his first attempt when all the 
other boys were in the water. He had therefore asked 
Charley and Harold to give him lessons in private. 

One afternoon, about an hour before the close of 
the school, the boys were greatly surprised to hear the 
captain say to Charley: 

Charley, if you, Harold, Oliver, and Kooloo have 
recited all your lessons, I would like you to do some- 
thing for me outside the schoolhouse.” 

Assuring the captain that they had no other lessons 
to recite and that they would be glad to do anything 
for him, the captain said : 

96 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ Then come this way/^ 

As they approached, the captain said something to 
them in a low voice that appeared greatly to please 
them. The school listened eagerly to discover what 
was going on, but all they could hear was Charley’s 
reply, accompanied as it was by a decidedly delighted 
look. 

‘‘ We’ll be glad to do it, captain.” 

But just what it was they were so glad to do no one 
could discover. They kept wide-awake, however, won- 
dering what it was. This wonder was greatly in- 
creased when the captain said to the assistant teacher : 

‘‘ Mr. Clarkson, I’ll take your classes for the re- 
mainder of the afternoon and would be obliged if 
you will go with the boys.” 

Nothing else was said just then, but the boys saw 
that Frank Whimple eagerly met them at the school- 
room door. Those near the windows passed the word 
to the others that they all walked directly toward the 
boat-landing, got into one of the boats, and rowed 
rapidly toward the northeast. They were now able to 
make a good guess at what was in the wind. 

‘‘ They are going to the swimming-pool,” whispered 
the boys to one another. 

Yes, boys,” said the captain, who overheard the 
whispering ; '' I meant to tell you. They intend giving 
little Whimple a lesson in swimming. We are anxious 
that all the boys of the Harding School shall know how 
to swim. As you know, Frank is now the only boy 
who is unable to swim. I have taken this plan to give 
G 97 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the boys the opportunity of teaching him when no 
others are around. When school is dismissed, as it 
will be in about an hour, there will be no objection to 
your joining them at the pool. I guess you can all 
crowd into the other boat, can’t you? ” 

‘‘ Yes, sir,” all replied in a chorus. 

As he got in the boat with his five teachers, Frank 
was a very happy lad. But they could see that he was a 
little nervous. 

‘‘ Charley,” he said, don’t you think I ought to be 
able to learn how to swim with five teachers? ” 

I do, indeed, Frank,” was the reply. ‘‘ With such 
teachers as Mr. Clarkson and Kooloo, to say nothing of 
Harold, Oliver, and myself, I don’t see how you can 
help learning. Indeed, I think you will learn so rapidly 
that it will surprise you.” 

Since the throwing down of that portion of Parker 
Cliffs opposite the swimming-pool on Twin Island No. 
I had taken away all danger of being sucked under the 
cliffs as the tide ran out, they had built a landing di- 
rectly on the eastern side of the island, thus avoiding 
the walk required to reach the pool when the old land- 
ing was used. 

While undressing, Frank, turning to Charley, said: 

‘‘ Charley, won’t you promise you will not duck me 
or hold my head under the water when you are teach- 
ing me to swim ? ” 

Duck you, Frank — hold your head under the 
water,” said Charley in astonishment. “ Why, what are 
you thinking about? Of course I won’t.” 

98 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ Why does your little brother fear ducking or be- 
ing ill-treated, Oliver ? ” inquired Mr. Clarkson. 

“ I think it is because of something that happened to 
him shortly before we left for Harding Island. Know- 
ing that neither of us could swim, our parents sent us 
to take lessons at a natatorium in London. Frank, who 
has always been very anxious to learn, got into the pool 
at its shallow part before I had joined him. Here he 
was roughly seized by a boy who thought it fun not 
only to duck him, but even to hold his head under the 
water. I reached him in time to stop this so-called fun, 
and had such a fight with the boy who did it that I left 
the natatorium in disgust without having learned my- 
self. Ever since that time Frank has feared to go into 
the water, although he is very anxious to learn how to 
swim.” 

“ It is a mean thing to do to any one, especially to a 
timid little fellow like Frank,” said Mr. Clarkson, in 
a low tone so that the lad could not hear him. “ It is 
not unlike the brutal idea some people have that the 
best way to teach a boy how to swim is to throw him 
into deep water and make him believe he must swim 
to save himself ; that he need look for no help from his 
companions. While a boy may learn in this manner, 
it generally takes a long time for him to overcome the 
dread of going into the water. Indeed, I doubt very 
much whether he is ever able to enjoy it as much as he 
would had he been taught in a rational manner.” 

“ It certainly is a mean thing, Mr. Clarkson ; but I 
have often seen it done,” said Charley. 

99 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Frank,” said Mr. Clarkson, do you think you 
could trust me to do anything I promised you I would 
do?” 

Why, of course I could,” said the youngster, open- 
ing his eyes wide in astonishment that Mr. Clarkson 
should for a moment think it necessary to ask such a 
question. 

“You feel sure of this, do you?” continued Mr. 
Clarkson. 

“ Indeed I do,” was the reply. 

“Then listen, Frank,” said Mr. Clarkson; “I not 
only promise not to duck you while in the water, but I 
also promise that whatever happens I will never let 
your head go under.” 

“Oh, that’s good!” cried the little fellow. “Now 
I’ll be able to learn how to swim. I won’t have to think 
about anything except doing just what you tell me to 
do.” 

“ Frank,” said Charley, “ would you also believe 
everything that I promised you in real, real ear- 
nest? ” 

“ I would believe anything you promised me in ear- 
nest,” was the reply. 

“ Then listen,” said Charley ; “ I promise you in ear- 
nest not only not to duck you or let your head go under 
water while I am teaching you, but if ever afterward, 
while you are in swimming here, I see any of the boys 
trying to duck you, I will give them a good ducking 
myself.” 

“ And we will do the same,” cried the other boys. 

100 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Then I will learn to swim, sure,’’ said the young- 
ster confidently. 

The lesson was not given near the sliding-board 
since the water there was too deep, but at a short dis- 
tance east of the board where there was a fine, hard, 
sandy bottom that sloped gently toward the lagoon. 
Here the bottom was entirely free from either seaweed 
or sea-nettles. When they had all undressed, Mr. 
Clarkson, taking Frank by the hand, waded out until 
the water was about up to the little fellow’s shoulders. 
Then turning to Charley, Mr. Clarkson said : 

I will let you teach him first, Charley.” 

All right,” was the reply. Now, Frank, I want 
you to lie on your back while I hold one of my hands 
under your shoulders. That’s right,” he said, as the 
youngster placed himself in the desired position. 

Now stiffen your body so that the water will touch 
the back of your head, your back, and your heels,” he 
continued. ‘‘No, don’t raise your head; that will 
throw your head under the water when you try to 
swim.” 

After a few trials his pupil got into the position de- 
sired, when Charley said : 

“ That’s it. Now, I am going to put you on your 
feet for a moment and teach you the arm movements 
for this kind of swimming. You see,” said Charley, 
moving his hands as he wished his pupil to do, “ I have 
brought the back of my hands together and am now 
moving them away from me with the palms striking 
the water like the oars of a boat ; then I turn them again 
lOl 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


so that the palms face one another and move them to- 
ward my body. I keep these movements up in this 
manner.’' 

It was a far easier thing to do than it has been to 
describe; but being entirely free from fear of being 
ducked, the youngster was able to give his entire at- 
tention to the movements, and it was not long before 
he thoroughly mastered them. Charley then took him 
out into the water up to his shoulders, and placing him 
on his back with his head toward the shore, held him 
for a moment with his hand under the shoulders until 
he saw he had the proper hand motions, when he mo- 
mentarily removed his hand, not forgetting to be ready 
to keep his promise not to let the boy’s head go under 
should he lose confidence. But everything went splen- 
didly, and to the great surprise of not only the little 
fellow, but also of Mr. Clarkson and the boys, the 
youngster moved with fair rapidity toward the shore. 

Why, Charley,” cried the youngster in an ecstasy 
of delight, “ I was really and truly swimming! ” 

“You were certainly swimming all right,” said 
Charley laughing merrily. 

“ And all by myself, wasn’t I? You were not hold- 
ing me up a bit, were you? ” 

“ No,” said Charley, “ you were swimming all by 
yourself.” 

“ Bravo 1 ” cried Mr. Clarkson. “ You took eight 
strokes that time. I counted them.” 

A number of other trials were made. Frank had 
almost completely mastered this first and easiest kind 
102 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


of swimming. Harold, Oliver, and Kooloo crowded 
around him complimenting him on the progress he 
had made. Then Harold began jollying him. 

‘‘ Now, Frank, tell us the truth. Weren’t you only 
pretending when you said you couldn’t swim? Now, 
honor bright. Weren’t you only jollying us? ” 

“ No, Harold,” was the reply. Honor bright, I 
never knew how till Charley showed me.” 

‘‘ Then,” said Harold laughing, there is only 
another explanation, and that is that Charley is a 
wonderful teacher.” 

“Joking aside, Harold,” said Mr. Clarkson; “I 
think Charley’s lesson was something wonderful.” 

“ And so do we,” said the boys. 

“ I could have done nothing, Mr. Clarkson, had you 
not succeeded in making Frank believe he would not 
be ducked, and that under no circumstances would his 
head be permitted to go under.” 

“And now, Frank,” said Mr. Clarkson, “let me 
show you how to swim by what is known as the breast 
stroke. This is a much more difficult stroke than the 
one you have just learned. It is a very important 
stroke, however, and must be mastered before nearly 
all the other strokes can be learned.” 

He then placed the youngster on his stomach with 
only his head out of water, the body inclined, so that 
the feet were some distance below the surface, and 
supporting him in this position by one hand, showed 
him how to move his hands and feet. I will not at- 
tempt to describe it here, but most boys know that in 
103 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the breast stroke the motions of the hands and feet 
are not unlike those of a frog in swimming. Indeed, 
I remember reading an account of how to learn to 
swim without going in the water. The plan consisted 
in placing a basin partly filled with water on the floor 
under a chair, putting a frog in the basin, then lying on 
one’s belly on the chair and making the hands and feet 
go through the movements observed in the frog when 
swimming. While this may be well enough for learn- 
ing the movements of the hands and feet, I would not 
advise any one confidently to enter deep water with no 
more practical knowledge of swimming than that so 
obtained. 

The success that attended Charley’s lesson gave Mr. 
Clarkson’s pupil such confidence in himself, that after 
some ten or fifteen minutes he learned the order in 
which the movements of the hands and feet follow one 
another, and was able to swim two or three strokes 
when Mr. Clarkson’s hand was removed from his 
stomach. This was done by taking the youngster again 
out into the water up to his shoulders and persuading 
him to try to swim toward the shore without any 
support. 

It may be said here that Kooloo, Harold, and Oliver 
were permitted to try their hand in teaching him the 
breast stroke. 

After they had been about half an hour in the water, 
Mr. Clarkson said: 

Now, Frank, put on your trousers and shirt and sit 
on the sand in the sun while the boys and I have a 
104 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


swim. I think the doctor, the captain, and the rest of 
the boys will be here before long. I suppose, of course, 
you will want to show them how much you have 
learned.’’ 

‘‘ I’d like to do that very much, Mr. Clarkson,” was 
the reply; ‘‘ but can’t I stay in a little longer? ” 

Yes, you can stay in a little longer if you wish; but 
then you cannot go in when the others come. You 
know you are not very strong and must be careful.” 

“ All right,” was the reply. “ I’ll dress now, because 
I want to show the doctor and the others how I have 
learned to swim.” 

The boys had a splendid swim with Mr. Clarkson, 
and it was not long before the boat containing the 
doctor, the captain, and the rest of the school landed 
on the eastern shore of the island and began undressing 
near the pool. 

“ Doctor,” cried Frank excitedly, I have learned 
how to swim! As soon as you get in the water I’ll 
show you.” 

Is that so, Frank? ” he replied. And then turning 
to the boys, he added : “ Let’s give three cheers for the 
little fellow,” and they were given with a will. 

As soon as they were in the water, Frank waded out 
to shoulders deep, and turning to Charley said: 

Now, Charley, come and hold my head please.” 

What’s the use in my doing that ? See if you 
can’t go toward the shore yourself.” 

You will promise not to let my head go under 
water? ” inquired the lad. 

loS 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ Yes,” was the reply. “ I promise.” 

Under this assurance the little fellow laid himself 
on the water and swam all the way to the shore on 
his back, taking twelve good strokes. Of course they 
all complimented him on his progress. 

‘‘ And who was it showed you how to do that, 
Frank? Was it Charley? ” inquired the doctor. 

Yes, Charley showed me,” was the reply. And 
Mr. Clarkson and the boys showed me the breast 
stroke,” said the lad, making two or three fairly good 
strokes on his breast. 

‘‘ Now, Frank,” said the doctor, “ if you are not 
afraid, hold onto my neck and I will swim with you 
out into the deep water.” 

ril go with you, doctor, if you promise not to let 
my head go under,” said the little fellow. 

All right, ril promise,” was the reply. 

It was a sight worth looking at to see the little fel- 
low confidently holding onto the neck of the doctor as 
he swam out into the deep waters of the lagoon. He 
did not show the slightest fear. On the contrary, he 
kept up an almost constant conversation with the 
doctor. 

From that time Frank almost always visited the 
pool with the boys, and soon learned to swim almost as 
well as any of them. Charley, Harold, and Kooloo 
spent no little time in teaching him some of the fancy 
strokes. 

One morning when all the school was assembled in 
the main room, the captain said : 

io6 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ Fm glad to tell you boys that Frank Whimple has 
passed the examination in swimming. There is now, 
therefore, no boy in Harding School who is forbidden 
to enter a boat on any of the lagoons. Of course none 
of you are permitted to go outside on the ocean.” 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER X 
An Out-of-Door Class 

Several weeks had passed since the events related in 
the last chapter. The school has settled down to steady 
work, both in and out of doors. It is needless to say 
that all the boys took a greater interest in the out-of- 
door lessons than in those recited in the schoolrooms. 

The climate of the tropics is at best a poor place for 
indoor work. In order to make it as agreeable as pos- 
sible they had placed slatted blinds in the open win- 
dows of the rooms, so that during the hotter hours of 
the day, when the wind blew from the ocean, the air 
was cool and agreeable. But it was not entirely a 
matter of temperature that made indoor work difficult, 
especially for the Polynesian lads. There is something 
about the air of the tropics that is apt to produce a 
feeling of languor that is not unknown to the people 
of the temperate zones. Indeed, when I tell you that 
this feeling is exactly the same as what is known in our 
climate as “ spring fever,” except that in the tropics 
the feeling is far stronger, you will understand that a 
school in the tropics, whatever advantages it may pos- 
sess in other respects, is apt to leave much to be wished 
for as regards personal comfort. It was because the 
teachers of the school recognized this fact that they did 
io8 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


all in their power to make school work less disagree- 
able. For this reason they had provided a half-hour 
recess in both morning and afternoon sessions. 

A small organ had been brought from Europe and 
placed in the schoolroom. Mr. Clarkson employed it 
to accompany the boys not only in gospel hymns, but 
also in other tunes. He had already formed a glee 
club that was capable of singing very well. 

But nothing done for the boys suited their needs so 
well as the three afternoons that had been set aside for 
out-of-door classes. 

‘‘ Do you mind telling me, doctor,” inquired Charley 
one morning before school, the subject you intend 
taking up this afternoon in our first out-of-door 
class ? ” 

“ Not at all, Charley,” was the reply; ‘‘ we will take 
up the subject of plant life.” 

‘‘ Of the land or the water, doctor ? ” inquired Char- 
ley. 

“ Of both,” was the reply. 

As all afterward acknowledged, that first lesson on 
plant life was one of the best they ever had from the 
doctor. They left the schoolhouse shortly after dinner, 
or near 1.30 P. M., accompanied by the doctor, the 
captain, Hiram, and Mr. Clarkson in two boatloads. 
Besides these there were Waheatoua and Kapiau in 
their canoes. But there was no trouble in finding room 
for all, since one of their boats was a very large one 
they called Boat No. 3. It had been brought on the 
steamer from Europe with their school furniture. 
109 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


They rowed rapidly toward the western side of Twin 
Island No. i, where they landed and walked in the 
direction of the Maddox Clearing. 

‘‘ Doctor,” said Charley, seeing the direction in 
which they were moving, “ I hope it will be necessary 
in studying the water plants to take a swim in the 
lagoon.” 

So do I,” said the doctor ; and I would not be 
surprised if we found this advisable, if not actually 
necessary.” 

Reaching a group of cocoanut palms, the doctor 
said to the boys : 

“ I wish each boy to bring me a small plant. Any 
plant you choose. You will have five minutes to do 
this. Bring the plant as nearly complete as possible, 
ril blow the whistle when the five minutes are up, and 
I will expect every boy to return promptly.” 

The boys scampered off in every direction. Each 
wished to select as curious a looking plant as possi- 
ble ; for they knew by experience that the doctor could 
tell them many interesting things about any they could 
find. When, therefore, the whistle blew there was a 
great scampering back. Each bore in his hand the 
plant he had selected. 

The doctor was sitting in the shade of some cocoa- 
nut palms near the captain, Mr. Clarkson, and Hiram. 
The two Polynesian men were standing near them. As 
the doctor called boy after boy to bring him the speci- 
men he had selected, he briefly told his audience many 
interesting things about it. If the boy had carelessly 
no 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


torn the plant up so as to leave nearly all its roots in 
the ground he would say : 

Take it away. It’s of no use. You have not 
brought its feet with you. The poor thing is there- 
fore unable to eat.” 

The idea of a plant having feet and being able to 
eat with its feet struck the boys as being very curious, 
especially the brown-skinned boys. 

“ Kooloo no understand doctor,” whispered that lad 
to Charley. ‘‘ Plant has no feet, Charleyo, has it ? No 
eat through feet, can it?” 

‘‘ Certainly, Kooloo,” replied Charley. Don’t the 
plant stand in the ground on its feet and hold on by its 
roots? ” 

‘‘ Kooloo understand now,” was the reply. He call 
roots feet. But,” he continued, “ doctor say plant eat 
through feet.” 

“ Stop talking, Kooloo, I want to hear what the 
doctor is saying. I’ll talk about it with you after a 
while.” 

In some cases the plants brought by the boys had 
nearly all their leaves stripped off. This had probably 
been done in order to make it easier to carry them. 
But the doctor would not accept specimens in this 
condition. 

'' Take them away,” he said. The poor things 
cannot breathe.” 

It must not be forgotten that the doctor was teaching 
a mixed class, in which a great difference existed as 
regards intelligence. As a rule the native boys 

III 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


were far below the others in intelligence, so that it 
was necessary for him to fit his teaching to their 
understanding. 

‘‘ Boys,” said the doctor, pointing to the plants that 
had been brought him, “ these plants differ from ani- 
mals, such as you or 1. We take in food through our 
mouths while plants take in much of their food through 
their feet.” 

When the idea of plants eating through their feet 
was repeated, some of the boys began to laugh; but 
so far from rebuking them for so doing, the doctor 
seemed pleased, and turning to the boy who was laugh- 
ing asked him to say what he saw to laugh at. 

It was a native boy to whom he spoke. 

Feet of some people heap dirty,” was the remark. 

Not much like to eat through such feet.” 

That’s right,” said the doctor ; ‘‘ and the hands of 
some people are also dirty. Not like to eat from such 
hands.” 

At this all laughed ; for the lad who had been speak- 
ing was far from tidy, and his hands were still dirty 
not only from the mud that had adhered to them from 
the plant he had been handling, but especially from ac- 
cumulations of dirt that had not been properly washed 
off during the lad’s daily ablutions. 

‘‘ What do you suppose I mean by the feet of 
plants ? ” inquired the doctor. 

Frank, who was with the boys, replied: 

“ I think I can tell you, doctor. Don’t you mean 
their roots on which they stand ? ” 

II2 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ What do you say, boys ? Is the little fellow 
right? ” inquired the doctor. 

‘‘ Yes,” replied most of the boys, although some 
seemed to be in doubt. 

The doctor explained that most of the mineral food 
of plants was taken from the soil from which it was 
dissolved by the water that fell on the earth as rain. 
He explained how the roots sucked up this liquid food 
through very fine hairs on the tips of the roots. He 
then explained to them that by far the greater quantity 
of the food of plants consisted of water. 

But,” he continued, “ plants also take in some food 
from the air, and here it is the leaves that act as 
mouths. But it is impossible for the plants to take any 
nourishment from the air unless the sun is shining.” 

‘‘ Why is that, doctor ? ” inquired Harold. 

‘‘ Plants breathe in a gas from the atmosphere con- 
sisting of charcoal combined with something in the 
air. This gas is known as carbonic-acid gas, and is 
formed of carbon combined chemically with oxygen. 
When sunlight falls on the leaves the carbon is sepa- 
rated from the oxygen, and uniting with the water goes 
to form the woody tissues of the plants, and the oxygen 
is thrown into the air.” 

Of course there was much in the doctor’s teaching 
that was beyond the comprehension of the brown boys. 
Perhaps Kooloo and Otoa, both of whom were much 
brighter than the rest of the Polynesians, were the 
only ones who understood a fairly large part of what 
the doctor said. 

113 


H 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


This part of the out-of-door instruction took some 
thirty minutes. When it was through the doctor, fol- 
lowed by his class, walked through the woods midway 
between the two lagoons until they reached the swim- 
ming-pool, when he motioned the boys to sit down on 
the ground. On doing this they immediately began 
making preparations for going into the water. 

Not yet,” said the doctor laughing. ‘‘ I’ll give you 
a chance after a while.” 

He then began telling them something about the 
plants of the sea. Afterward leading them to a near- 
by part of the lagoon of the island, he showed them 
places where different kinds of seaweeds were growing, 
making the place somewhat resemble a small forest in 
the water. The waters of the lagoon were so clear 
that they could distinctly see the seaweeds or plants, 
some of which closely resembled those they had been 
examining on the land. 

‘‘ Now,” he said to the boys, tell me if you see any- 
thing in these seaweeds that you think resembles the 
land plants we have been examining.” 

It seemed to the boys that the plants in the water, 
like those on the land, had roots by which they held 
onto the rocks or other things on the bottom of the 
lagoon, and if they had roots they supposed that, of 
course, they would take up nourishment or food from 
the rocks just as plants did from the soil in which they 
stood. 

‘‘ Can you tell me? ” said the doctor, repeating the 
question. 

114 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


As any one can see,” said David Bates, ‘‘ seaweeds 
have roots, and take their food through them just as 
the land plants do.” 

“ Can any of you tell me whether Bates is right ? 
What do you think. Jack? ” 

“ I don’t think, sir,” was the reply, “ that the sea- 
weed takes any nourishment through the parts that are 
attached to the rocks.” 

Then what good are the roots ? ” inquired David. 

Tell him, Charley,” said the doctor, seeing that 
the lad wished to speak. 

‘‘ They are not roots,” replied Charley. ‘‘ They are 
more like hands, with which they hold onto the bottom 
of the ocean. I think Jack is also right in saying that 
seaweeds can take nourishment from the ground on 
which they stand.” 

‘‘ Both Jack and you are correct, Charley,” said the 
doctor. “ The seaweeds and other plants of the ocean 
have no roots. They take all their nourishment from 
the water, and none from the rocks or earth on which 
they stand. Indeed, many seaweeds live in the deep 
water of the ocean in which they float at such distance 
above the bed that, if they had roots, the roots would 
have to be many thousands of feet in length in order 
to reach the bottom.” 

The doctor then led the class to another portion of 
the lagoon where the water was of a beautiful deep 
red color. 

“ This color,” he said, is caused by a very great 
number of exceedingly small seaweeds. So small, in- 

115 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


deed, that many millions of them can live in a few 
drops of water.” 

It may be said that the doctor collected some of this 



Sea Lettuce, or Ulva 


reddish water and afterward showed it at the school 
under the microscope. 

I have asked Waheatoua and Kapiau to collect 

ii6 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


for me specimens of seaweeds from different parts of 
the ocean outside the island. Bring me those speci- 
mens, Waheatoua.” 

Waheatoua, who had been standing with Kapiau, 
with a pleased, important look, said : 

Waheatoua and Kapiau have heap seaweed,” and 
going to their canoes, which they had brought to that 
part of the Harding Lagoon near the swimming-pool, 
they returned with their arms full of weeds. 

Either from among these or from weeds obtained 
elsewhere, the doctor showed the boys the following 
specimens : 

‘‘ Here,” he said, taking a specimen with large thin 
leaves of a greenish tint, that in places shaded off to a 
dark violet, is a seaweed known as the sea lettuce or 
ulva. This specimen,” he said, ‘‘ somewhat resembles 
a flat pipe filled with air. When the weed is torn up 
from the bottom the air in the pipes acts like a balloon, 
so that the weed rises to the top where it floats. Since 
it takes no nourishment from the bottom, it continues 
growing while floating in the water.” 

Taking another specimen, the doctor said : 

Here is a kind of seaweed called the Sargasso 
weed. These weeds are found covering the waters of 
some parts of the ocean to such an extent as to make it 
very difficult for a vessel to force its way through 
them. Captain Harding, as well as Jack, Charley, and 
Harold can tell you about the great Sargasso Sea of 
the Pacific, in which they were caught while on a dere- 
lict brig. This weed is sometimes called the Gulf weed 
117 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


because it is found in great quantities in the Gulf of 
Mexico, and in parts of the Atlantic Ocean where there 
is another Sargasso Sea.” 

Waheatoua and Kapiau had been very much in- 
terested in what the doctor had been saying. 

Doctor great man. Know heap about such 
things,” said Waheatoua. 



Sargasso Weed 


This weed,” continued the doctor, taking up 
another specimen, “ has a long flexible stem, often 
ninety feet in length, that bears at the top what closely 
resembles a flower, and is found in large quantities in 
the deep ocean as well as in shallower waters. 

Here,” he continued, selecting another from the 
pile, is a very beautiful seaweed. ‘‘ As you can see, 
its leaves have perforations or holes in them.” 
ii8 



AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ Doctor,” inquired Jack, if seaweeds take none of 
their nourishment from the ground, I suppose it makes 
no difference on what kind of bottom they stand ? ” 

‘‘ That’s right. Jack,” was the reply. With land 
plants, as you know, the kind of soil makes a great 
difference as to the kind of plants that can be raised, 
but with the seaweed it is one and the same thing 
whether they are attached to a mass of solid limestone 
or any other kind of bottom. 

Now,” said the doctor, turning to his class, I 
want you all to undress and bring me what specimens 
you can find of seaweeds. Most of you know enough 
not to touch any of those things,” he said, pointing 
toward a number of sea-anemones. ‘‘ They look like 
plants, but may sting you badly if you touch them.” 

It may be added here, before closing the chapter, that 
of course the boys eagerly availed themselves of the 
permission to go in swimming, and collected a num- 
ber of seaweeds which they brought to the doctor who 
told them something about each kind. Nor need we 
add that after they were collected, it chancing to be 
high tide, they all had a splendid time on the sliding- 
board. 

When this lesson was over he turned to the little 
fellow and said : Get on my back, Frank, and I’ll give 
you a grand swim out into the deep water.” 

David Bates, however, had yet much to learn. He 
was still chafing under the idea that he had been badly 
treated by the doctor, and in his mean way had en- 
deavored to make the other boys share his bad feeling. 
1 19 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


It is unnecessary to say that he had no success in this 
effort. When therefore the doctor had warned the 
boys not to touch the sea-anemones, lest they should be 
stung, he was heard saying: 

“ What nonsense that is. Just as if those pretty 
flowers could hurt any one! I’ll pluck one and play 
with its flowers just to prove the old man is all wrong.” 

Shortly after this foolish determination he learned 
to his cost the danger of meddling with these animals. 
His outcries proved how severe the stings of the ani- 
mals are. 

“ It serves you right. Bates,” said Mr. Clarkson, to 
whom he had gone for sympathy. Next time I hope 
you will believe what is told you.” 


120 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XI 

Other Out-of-Door Lessons 

It is not our intention to describe all the out-of-door 
lessons of the Harding School. Indeed, since there 
were three each week, it would be impossible to do this. 
These lessons continued to be greatly enjoyed, and 
their benefits extended far beyond the information re- 
ceived, leading as they did to intelligent observation 
by the boys of the life of both the land and the water. 
They were, therefore, constantly bringing specimens 
to the doctor, the captain, or even to Hiram, who was 
very well informed on such matters, and asking for in- 
formation. Nor was Waheatoua left out; for the boys 
soon discovered that he knew much about the habits 
and uses of many animals and plants. 

But while we will not attempt to give details con- 
cerning all these classes, it may be well occasionally to 
describe, somewhat at length, the more important of 
them. 

The fact that the anemone or sea-nettle was able to 
give severe stings had been painfully demonstrated at 
the swimming-pool by David. It is unnecessary to 
say that after his experience he was careful not to go 
too near these harmless-looking animals. 

In connection with the out-of-door lessons, the doc- 
121 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


tor was in the habit of either describing in detail in the 
school room some of the things they had already ob- 
served out of doors, or in referring to the habits and 
peculiarities of the animals and plants he expected them 
to study during the next out-of-door lesson. One thing 
he did greatly helped the boys. He encouraged the ask- 
ing of questions while he was 
talking. 

One day while speaking 
about anemones or sea-net- 
tles, in the schoolroom, Oliver 
Whimple inquired: 

‘‘ Doctor, how is it the sea- 
nettles can give such painful 
stings ? I know they do, for I 
saw how badly David was 
stung the other day at the 
swimming-pool, and Harold 
tells me that one day he was 
so badly hurt by two anem- 
ones in the lagoon that he ac- 
cidentally touched, that he fainted in the water, and 
would probably have drowned had not Charley come to 
his aid.” 

I am glad you have asked that question, Oliver,” 
said the doctor. But before answering it, let me show 
you a drawing in colors of an anemone that Charley 
has made for me. He took this sketch from a sea-nettle 
in a portion of the Harding Lagoon. I’ll tell you some- 
thing about this animal now, and this afternoon in our 
122 



AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


out-of-door class we will visit the place so that you 
can see the living animal. 

“ As I pointed out during one of your out-of-door 
lessons,” continued the doctor, pointing to Charley’s 
sketch, ‘‘ these animals so closely resemble plants that 
they are often taken for them. Indeed, they are called 
zoophytes because they resemble both plants and ani- 
mals. But you must not suppose it is only among 
anemones that zoophytes occur. On the contrary, the 
coral polyps, sponges, and many other animals assume 
a plant or treelike appearance, and are also known 
as zoophytes. 

“ Now,” he continued, “ suppose we carefully ex- 
amine Charley’s sketch. As you can see, the anemone 
is attached at its base to a rock. Its body is shaped like 
a column, narrowest at the bottom and gradually in- 
creasing in size toward the top, where it is flattened out 
into a shape not unlike the blossoms of a flower.” 

“ It’s like a big sunflower,” cried Frank, who gen- 
erally managed to come into the schoolroom when the 
doctor was talking about natural history. 

So it is, my little man,” said the doctor; “ just like 
a crysanthemum or sunflower. The straight parts at 
the top that resemble the colored petals of the sun- 
flower or crysanthemum are what are called the arms, 
fingers, or tentacles. As you have all probably seen, for 
there are many different kinds of sea-anemones in the 
shallow waters of the lagoon, the tentacles are differ- 
ently colored, thus making the animals still more closely 
look like flowers. 


123 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ The next time you get the chance,” he continued, 
watch these arms or fingers. You will then see that 
they are waving to and fro. If anything approaches 
the animal so as to alarm it, or if you touch the arms 
by a stick, they will suddenly be drawn in so that the 
top no longer looks like a flower in full bloom, but 
rather like a bud about to blossom or open.” 

“ Why do they move their arms, doctor? ” inquired 
Oliver. 

So as to make the water flow into a mouth in the 
center of the disk. When the animal is doing this it is 
feeding, or at least it is endeavoring to cause the small 
animals on which it lives to come within reach of its 
arms. As soon as this happens the tentacles grasp their 
prey and carry it toward the center of its mouth from 
which it passes to the stomach. 

‘‘If the animal thus caught shows fight, as of course 
it always does, no matter what its size it is soon made 
unconscious by the sting its captor gives it,” continued 
the doctor. 

“ How does the anemone make room for more when 
it has eaten a big meal ? ” inquired Harold. 

“ Just as you do,” said the doctor smiling. “ It stops 
eating until the food is digested.” 

“ On what does the animal live, doctor ? ” inquired 
one of the boys. 

“ On small worms, or on different kinds of newly 
born fish. When an anemone swallows a large animal 
it permits it to remain in its mouth until nearly all 
its nourishment has been extracted. It then throws 
124 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


what is left out of its mouth, when it is ready for 
another meal.” 

“ I suppose, doctor,” remarked Jack, '' that since 
the anemone is fixed to the rock it is unable to move 
from place to place.” 

‘‘ You are wrong, Jack,” replied the doctor. ‘‘ Al- 
though firmly fixed to the rock an anemone is able 
to loosen its hold and slowly change its position. The 
amount of this motion, however, is very small.” 

‘‘ What a funny animal,” exclaimed Frank. It 
looks like a plant yet it feeds through its head, and 
even walks. I never heard of a plant walking.” 

“That’s so, Frank,” replied the doctor; “but then 
the anemone is not a plant. It is an animal. 

“ And now, Oliver,” continued the doctor, “ I am 
ready to tell you how the sea-anemone is able to give 
such painful stings. Its arms or tentacles are pro- 
vided with a great number of little darts or spears, 
that it is able to thrust into the unlucky animal that 
touches it, and through which it squirts acid or other 
burning substances that produce the smarting stings 
some of you have felt. You see then it is not only the 
acid substance that hurts, but also the little darts or 
spears that remain in the wound and set up festering.” 

That afternoon was spent by the class in the boats 
on Harding Lagoon making a study of the anemones. 
They visited the place where Charley had made the 
drawing the doctor had described, and saw this par- 
ticular anemone as well as many others that somewhat 
resembled it. The doctor told the boys that the tenta- 

125 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


cles or arms, which so closely resembled the petals of 
flowers, were called rays, and that for this reason these 
anemones were commonly known as actinse or star- 
shaped anemones. 

One of the anemones they studied was known as the 
carnation anemone, from the deep red color of its 
tentacles. By rowing the boats slowly over the shal- 
low waters near the shore, they could see a great 


variety of these animals that 
varied in color from white, red, 
purple, yellow, orange, green, 
and blue. There was thus 
given to portions of the bottom 
an appearance closely resem- 
bling a flower garden. This 
was all the more so since not 
only were different parts of the 
tentacles, the disk, and the 
mouth of the animals differ- 
ently colored, but the body, or 
what corresponded in appear- 



Sea Anemone 


ance to a stalk, also had colors unlike those of the 
tentacles. 

While they were thus observing the bottom, Harold, 
who had been examining anothei anemone in the neigh- 
borhood, cried out excitedly: 

“ I say, doctor, look at this fellow, please. He has 
just gobbled a little fish, and that shrimp sitting on him 
evidently intends to hook it.’’ 

‘‘ Where are they, Harold,” inquired Jack. 


126 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ There,” replied Harold, pointing to the two ani- 
mals. “ Aha, Mr. Shrimp, you’ll be sorry if the 
anemone catches you in its arms. I think you are as 
good as a goner.” 

All the occupants of the boats were now closely ob- 
serving the two animals. ‘‘ Don’t be too certain, Har- 
old,” said the doctor. “ The shrimp knows what he is 
about. Keep perfectly still and I think we’ll see 
something interesting.” 

As they sat eagerly watching, they saw the shrimp, 
that was calmly sitting on the anemone so that it was 
just outside the reach of its tentacles, calmly reach 
down, catch hold of the fish that had already been 
thrust into the anemone’s mouth, pull it roughly out, 
and then begin eating its stolen food with evident satis- 
faction. 

Well,” said Harold, I call it pretty cool for that 
shrimp to go and steal the other fellow’s dinner in that 
way. Why don’t he go and catch his own ? ” 

‘‘ I don’t think the shrimp would call it cool if the 
anemone can only manage to grip him with its arms, 
Harold,” said Charley. “ See,” he added, “ how hard 
he is trying to do it.” 

This was true, for the anemone was wildly waving 
its arms in a vain endeavor to reach the shrimp that had 
in this way coolly taken its dinner out of its very 
mouth. Evidently the shrimp was accustomed to this 
kind of robbery; for he not only escaped the dreaded 
arms of the anemone, but even confidently remained on 
its body just out of reach until he had finished eating 
127 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the coveted prize. Then, in a dignified manner, he 
proceeded to look elsewhere for more provender. 

But the Polynesian lads knew something about the 
sea-anemones the doctor had not referred to. 

“ That fellow,’’ said the son of Waheatoua, who was 
one of the class and who, having often accompanied his 
father in his canoe, had learned much about the ani- 
mals, both of the land and water, ‘‘ heap good to eat.” 

‘‘ Is that so, doctor? ” inquired Charley. 

‘‘ Yes,” was the reply, I have often eaten that 
species of anemone. Of course they are never eaten 
raw. Think how you would feel if you had swallowed 
such a thing alive and he threw his little darts in your 
throat.” 

“ I think,” said Charley laughing, “ it would beat 
chili sauce or cayenne pepper.” 

This joke was far beyond the comprehension of the 
brown lads, but it made the others, especially Mr. 
Clarkson, laugh heartily. 

“To prepare the sea-anemones for the table,” con- 
tinued the doctor, “ they are boiled for some time in 
salt water. Their flesh becomes quite firm and pos- 
sesses a taste and flavor not unlike the white meat of a 
crab.” 

“ Doctor,” inquired Jack, “ is it known whether sea- 
anemones live for any great length of time? ” 

“ Yes,” was the reply, “ it is common for naturalists 
to keep anemones in their aquariums so as carefully to 
study their habits. Now, these men have been sur- 
prised at the comparatively great length of time the 
128 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


anemones have lived. In some cases they were still liv- 
ing at the end of twenty years, and even then possessed 
the appearance of being as vigorous and strong as when 
first captured.’’ 

While they were looking into the clear, deep waters, 
Waheatoua, turning to the doctor, said, pointing to 
a huge animal that was lazily watching their boat : 

“ Heap bad fellow,” he said. “ Hungry. Wants to 
get one of us to eat.” 

The doctor looked in the direction in which Wahea- 
toua was pointing and saw a huge shark. 

“ That’s a man-eating shark, Harding,” he ex- 
claimed. I should say he is at least forty feet in 
length. Are there many sharks in the lagoon ? ” he 
inquired. 

‘‘ Really, Parsons,” was the reply, I don’t know. 
I haven’t been looking especially for them lately. When 
we first came to Harding Island we were surprised to 
see fairly large sharks in the waters of the lagoon, and 
were unable to account for their presence until we dis- 
covered the underground passage through the cliffs 
that then occupied the present site of Harding Channel. 
Now, however, since these were thrown down by the 
earthquake shocks, and a free communication estab- 
lished between the ocean and the lagoon, its waters can 
be visited by practically any of the animals from the 
ocean.” 

“ Big fellow,” said Waheatoua grinning. “ Per- 
haps we come some day soon and kill some of them. 
Too many here.” 


I 


129 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ We will do it, Waheatoua,” said the doctor. 

“ Boys,” said the captain, ‘‘ I have always warned 
you against swimming in the waters of the lagoon. 
You can now see how dangerous it would be to do so.” 

As they were about returning to Jackson House, 
Harold, who had been leaning over the side of the boat, 
suddenly called to the doctor, asking him to please look 
at a curious-looking small fish that was sticking firmly 
to the side. 

“ I’ve been trying my best to pull it off,” he said, 
‘‘ but I can’t do it. What is it, doctor ? ” 



Remora, or Sucking Fish 


It is a remora or sucking-fish. Here, let me help 
you get it off. It is well worth examining.” 

After considerable difficulty the fish was pulled off. 
What they saw in examining it was a fish with a flat 
disk-like organ on its head that it employed in holding 
onto the boat, and a general appearance like that shown 
in the drawing on this page. 

“ It looks like a sucker,” cried Oliver, referring to 
the part by which it had held onto the boat. 

“ That’s just what it is,” replied the doctor. “ The 
animal is able to suck out the air between the bottom of 
the boat and this disk, so that it can hold onto the boat 
with great force by the pressure of the atmosphere.” 

130 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


That fellow heap good to catch turtles,” said Wa- 
heatoua grinning. 

“ How can you catch turtles with such a thing as 
that ? ” inquired Oliver in astonishment. 

‘‘ Waheatoua tie string to fish and let him down in 
water,” was the reply. If turtles there, fish soon get 
on turtle’s back and hold on tight. Then Waheatoua 
pulls up string and brings turtle with it.” 

‘‘ Is that so, doctor ? ” inquired Oliver. 

“ Yes,” was the reply. “ I believe that manner of 
catching turtles is frequently used in this part of the 
world.” 

“ Give Waheatoua fish. Maybe to-morrow he show 
you how he use it.” 

All right, Waheatoua,” said Harold ; “ don’t forget 
I gave it to you, and I would like Charley and Oliver 
to come with me to see how you use it.” 

“ Waheatoua no forget,” was the reply. 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XII 

Sea-serpents, Legendary and Real 

That evening after supper at the schoolhouse, Jack, 
Charley, Harold, and Oliver went to Jackson House 
to have a chat with the captain and the doctor. 

It was understood that on these calls if they should 
find the men engaged they would either wait on one 
of the porches or go to the library to read until they 
were disengaged. 

It was a great treat for brainy lads, fond of read- 
ing, to get into the library at Jackson House. The 
captain had brought over so many books that the 
shelves Hiram had constructed, extending almost com- 
pletely around the room, were filled not only with the 
latest, but also with many of the earlier books on zo- 
ology, botany, physics, chemistry, and allied subjects. 
The privilege had been given to these boys of taking 
any book from the shelves of the library, it being un- 
derstood that such books should always be returned to 
the shelves when they finished reading them, and were 
never to be taken from Jackson House unless permis- 
sion had first been obtained. 

The boys found the doctor and the captain seated on 
the porch engaged in earnest conversation. They 
therefore started for the library, when the doctor said : 

132 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Don’t go, boys. The captain and I can give you a 
few minutes ; for I imagine you have come to ask ques- 
tions. Indeed, for the matter of that you need not 
leave us after you have asked these questions. We’re 
not especially busy; we were only talking about some- 
thing I am sure would interest you. Now, what is it 
you wish to ask ? Suppose you put the question. Jack,” 
he continued. 

''We wanted some information concerning the 
sucker fish.” 

" Do you mean the kind we removed from the side 
of our boat ? ” 

"Yes, doctor,” replied Jack. "Is there more than 
one species of this fish ? ” 

" There are several species,” was the reply. " The 
one we took yesterday is known as the remora, and was 
probably brought into the lagoon on the bodies of some 
of the sharks ; for this fish is often found on the outside 
of sharks, whales, and other large fish. When it once 
attaches itself to any of these animals, it seldom loses 
its hold except at the moment of feeding, when it 
temporarily loosens its grasp, darts suddenly after its 
prey, and quickly returning again takes a hold with its 
suction-like organ. Sometimes, however, it is loosened 
by the animal rubbing against the rocky bottom.” 

" I guess, doctor,” observed Harold, " there would 
not be much left of a fish like the one we took from the 
side of the boat after a shark or a whale had rubbed 
it once or twice against the bottom.” 

" Unless, Harold,” replied the doctor laughing, " the 

133 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


fish had sense enough to loosen its hold when it dis- 
covered what the shark was trying to do.” 

Doctor,” inquired Charley, “ do you suppose the 
sucking-fish mistook the side of our boat for the body 
of a shark? ” 

“ Not at all,” was the reply. It is not an unusual 
thing for these fish to hold onto almost any large ob- 
ject that is moving through the water.” 

‘‘What does remora mean, doctor?” inquired 
Oliver. 

“ It comes from a Latin word, meaning to retard or 
burden,” replied the doctor. “ The ancients had very 
absurd ideas as to the immense force this little animal 
could exert when it so chose, and believed that it was 
able actually to stop the motion of a large ship or other 
vessel.” 

“ A little fish like that stop the motion of a vessel ! ” 
exclaimed Charley in astonishment. “ Why, it couldn’t 
even stop our boat if there was only one in it to row. 
Is not that so, doctor? ” 

“You are certainly right, Charley,” was the reply; 
“ but don’t be too hard on the poor ancients. They 
were very bright fellows for all their funny mistakes. 
Don’t forget they were extremely superstitious, and be- 
lieving, as they did, in supernatural beings who could 
perform all kinds of otherwise impossible things, they 
probably regarded the little fish we saw to-day as one 
of these beings. Indeed,” he continued, “ I remember 
reading a statement made by the Roman historian 
Pliny, that at the battle of Actium the vessel of An- 
134 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


tony was so firmly held by one of these little animals 
that Augustus won the battle and thus became emperor 
of Rome.” 

What funny fellows the old Romans were, Uncle 
Arthur,” said Harold. I cannot understand that 
bright, brainy, and brave men like them could for a- 
moment believe such nonsense.” 

“ It is astonishing, Harold,” said the captain ; ‘‘ but 
as the doctor said, I imagine it was because of their be- 
lief in supernatural beings. But go on, doctor,” said 
the captain, I don’t wish to interrupt you.” 

There is another species of remora,” continued the 
doctor, that is common in the Indian Ocean. This I 
believe is the animal that is most frequently employed 
in the capture of turtles. It is said that the people in 
these parts of the world train the fish and employ 
them, as Waheatoua has declared he has done, in 
fishing for turtles.” 

“ How do they do that, doctor ? ” inquired Harold. 

They tie a string securely to the body near its head. 
When they see, as is not unusual in certain parts of 
the ocean, one of these huge animals sleeping on the 
surface of the water, they row the boat quietly so as 
to get as near as possible without alarming it, and then 
letting the fish go but holding onto the end of the 
string. Now, it is said that the fish is trained so as to 
swim immediately to the turtle, and when it firmly 
attaches itself to its body, it holds on so tightly that 
the turtle is drawn to the boat and thus readily 
captured.” 

13s 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


' Come with me at once, said the bullfrog to the 
whale, or I’ll make you,’ ” said Charley laughing. 

“ I suppose, Charley,” said the doctor smiling, you 
mean you don’t believe so small a fish could possibly 
hold on to the turtle tightly enough to permit them to 
haul it to the boat despite its struggles to escape.” 

“ That’s just what I do mean, doctor,” said Charley. 

Do you believe that yarn ? ” 

I certainly do not believe the whole of it,” said 
the doctor. That much of the story is a yarn is very 
probable. Of course there can be but little doubt that 
if the turtle made an intelligent effort to escape it 
would pull the fish in two. Naturalists, however, assert 
that the sucking-fish will permit itself to be pulled in 
two before it loosens its hold on any large surface to 
which it has once attached itself. I suppose that by 
skilfully playing the turtle, just as an expert fisher- 
man will play a large fish with a fly-rod, they might 
succeed in hauling the turtle near enough to the boat to 
enable them to take hold of it with a boat hook and so 
take it aboard.” 

“ But how about training the fish to catch turtles ? ” 
I think that very improbable. You must know, 
Charley,” said the doctor, “ that the remora or suck- 
ing-fish are caught when attached to some large object. 
Now, in parts of the world where turtles are plentiful, 
it is not unusual to find remora fastened to their bodies. 
I can understand, therefore,” he added, “ that by se- 
lecting a good-sized sucking-fish that had probably been 
comfortably attached for many years to the back of a 
136 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


turtle, and had grown fat on the prey it had taken 
while carried in this way through the waters, if it was 
removed and left until nearly starved to death it would 
only be too glad, if it saw a turtle asleep on the water 
near it, to swim to the animal and fix itself to its body 
so as to continue its easy life/’ 

That’s capital, doctor,” said the captain. I have 
no doubt that you have given the correct explanation as 
to the so-called training of the sucking-fish. I do not, 
however, mean to suggest that fish cannot be taught to 
do certain things.” And then turning to the boys he 
added : If you remind me sometime I will tell you 
some stories about trained fish.” 

We are much obliged to you and the doctor,” said 
Charley. I guess,” he added, turning to his com- 
panions, we had better go to the library and read.” 

Don’t go, boys,” said the doctor, “ the captain and 
I were talking over the next chapter in the ' Physical 
Geography of the Sea.’ We are now on the vegetable 
and animal life of the ocean, and were discussing how 
much ought to be put in the book concerning legendary 
and real sea-serpents. Captain,” he said, turning to his 
companion, don’t you think we would be helped in 
this matter if we threshed it out by conversation with 
the boys? If we encourage them to ask questions, I 
have no doubt that some interesting mode of treat- 
ment might suggest itself.” 

By all means let them stay, doctor,” said the cap- 
tain. I am sure this subject will interest them.” 

Very well, then. Here is one of the books the 

137 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


captain and I were discussing when you came in,” pick- 
ing up a volume entitled ‘‘ The Mysteries of the 
Ocean,” by Arthur Mangin. I don’t agree with all 
that is to be found in this book, yet much of it is re- 
liable, and the pictures are generally quite artistic and 
correct. Indeed, considerable information concerning 
imaginary and real sea-serpents is given by Mangin. 

“ It is hardly necessary,” he continued, “ to say much 
about the wonderful stories concerning certain fabulous 
animals that ancient mariners claim to have seen in 
different parts of the ocean. There can be no doubt 
that many of them may have seen huge animals some- 
what resembling serpents, but generally speaking they 
tell very ridiculous stories about these animals. For 
example, Pliny cites the absurd story of a sea-serpent 
so large that it was never seen in the shallow waters, 
but only in the deep ocean, because there only 
could it find water deep enough in which freely to 
move. Nor could we believe another story told by 
Pliny of an enormous animal that could move so 
rapidly through the waters that even the fastest 
ships were unable to escape. The animal was said to 
possess a number of arms with which it would lay hold 
on a ship, when it would seize one after another of its 
unfortunate people and devour them.” 

‘‘ That’s like the big devil-fish we had to fight in the 
grotto of Parker Cliffs,” said Harold to Charley. 

“ Yes,” said the doctor, ‘‘ I have very little doubt but 
that this kind of sea-serpent was the octopus, or as the 
ancients called it, the kraken.” 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Doctor,” cried Harold, who had been turning over 
the leaves of Mangin’s book the captain had laid on the 
table, see this awful picture of the kraken. It has 
laid hold of a vessel and is getting ready to eat its 
people.” 

‘‘ Yes,” said the doctor, this represents a kraken.” 

Do you suppose Mangin puts that in his book as a 
real picture? ” inquired Harold. 

‘‘ I don’t think you could have looked at the writing 
underneath the picture, Harold,” said the doctor smil- 
ing. 

That’s certainly very careless of me,” replied Har- 
old, now reading the printed matter under the drawing, 
‘‘ ‘ The Kraken as Seen by the Eye of Imagination,’ 
Then,” he continued, “ this is an imaginary or make- 
believe dragon.” 

“ Yes,” replied the doctor, the picture represents 
a legendary monster. Let me read you what Man- 
gin says about it.” (See Appendix A, Legendary Kra- 
ken or Octopus.) 

‘‘ Doctor,” inquired Charley, would you call the 
kraken or devil-fish a legendary or a real sea-serpent ? ” 

“ I hardly know how to answer your question, Char- 
ley, as both you and Harold well know there are such 
things as devil-fish. I think the correct answer would 
be that the particular devil-fish pictured and described 
by Mangin was real so far as being a devil-fish. I 
think, however, that its size and weight were largely 
imaginary. 

‘'There can be no doubt,” continued the doctor, 

139 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ that the devil-fish has been seen on many occasions, 
and seen too, clearly enough to permit it to be de- 
scribed in detail. We are justified, however, in refus- 
ing to accept without question many of these descrip- 
•tions; for they have most probably, although perhaps 
unconsciously, been greatly exaggerated. 

In the opinion of the Norwegians,” he continued, 
“ the seas that lie off their country are the home of 
the kraken or the sea-trodden, the scourge of the 
sea. Listen,” he said, reading from the book, to what 
Pontoppidan, Bishop of Bergen, says concerning this 
belief.” (See Appendix B, Norwegian Sea-serpent.) 

A similar belief,” continued the doctor, existed 
very generally nearly one hundred years ago in Amer- 
ica and England about the sea-serpent. Accounts are 
given by various people of prodigious monsters, hav- 
ing the appearance of serpents, that were seen off parts 
of the coast of Massachusetts. In the archives of Ply- 
mouth are to be found depositions made by seamen 
that, although differing in details, at least agree as to 
the huge size and serpent-like shape of the animals. 
These appearances were especially frequent at various 
times during 1817, 1819, and 1820. I will read you 
what Mangin and others say about them.” (See Ap- 
pendix C, Massachusetts Sea-serpent.) 

But we are not yet through with sea-serpents that 
many credible witnesses claim to have distinctly seen. 
During the year 1857, Captain Harrington, an Eng- 
lish sailor, of the ship Castillian, describes a sea-ser- 
pent that he saw,” continued the doctor, who then read 
140 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the following account of the same. ( See Appendix D, 
Harrington’s Sea-serpent.) 

As you can see,” continued the doctor, “ Harring- 
ton’s description of the serpent was so explicit that it 
might have produced a general belief in the existence 
of this animal. As it was, quite a discussion was started * 
in the public press and, indeed, even in scientific so- 
cieties. The two parties in this discussion were those 
that claimed that Harrington could not be mistaken, 
and those who claimed that the serpent so minutely de- 
scribed consisted of nothing but an immense algae or 
seaweed, and that although Harrington honestly be- 
lieved in the correctness of his description, what he 
described was a floating plant and not an animal. In- 
deed, the latter belief was afterward proved by some- 
thing that occurred not long after the appearance of 
Harrington’s serpent. A sea captain, seeing what he 
afterward declared he believed to be a veritable sea- 
serpent, was sensible enough to send out a boat and 
actually capture the alleged serpent, when it was found 
to be simply an immense algae or seaweed, more than 
a hundred feet in length and four feet in diameter.” 
(See Appendix E, Capture of the Sea-serpent.) 

‘‘ But,” continued the doctor, there is another va- 
riety of the so-called sea-serpent that, strange to say, 
consists of great numbers of minute mollusks possess- 
ing the power of emitting phosphorescent light, that 
are frequently found floating on the ocean in the shape 
of long transparent threads formed by chains of these 
animals. According to Tandon these sometimes are 
141 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


seen on the surface extending in irregular, serpent-like 
lines for many miles.” 

‘‘Have these mollusks any motion, doctor?” in- 
quired Jack. 

“ The separate mollusks have,” was the reply. 
“ Each moves in such a manner as to give to the long 
chain a motion not unlike that of a serpent.” 



Snakelike Chain of Phosphorescent Mollusks 


“ Have these mollusks arms or feet with which they 
swim ? ” inquired Harold. 

“ No, Harold,” was the reply. “ These little ani- 
mals possess a very curious method of swimming. 
They take in water at one end of the body and squirt 
it out with considerable force from the opposite end. 
The reaction of the stream moves them through the 
water in a direction opposite to that which the 
142 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


streams take. These long snakelike chains,” con- 
tinued the doctor, ‘‘ can sometimes be seen at night by 
reason of the faint glow of phosphorescent light they 
produce.” 

“ But how about the real sea-serpents ? ” inquired 
Jack. 

“ I imagine, Jack,” replied the doctor, ‘‘ that the 
octopus or kraken may be regarded as a real sea-ser- 
pent if one is willing to reduce its size sufficiently. The 
captain and I were discussing the question as to 
whether some of the huge saurians that lived in the 
waters of the ocean in the geological past, some of 
which, like the plesiosaurians, had long snakelike 
heads and necks, might not possibly have continued to 
live in small numbers, and occasionally coming to 
the surface give rise to the stories of sea-serpents.” 

And what conclusion did you reach, doctor? ” in- 
quired Charley. 

That this was possible but not probable,” was the 
reply. There is, however,” he continued, a real 
sea-serpent. In reality a form of huge eel. But it is 
not much of a sea-serpent after all, since it seldom 
attains a length greater than six feet.” 


143 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XIII 

Sponges. A Shark Hunt 

Now that Doctor Parsons formed one of the Harding 
Island community, their collection of minerals, shells, 
coral skeletons, sponges, etc., referred to in “ Wrecked 
on a Coral Island,” was rapidly increasing; for the 
doctor was not only an able naturalist, but also an en- 
thusiastic collector. 

“ Harding,” he said one day, while looking over the 
specimens, “ did you get all these sponges from the 
waters in the neighborhood of the island, or have you 
gone elsewhere for some ? ” 

“ They were all obtained from the shore waters of 
Harding Island, from the waters of its lagoon, or from 
the lagoon of Twin Island No. i.” 

Have you told the boys much about the habits of 
sponges ? ” inquired the doctor. 

‘‘ Very little,” was the reply. 

Then,” said the doctor, ‘‘ I will take up this sub- 
ject for our next out-of-door lesson.” 

The doctor took an early opportunity of calling at- 
tention to the well-known reddish, light-brown, or yel- 
lowish colors of some of the sponges, as well as to the 
numerous holes or openings that extended throughout 
them. 


144 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


An hour before beginning his remarks on sponges, 
he permitted the boys to come to his desk, one after 
another, and look through a magnifying glass at a 
piece of sponge. In this way they were able to see that 
the body of the sponge was made up of numerous 
thin flexible fibers interlaced, and extending in practi- 
cally all directions. 

“ All the holes 
you see,’' he said, 
are connected so 
as to form a great 
number o f canals 
that extend in dif- 
ferent directions. 

When the sponge 
is living it is able 
to cause streams of 
water to pass 
through these 
canals. In this 
drawing I have made from one of the books of 
the library, you can see the streams of water that are 
being forced through the canals by the animal. Were 
you looking at the living sponge you could not see the 
streams as distinctly as in this drawing, since here 
they are shown as they would appear when examined 
through a strong magnifying-glass.” 

Where does the water enter the sponge, doctor? ” 
inquired Charley. 

“ The water goes in at the small openings and comes 

K 145 



A Magnified Piece of Sponge 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


out at the large openings/' was the reply. “ It is 
drawn into the small openings by little arms or cilia 
on the inner surfaces of some of the canals 

‘‘ Sponges differ greatly in shape,” he continued. 
Some are shaped like globes or balls ; some are 
trumpet-shaped; others have the shapes of sticks or 
clubs. Here,” he said, picking up a specimen, ‘‘ is a 
trumpet-shaped sponge, and here is a globe-shaped 
sponge. In the drawing of the globular sponge you 
will see slender branches projecting from its surface. 
These, however, do not belong to the sponge, but are 
seaweeds that have attached themselves to the body of 
the animal. 

Here,” he continued, pointing to another variety, 
is a curious sponge known to the sailors as Neptune’s 
glove; for, as you can see, it somewhat resembles the 
thumb and fingers of a hand.” 

“ Doctor,” cried Frank, had Mr. Neptune five 
fingers and one thumb ? ” 

“ I don’t know, laddie,” was the reply. ‘‘ If there 
was ever such a person as Neptune I imagine he had 
one thumb and the usual four fingers on each hand. 

Some sponges,” continued the doctor, have a 
shape not unlike that of a straight stick or cudgel 
which, however, is often branched at one of its ends. 
As you can see, this specimen has attached itself to a 
seaweed, and was found growing on the weed at a 
depth of sixty fathoms, or three hundred and sixty feet. 
Now,” he said, if any of you wish to ask questions 
about sponges I will answer them if I can.” 

146 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ Did you not tell us the other day, doctor, that 
sponges are animals? ” inquired Oliver. 

‘‘ Yes, Oliver, ’’ was the reply; ‘‘ they are zoophytes. 



Globe-shaped Sponge 


one of the forms of plant-like animals. At one time 
they were believed to be plants, but are now recognized 
as animals.” 

That afternoon they collected a number of different 

147 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


kinds of sponges from the waters of the lagoon by 
means of a contrivance constructed by Hiram, not un- 
like the wooden tongs that perhaps some of my readers 
have seen employed in the shallow waters of Chesa- 
peake or Delaware Bays for bringing up oysters. 

In order the better to see objects on the bottom, the 
doctor had constructed what he called a ‘‘ water-glass,” 
consisting of a bucket in an opening in the bottom of 
which he had inserted a large lens. By dipping the 
bottom of the bucket in the water so as to plunge the 
outer face of the lens below the surface, and then in- 
serting the head a short distance into the bucket, the 
objects on the bottom of the water could be seen far 
more distinctly than would otherwise have been pos- 
sible. 

The doctor’s water-glass so pleased Charley and 
Harold that they made one for themselves, and had 
much fun in looking at things on the bottom of the 
lagoons. 

The first sponge brought up in this manner had the 
shape of a globe or ball. They could distinctly see 
the place where it had attached itself to the bottom. 

It was a matter of considerable surprise to some 
of the boys, like Oliver and David, who had never 
before seen a living sponge, to find it covered with a 
sticky, gluey substance that made it very unlike the 
sponges with which they were familiar. This sub- 
stance was not only spread over the surface, but also 
filled portions of the tubes or canals that extended 
throughout its body. 


148 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ Before a sponge can be used in the bath,” said the 
doctor, it must be freed from this material. This 
can be best done by permitting it to rot slowly or de- 
compose when left in a pool of water for a few days 
exposed to the sun and the air.” 

‘‘ I don’t believe a word the old man is saying,” 
whispered Bates to one of the Polynesian boys who was 
sitting beside him. “ It stands to reason it would be 
much easier to squeeze the stuff out in this way,” he 
said, as he gave the sponge a hard squeeze in one of 
his hands. 

David had again put his foot into it, or, rather, he 
had put his hand in it; for no sooner had he brought 
a strong pressure against the sponge than he threw it 
down and commenced shaking his hand as if to shake 
the pain out of it. 

Seeing the boy had been punished enough for his 
folly, the doctor said nothing directly to him, but in- 
formed the others that portions of the openings or 
holes in the body of the sponge were filled with sharp, 
hard bodies, called spiculae, formed either of lime or 
silica, that acted as a kind of skeleton for the animal. 

“ Some of these are straight and sharp,” said the 
doctor, like ordinary pins or needles, some have the 
shapes of anchors, others of stars, while still others re- 
semble shovels.” 

We may say here that the doctor gave the sponges 
to Waheatoua, who promised to place them in the 
water where they would rot, and afterward to wash 
and clean them so that they could be used for the 

149 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


bath. One, however, the doctor took to the school- 
house and obtained from it a number of the spiculae, 
which he let the boys examine one after another 
under a magnifying-glass. 

“It is in the warm waters of the world,” con- 
tinued the doctor, “ that sponges reach their greatest 
development. Different parts of the Mediterranean Sea 
and the Gulf of Mexico are the most noted of these 
regions. Where the water is not too deep the sponges 
are obtained by diving. A pole is stuck at one end 
in the bottom alongside a place where the sponges can 
be seen through the clear waters from the boat, the 
other end resting against the boat. The diver then 
slips down the pole and collects the sponges. 

“ In places where sponges live in waters too deep 
for diving, they are brought to the surface by the ac- 
tion of a dredge. Generally speaking, however, hand- 
picked sponges obtained by diving or sliding down the 
pole are less apt to be torn or injured than those ob- 
tained by dredging. For the sake of the greater gain 
the sponge gatherers are apt to dive in water deeper 
than is safe for their health; for such people generally 
live a much shorter time than if they were engaged in 
less dangerous occupations. 

“ Sponges differ greatly in their texture. In some 
the fibers are coarse and the openings so large and 
numerous that they are only suitable for rough work. 
Bath sponges are generally finer and command very 
high prices by reason of their unusual closeness of 
texture.” 

150 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The doctor explained that many of the best sponges 
are now obtained from the United States on the coast 
of Florida. These, he declared, are driving the 
Mediterranean varieties out of the market. He also 
explained that overfishing had so nearly destroyed this 
new field that efforts had been made to restock these 
grounds by growing sponges on the Florida coast. 

Has this been successful ? ” inquired Jack. 

‘‘ I believe it has,” was the reply. “ At least accord- 
ing to some papers brought by the captain it appears 
that the sponge farms have proved quite profitable.” 

‘‘How can they raise sponges, doctor?” inquired 
Harold. 

“ I am glad you asked that question, Harold,” said 
the doctor ; “ for the method employed in raising 
sponges will probably seem to you extremely odd. You 
must remember that the sponge does not consist of a 
single animal, but of a number of separate animals. 
You can therefore understand that by cutting a living 
sponge in pieces something like very coarse mince- 
meat, and placing these pieces in water on a suitable 
bottom, they might live and grow, so that in this way, 
from a single sponge, a great number of separate 
sponges could be obtained.” 

“ That is certainly very strange,” said Harold. 

“ It is,” was the reply ; “ but I understand that this 
method has been very successful on the Florida coast 
and elsewhere.” 

The boys were so interested in what they had heard 
about sponge farms that they started a small one on 

151 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


their own account in a part of the waters of the lagoon 
of Twin Island No. i. Indeed, it was largely for the 
purpose of watching this plantation that they had con- 
structed the water-glass above referred to. 

It will be remembered that Waheatoua had asked 
Harold to give him the sucking-fish, so that he might 
try to use it for the catching of turtles, should there 
be any in the waters of the Harding Lagoon. He had 
arranged to have Kapiau help him in this effort. It 
was on a Friday afternoon that the class had been 
studying sponges with the doctor, and as he was leav- 
ing in his canoe with those the doctor had given him 
for cleaning, he turned to Harold and said: 

To-morrow Waheatoua and Kapiau will try to 
fish with sucker-fish. You and Charley would like to 
go with us? ’’ 

Yes, if I can ask Oliver along.’’ 

There is no room in the canoe for more than one. 
Kapiau take you in his canoe, and Waheatoua take 
Charleyo. No room for another boy, but if captain 
will let Waheatoua take one of the boats the other boy 
can come. If not, the other can no come. I’ll ask cap- 
tain.” 

But before Waheatoua could do this the captain 
said to Waheatoua: 

I want you and Kapiau to come with me and some 
of the others to-morrow after breakfast, to see if we 
cannot kill some of the sharks in the lagoon. Bring 
with you whatever you think necessary for this pur- 
pose.” 


152 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Waheatoua and Kapiau will bring their big 
spears,” said the Polynesian grinning. “ Maybe the 
captain will bring a big fish-hook and also some make- 
thunders. Then we will kill plenty sharks. Glad you 
ready to kill them. Too many big fellows in lagoon. 
Catch boys some time and eat ’em.” And then re- 
membering the engagement he had made with Harold 
and Charley, he said : Perhaps Harealdo and Jackeo 
come with you? ” 

‘‘ Yes,” was the reply. 

O uncle,” cried Harold, that will be splendid fun ! 
But can’t I ask Oliver to go with us ? ” 

“ He can go if we can find room enough,” and then 
thinking the matter over, he said : Waheatoua, will 
you and Kapiau bring your canoes, or would you rather 
be in the boats with us ? ” 

“ Waheatoua and Kapiau each bring canoe,” was the 
reply. ‘‘ Canoe heap better for killing sharks. Can 
move quick through water.” 

Can each of you take a boy with you? ” inquired 
the captain. 

‘‘ If boy sit still, yes ; if not, no.” 

Could you take Kooloo in your canoe, and Otoa 
in Kapiau’s canoe? ” said the captain. 

Waheatoua grinned when this question was asked. 

'' Take Kooloo and Otoa all right. They sit still.” 

Then,” said the captain, '' we can take Oliver with 

us.” 

When Hiram learned what they intended to do he 
was greatly pleased. 


153 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Thet be a wery good idee, cap’n,” he said. “ Thar 
be so many of ’em blamed sharks in our lagoon that 
Hiram Higgenbotham would like to help kill some of 
’em ui'f. Now these sharks be wery stupid animals, 
and I reckon thet with the help of Waheatoua and 
K .piau we will be able to kill a-many of ’em.” 

When some of the others learned of the hunt they 
were anxious to join it. The captain, who was far 
f "om being a timid man and knew there was no danger 
> f they only kept cool, arranged that Mr. Clarkson 
V bhould take the native boys in the other boat and ac- 
X company them. 

^ As regards fishing for turtles or other large animals 
by the aid of the sucking-fish they had no success, as 
the doctor had quietly informed the boys would prob- 
ably be the case. Most likely there were no turtles in 
the lagoon. However, this lack of success did not ap- 
pear to worry Waheatoua; for he philosophically drew 
in the remora and again placed it in a bucket of water 
with the remark that maybe some other time he would 
go with Kapiau to some islands not far from Harding 
Island and ‘‘ catch heap turtles.” 

And now the fishing for sharks began. Under 
the instructions of the captain, Hiram had placed a 
windlass on the boat and had attached one end of a 
strong fishing-line to the drum of the windlass and 
to the other end a piece of stout steel wire, to which 
a large hook was secured. He baited the hook with 
a big fish, a number of which had been caught by Wa- 
heatoua and Kapiau for bait. 

154 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


When they came to the eastern part of the lagoon, 
near the Harding Channel, the boat was quietly moved 
through the waters. A huge shark, at least thirty-five 
feet in length, was seen through the clear waters, swim- 
ming lazily near the bottom. The baited hook was 
thrown overboard, and Hiram slowly but quietly let 
out the line until the bait was lowered within a few 
feet of the shark’s nose. The animal was not at all 
alarmed, but swam around the bait smelling it, and at 
last turning itself on its side opened its huge jaws and 
made a savage bite at the fish. Hiram instantly pulled 
at the line, thus hooking the animal, and then turning 
the windlass drew it slowly toward the boat. 

The shark instantly began to thrash the waters by 
the beating of its tail and by plunging about in a mad 
effort to tear itself from the hook. It was unable to 
do this, nor could it bite through the steel wire. It was 
therefore gradually drawn toward the surface by the 
steady pull of the windlass. While still a few feet be- 
low the water Waheatoua and Kapiau motioned to 
Kooloo and Otoa, who were managing the canoes, to 
bring them near the fish, and as soon as the proper dis- 
tance was reached, skilfully drove their spears deep 
into its body. 

The efforts of the fish to tear itself from the spears 
were now tremendous. Waheatoua shouted to the 
captain and the doctor: 

Shoot make-thunder and kill fish.” 

Both of the men had brought with them rifles capable 
of carrying large balls, and as they were both good 

155 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


shots they were able to land the balls so as to strike 
a vital part. In a few moments, therefore, it was float- 
ing lifeless on the surface near their boat. 

“ That’s one less of them fellers in Harding La- 
goon,” said Hiram with a grin. “ Cap’n, shell we tug 
the body ashore ? ” 

‘‘ What do you say, doctor ? ” inquired the captain. 

‘‘ Let it float in the water,” was the reply. There’s 
nothing of value about it. It is true that good oil 
can be obtained from the liver, and that its skin can 
be made into fairly good leather. Just now, however, 
we do not want any of these things, so let’s leave the 
body here and see if we cannot despatch some others, 
and thus make the waters of the lagoon somewhat 
safer for all, especially for the boys.” 

While this conversation was going on, neither Wa- 
heatoua nor Kapiau said anything, but it was evident 
from the manner in which they looked at each other 
that they were far from agreeing with the doctor that 
there was nothing on the shark that would be of use. 
As they were about leaving it floating on the water, 
Harold exclaimed in an excited manner: 

Look at that, doctor, there are a number of suck- 
ing-fish attached to the body of the shark.” 

But Waheatoua and Kapiau had already seen the 
fish and were engaged in removing them from it. 

“ Waheatoua put them with the other fish. Maybe 
soon he’ll go with Kapiau to some island not far from 
here and catch turtles.” 

That afternoon they succeeded in killing three other 

156 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


huge animals. On the bodies of two of these they 
found several sucking-fish or remora attached. 

The shark last killed was entirely different in ap- 
pearance from either of the others. It was a savage 
animal and showed more fight than the others. It 
belonged to the species known as the hammer-headed 
shark, from the curious resemblance . of its head to a 
double-headed hammer. It was an odd-looking ani- 
mal. Besides the shape of its head the position of its 
eyes added to its odd appearance; for the eyes were 
placed at the ends of the head. 

After they had returned to Jackson House, Hiram, 
together with Waheatoua and Kapiau, went back to 
the dead sharks from which Waheatoua and Kapiau 
took a part of the liver from which they intended to 
get oil, and some of the fins that they said were good 
to eat. For his part, Hiram wished to obtain some of 
the rough skin which he said would be of much use 
in polishing a wooden workbox he was making for 
Mrs. Higgenbotham. 

Some time after the shark hunt Harold brought to 
the doctor an odd-looking thing of a dark brown color 
he had picked up from the ocean shore of the island. 

‘‘ What is it, doctor? he inquired. 

“ It is the egg of a certain species of shark,’’ was 
the reply. 

“ I thought,” said Charley, “ that sharks brought 
forth their young alive.” 

“Some of them do,” was the reply; “but in this 
species the eggs are deposited in this thick horny case 

157 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Harold has brought me. When the young fish is born 
it is provided with a bag hanging from its body, in 
which, as is generally the case with fishes, is sufficient 
nourishment to provide for the young shark until it 
is able to get its food for itself.” 


1S8 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XIV 

The Whimples, Harding, and Pleasanton 
Company 

One day as Oliver Whimple, Charley, Harold, Frank, 
Kooloo, and Otoa were on their way in the boat on 
the lagoon to the swimming-pool, Oliver, turning to 
Charley, said: 

“ Charley, I am thinking of making a collection of 
shells, and want you and Harold to join me. You 
know Jack has a splendid collection of the minerals of 
Harding Island. Now I want to make a collection of 
shells. What do you say? ” 

‘‘ I like the idea,” said Charley. Til join you. 
We’ll have great fun in making the collection, and 
will be helped in studying the animals that live in the 
shells.” 

‘‘ I’ll join you too, Oliver,” said Harold. “ But I 
hope you don’t want to collect only the shells found 
in the waters of Harding Island. Don’t you agree 
with me, Charley,” he added, turning to his com- 
panion, “ that it would be better to make our collec- 
tion from as many different parts of the ocean as 
we can ? ” 

I certainly do, Harold,” was the reply. ‘‘ If you 
don’t object, Oliver,” he said, turning to the lad, we 

159 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


will do as Harold suggests and make our collection 
from all parts of the ocean.’’ 

“ All right,” said Oliver ; but I don’t see how we 
can get shells from any part of the ocean except that 
around Harding Island.” 

‘‘ You don’t? ” inquired Charley, in pretended aston- 
ishment. What is the matter with asking Kooloo’s 
and Otoa’s fathers to bring us shells from their islands ? 
And how about Waheatoua and Kapiau who, as you 
know, go in their canoes to many different places? 
They should be able to bring us beautiful shells. What 
do you say, Kooloo ? ” inquired Charley ; would not 
your father be willing to get shells for us ? ” 

‘‘ My father, the great Mahinee,” said Kooloo, ‘‘ is 
the friend of Charleyo and Harealdo. He would be 
glad to get you beautiful shells if you ask him.” 

And so would my father,” said young Otoa. 

Heap beautiful shells near his island. Some so big 
almost take a bath in one.” 

“ Then,” said Charley, it is agreed that the Whim- 
pie, Harding, and Pleasanton Company begin a min- 
er alogical collection.” 

“ Don’t put my name first,” exclaimed Oliver, ‘‘as if 
I was the principal member of the company. Put your 
name or Harold’s first.” 

“ The name of the firm will be what I have called 
it,” said Charley, winking at Harold. “ What do you 
say, Harold?” 

“ You are right. The name will be The Whimple, 
Harding, and Pleasanton Company,” was the reply. 
i6o 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ Won’t you take me into your company? ” inquired 
Frank, to whom the high-sounding name was very at- 
tractive. 

''Why of course we will, Frank,” replied Charley; 
" if there is no objection the name will be the Whim- 
pies, Harding, and Pleasanton Company. As I hear 
no objection,” he said in a joking tone, " Frank Yates 
Whimple is made a member of the company, with full 
permission to collect for it all the shells he can; but 
of course not to take them away from the museum. 
You agree to that, do you, Frank? ” 

" Oh, yes,” was the reply. " I don’t want to take 
them away; I’ll just get them for you.” 

"But who are the company, Charley?” inquired 
Harold. 

"Who are the company?” exclaimed Charley in 
mock surprise. " Harold, I am astonished. They are 
Mahinee, Otoa’s father, Kooloo, Otoa, Waheatoua, 
and Kapiau.” 

" With such a company,” said Oliver laughing, " it 
will be odd if we don’t make a conchological collection.” 

" What kind of collection is that, Ollie ? ” inquired 
Frank. 

" It’s a collection of the shells of different kinds of 
mollusks,” was the reply. 

" And what are mollusks, Ollie ? ” persisted the 
youngster. 

" They are soft animals like oysters and clams. Of 
course, Frank,” he continued, " you know these animals 
do not generally live in the water in their bare skins.” 

L i6i 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


I know that, Ollie,” replied the youngster; they 
live in shells. I remember once trying to get an oyster 
out of its shell with my fingers, for I like to eat oysters, 
but he held his two shells together so tight that I 
couldn’t open them, so I had to go to Hiram, who 
opened them with a knife.” 

When the doctor heard of the Whimples, Harding, 
and Pleasanton Company he was much tickled, and 
began talking to the boys about mollusks. We shall 
not attempt to give here exactly how, or when, or 
where he gave this information. But in one way or 
another, at different times and places, a little here 
and a little there, the boys became acquainted with 
the following facts concerning this great division of 
animal life. 

Mollusks are animals with soft bodies that are en- 
tirely devoid of the backbone found in vertebrates, to 
which the different portions of the body of the animal 
are attached. That on the contrary, the bodies of mol- 
lusks are placed inside a soft elastic skin called the 
mantle, a name derived from the fact that it does not 
closely fit the body, but hangs in loose folds, not un- 
like the mantles or cloaks worn by people. 

In order to protect itself from the attacks of ene- 
mies the mollusk is generally provided with a hard 
limey covering or shell, secreted by the mantle from 
the waters of the ocean. The shape of the shells varies 
with different species. In all cases, however, there is 
first secreted a horny substance, built or deposited 
around the body of the mollusks by the mantle. This 
162 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


substance is subsequently coated with hard limestone, 
secreted from the waters of the ocean. 

While many mollusks are so firmly fixed to the rocks 
at the bottom of the body of water in which they live 
that they are obliged to remain in one position all 
their lives, yet some species are able to move from place 
to place. This motion is made possible by portions of 
the mantle serving as feet to carry them slowly from 
one place to another. In some cases a development of 
the mantle acts as sails, by means of which, as in the 
case of both the argonaut or the nautilus, as will be 
described in a subsequent chapter, when the animal 
rises to the surface of the water and floats on it, it is 
sometimes carried by the wind like a vessel or boat. 
Still other mollusks, as in the case of the devil-fish, are 
provided with long arms or tentacles by means of 
which they can make fairly rapid motion through the 
water. 

In most cases motion is practically absent, so that the 
animals are obliged to have their food brought to them 
by ordinary currents of water. Generally, however, 
these currents are set up by cilia or arms that strike 
against the water and make it enter their shells in a 
manner not unlike that in which a sea-anemone causes 
currents of water to enter its mouth by the rapid 
motion of its tentacles. 

Many years ago, when but little was known of the 
peculiarities of mollusks, they were divided into classes 
according to the number of their shells. These classes 
are: 

163 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Univalve Mollusks, or those provided with a single 
shell. 

Bivalve Mollusks, or those provided with two shells, 
and 

Multivalve Mollusks, or those provided with more 
than two shells. 

Now, however, that mollusks have been more care- 
fully studied, it has been found that a much better 
way of classifying them is by means of the bodies of 
the animals rather than their shells. In this way mol- 
lusks can be divided into two great classes: 

Acephalous Mollusks, or those that have no heads, 
and 

Cephalous Mollusks, or those provided with heads. 

Of these two classes, the acephalous or headless mol- 
lusks are the simplest. This class, however, includes a 
great variety of animals, many of which are of con- 
siderable value to man. 

The acephalous or headless mollusks are sometimes 
entirely devoid of shells, though most of them have 
their bodies protected in this manner. 

The cephalous mollusks are divided into three gen- 
eral classes ; i. e. : 

“ The Belly-Footed Mollusks, or the Gasteropoda, 
that are provided with a muscular foot formed by a 
projection of the mantle on the under side of the mol- 
lusk, or the side that corresponds to the animal’s belly. 
It is by means of this foot that it can slowly move from 
place to place. 

The Wing-Footed Mollusks, called by scientific men 
.164 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the Pteropoda. In these mollusks, a winglike expan- 
sion of the mantle may take the place of sails, as in 
the case of the winged nautilus or argonaut before re- 
ferred to. 

The Head-Footed Mollusk, or the Cephalopoda^ or 
those that are provided with feet arranged around a 
head, as in the case of the cuttle-fish. These are the 
most highly developed of the mollusks. 

It will only be possible to describe some of the more 
interesting of the above. 

The acephalous or headless mollusks can be divided 
into two general classes ; i. e. : 

Mollusks without Shells, or those whose bodies are 
encased in a leathery coating, and 

Mollusks with Shells, or those whose bodies are 
protected by a limey covering. 

The shell-less and headless mollusks are found adher- 
ing to the sides of algae or seaweeds, to the shells of 
larger mollusks, or to the rocks. They are not pro- 
vided with hands or feet with which they can take hold 
of their food. By the movement of cilia, however, they 
are able to cause the water to pass through their bodies 
and thus bring food to them. 

The headless mollusks with shells include a great 
variety of animals that are known as bivalves, or two- 
shelled animals. In these cases the two shells are 
joined together by a number of tough fibrous threads 
that act as a hinge, the animal possessing the power to 
pull the shells together with such force that it requires 
considerable effort to separate them. Indeed, when a 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


bivalve has once closed its shell it is safe from the at- 
tacks of all its enemies, except those provided with 
mandibles or claws, or with teeth strong enough to 
crush or pierce the shells. 

It is interesting to note here that at the advice of 
the doctor the boys observed as far as they could the 
habits of the mollusks whose shells they afterward 
placed in their collection. At first they were puzzled 
to understand how hard and rigid the mollusks of this 
class were capable of making the otherwise soft and 
elastic portion of the mantle on which it walks. But 
like many other things in science that appear difficult 
at first sight, this became quite simple when the doctor 
explained that when the mollusk wished to harden this 
portion of the soft spongy tissues of its body it em- 
ploys as a foot, it had only to fill the pores with water 
and thus cause it to become stiffened. That when it 
wished to withdraw this foot into its shell, as of 
course it would on the approach of an enemy, it was 
only necessary forcibly to expel the water when it 
would return to its limp condition. 

The doctor encouraged the boys to observe the liv- 
ing motions of mollusks. Indeed, this was another use 
of the water-glass referred to in the preceding chapter. 
It is not surprising, therefore, since they were bright 
boys, and were studying mollusks under the favorable 
conditions that existed in the quiet waters of the la- 
goons of Harding Island, that they made a number of 
original observations, at least original to them, al- 
though well known to scientific men. 

i66 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


For example, they discovered that some mollusks 
are able to escape from their enemies by jumping, 
something like grasshoppers. They do this by open- 
ing the two shells and then as quickly closing them, 
when the water escaping from one end would by its re-^ 
action cause the shells to jump through the water. On 
several occasions they saw a bivalve mollusk darting 
through the water and thus escaping the attack of an 
enemy. 

Another thing the boys discovered when they began 
to collect living mollusks was that many of these 
animals, especially the bivalve mollusks, produce a 
brownish or golden-yellow material, closely resembling 
silk, by which they attach themselves firmly to the 
rocks. This material consists of a great number of 
exceedingly thin, silklike fibers, spun by the animal in 
a manner not unlike that of the threads of silk pro- 
duced by silkworms. Indeed, some varieties produce 
sufficiently long and delicate fibers of this character to 
permit them to be woven into a fabric rivaling in 
beauty and texture the silk produced by the silkworm. 

Bivalve mollusks produce shells that, varying in size 
from those so small that they can only be distinctly 
seen by the use of a microscope to those that in the 
case of the tridachna, represented in the drawing on 
the next page, are more than three feet in length, big 
enough, as Otoa declared, to take a bath in, but we 
rather think he meant big enough to take a good 
wash. 

The tridachna shells are lined on the inside with a 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


beautiful coating of mother-of-pearl. It can, there- 
fore, be understood that one of these shells could 
readily be employed in churches for holding the holy 



Shells of the Tridachna 


water that is placed at the entrance of Roman Catholic 
churches. 

It is among the headless bivalves that the teredos, 
or boring mollusks, so greatly feared by the ship- 
168 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


masters, are to be found. These animals have the 
dangerous habit of laying their eggs in long galleries 
they bore in timbers exposed to the sea-water, such 
as those of wharves or of the protecting walls of 
seawalls, and especially in the timbers of a ship. The 
teredos are able to bore long galleries, extending in all 
directions, through a log of wood without showing 
their presence except at the place of entrance. The 
eggs rapidly hatch and the animals live in these tun- 
nelings, extending them to make room for their in- 
crease in numbers. In this way the timbers become 
weakened and are apt to break at any moment, thus 
either wrecking the ship, causing the wharf to crum- 
ble and fall, or permitting the sea to overflow the land. 

It was by the means of such borings by teredos in the 
timbers of some of the seawalls in Holland, during the 
years 1731 and 1732, that great damage was occa- 
sioned by the breaking down of these dykes. 

But besides boring mollusks that make galleries in 
wood in which to deposit their eggs, there are others 
capable of boring in the sand or even in hard rock. 
A variety of bivalves, known as the razor shell, that 
takes its name from the separate shells that are long 
and flat, thus somewhat resembling a razor, possess the 
power of so rapidly burying themselves in hard sand, 
that in a short time the animal can provide for itself a 
hiding-place that varies in depth from twelve to fifteen 
inches. Another variety of bivalve mollusks, known 
as the pholas, possesses the power of boring holes in 
the hardest rock. 


169 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XV 

Continued Operations of the Company 

The news of the formation of The Whimples, Hard- 
ing and Pleasanton Company spread rapidly through 
the school, and even came to the ears of the rest of the 
people on Harding Island. For the greater part the 
Polynesian boys looked on it as a joke. The captain, 
however, was much pleased with the movement. 

It’s a splendid idea. Parsons,” he said to the doc- 
tor. It will interest the boys in a direction in which 
as yet they have done but little work. I don’t know 
why it is that so little attention has been given to the 
teaching of conchology in the schools, or even to pro- 
vide suitable reading in this subject for the general 
public. It is certainly not because it is lacking in in- 
terest; for it is capable of being made extremely in- 
teresting.” 

That’s true,” was the reply. I am sure it can 
be made interesting to the boys, especially here where 
the study of the peculiarities and habits of mollusks 
can be so easily made.” 

“We must try to help them as much as we can. 
Parsons,” said the captain. 

“ I have already told them much about the habits 
of mollusks,” replied the doctor ; “ and what is more to 
170 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the point, I have set them at work observing. It was 
only the other day that Harold, who is an intelligent 
little observer, came to me with what to him was a 
great discovery. He had seen a bivalve mollusk suc- 
cessfully eluding the attack of an enemy by making 
jumps through the water, and had correctly reasoned 
out the cause of the movement. ’’ 

Parsons,” said the captain, “ I think I will set 
aside one of the rooms formerly occupied by the boys 
before they went over to the school dormitories for a 
conchological museum.” 

Do it by all means,” replied the doctor. It will 
not only greatly please the boys, but will also give 
us the opportunity of examining the collection so as 
to check the correctness of the names they give their 
specimens.” 

When the captain informed the boys that a room had 
been assigned for their museum, Charley at once pro- 
ceeded to mark in large printed letters over the door- 
way : 

^‘MUSEUM OF THE WHIMPLES, HARDING 
AND PLEASANTON COMPANY” 

The large and well-printed letters possessed great 
fascination for Hiram. It happened that he first saw 
them when he thought he was entirely alone, but 
Charley, who was in the next room, heard him speak- 
ing to himself as follows : 

I reckon thet’s a great company. Them letters be 
171 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


jist ez large and beautiful ez a-many I hev seed in 
London and Australey. Our boys be sartinly great 
boys, especially Mr. Charley. Wouldn't Hiram Hig- 
genbotham be proud ef he could be let into thet com- 
pany! I would make bold to ax to be taken in ef I 
thought Mr. Charley wouldn’t laugh at me.” 

What’s that, Hiram? ” said Charley, showing him- 
self ; for he did not like to appear to be playing the part 
of an eavesdropper. ‘‘ What is that you would like 
to say to me ? Say it right out. Even if I should laugh 
at you, you may be sure it would be a good-natured 
laugh such as you need not be ashamed of.” 

I be sartin of that, Mr. Charley,” said Hiram. 

Wall, I wanted to ax ye about this here company. 
Would ye be willing to let Hiram Higgenbotham be 
one of the company whose name ye have written so 
beautifully and bold above the door? ” 

But what can you do, Hiram? ” inquired Charley, 
with that grave look on his face he was so able to as- 
sume when he wished. ‘‘ Are you up on conchological 
peculiarities? Could you collect molluscan specimens 
for the museum? ” 

I beant much upon them long words what I kaint 
pronounce,” he said. “ I reckon they mean something 
about shells. I could collect some of them for ye with 
the tongs I made for taking the pearl-oysters out of 
the lagoon. But listen to me. What Hiram Higgen- 
botham kin do is to make shelves and cases he will 
put around the walls of this here room for to hold them 
specimens.” 


172 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


I see,” said Charley, you would be a very valua- 
ble member of the company. I think I can promise that 
we will not only take you into it, but will also appoint 
you curator of the museum.” 

‘‘ What be the meaning of thet ere word, Mr. 
Charley ? ” inquired Hiram, all the more pleased with 
it because he did not know its meaning. 

“ A curator,” said Charley, “ is a kind of scientific 
caretaker; one who sees that the specimens are kept 
in good condition and are not taken from the room 
without permission.” 

“ Thet position would suit Hiram Higgenbotham ex- 
actly,” was the reply. 

Shortly after this, Charley finding that there was no 
objection among the other members of the firm to 
Hiram’s request, took the first opportunity when Hi- 
ram was not around to paint directly under the 
names over the door, Hiram’s name as well as his of- 
ficial position. The sign then read: 

‘‘MUSEUM OF THE WHIMPLES, HARDING 
AND PLEASANTON COMPANY 
HIRAM HIGGENBOTHAM, CURATOR” 

When he was shown the new inscription over the 
door by Charley, Hiram was delighted, and turning 
to the lad with a broad grin, he said : 

“ I be wery much obleeged to ye, Mr. Charley, and 
the other boys for my ’lection. It’s great to be one of 
the company, but to be ” and then Hiram hesitated 


173 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


at the word curator, which evidently bothered him; 
“ but to be thet there thing,” he said, pointing to the 
word, “sartainly makes Hiram Higgenbotham feel 
proud like.” 

“ To be what thing ? ” inquired Charley. 

“ Why that,” said Hiram, in a dignified tone, point' 
ing to the word curator. What’s the use of my pro- 
nouncing it ef ye know wot I mean.” 

His admission to the company and election to the 
important office of curator pleased Hiram so much, 
that before long he had Mrs. Higgenbotham inspecting 
the glory of the printed sign. 

‘‘ I allow it makes me feel wery proud, Mandy, to 
think thet I am thet thing,” pointing to the word 
curator. 

I haint surprised, ’Iram,” was the reply. “ It 
horter make you proud.” 

Mr. Clarkson took considerable interest in this 
movement of the boys. Talking the matter over with 
the captain and the doctor, he suggested that it would 
be a good plan to excite general interest among the 
boys of the school in the collection and observation of 
mollusks by permitting the members of the company 
to give, during school hours, talks about some of the 
more interesting things concerning the shells, as well as 
the mollusks that live in them. 

When Harold, Oliver, and Charley heard of the 
plans they were very enthusiastic, and at once got to 
work collecting all the interesting information they 
could concerning different kinds of mollusks. Even 

174 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Frank, when he understood what the other members of 
the company were doing, gravely remarked: 

“ Frank will make a talk too. He will ask Mr. 
Hiram, Mr. Waheatoua, and Mr. Kapiau to tell him 
something about shells.” 

Since these addresses were to be made by the boys of 
the school, they were highly thought of by all the 
others ; for they liked to think that if these boys could 
get up and talk before the school, they ought to be able 
to do the same, and that perhaps sometimes they would 
have the opportunity for so doing. Nor was this feel- 
ing limited to the white boys; for Kooloo, Otoa, and 
the son of Waheatoua gravely discussed with one 
another as to whether it was not probable, if they asked 
permission, they also might not eventually be permitted 
to make brief talks. 

In the meanwhile, however, all the boys began a se- 
ries of wonderful observations and collections, so that 
specimens were brought to the school in various condi- 
tions of preservation. These the curator set promptly 
to work to prepare and get ready for placing in the 
museum. 

When Hiram had completed the shelves and cases, 
by the help of the doctor and the captain, they printed 
over the tops of the same the names of the different 
classes into which they concluded to arrange their 
specimens. By the doctor's advice both classifications 
were used ; i. e., that based on the shape and number of 
the shells, or the univalves, the bivalves, and multi- 
valves; and that based on the peculiarities of the mol- 

175 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


lusks that lived in the shells, or the headless or 
acephalous mollusks, and the headed or cephalous 
mollusks, these being divided into sub-classes to which 
reference will afterward be made. 

The method they adopted possessed the advantage 
of requiring no little study on the reception of each" 
specimen, so as to determine the proper shelf on which 
to place it. Since the shells were collected while the 
animals were still in them, the boys were careful, be- 
fore preparing them for the museum, to study the 
peculiarities of the bodies of the mollusks so as to en- 
able them properly to classify them. The doctor was 
always ready to give the boys their proper names, but 
not until from a careful reading of the books of the 
library they got as near to the correct names as possi- 
ble ; then if wrong he would correct them. 

The first address to the school was made by Harold, 
who had chosen oysters as his subject. Like the other 
boys, he at once began obtaining information from the 
doctor, the captain, Waheatoua, Kapiau, Hiram, as 
well as from the books of the library. He had no diffi- 
culty in getting information of a character that greatly 
interested his auditors, especially the Polynesian boys, 
who, while not disposed to care for natural objects so 
much from the standpoint of beauty or of scientific 
classification, were greatly interested in oysters as be- 
ing something good to eat. 

Harold plunged at once into his subject with the 
statement that an oyster is a curious animal, its 
stomach being placed inside its liver, its mouth on its 
176 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


stomach and intestines, and the opening of its intes- 
tines on its back. 

This remarkable statement caused a laugh. Har- 
old, who was a quick-tempered lad, got provoked and 
said: 

“ I know that is right. I have taken this description 
almost word for word from one of the books in the 
library, called the ‘ World of the Sea,’ by Tandon. 
However,” he added, m better humor, “ I thought you 
would kick on this description, so I have asked Mr. 
Higgenbotham, the curator of our museum, to open 
several large oysters and bring them to me on a plate.” 

Here they be, Mr. Harold,” said the curator, 
proudly placing them on a desk before the speaker. 

‘‘ I have also asked the doctor to show you from 
these oysters that the stomach, intestines, and other 
parts of the oyster are placed as I have said.” 

Placing one of the largest of the oysters on a sepa- 
rate plate, where all the boys could see it, the doctor 
showed them that the skin or mantle that covered the 
whole body of the animal, was much larger than the 
animal itself, so that it was folded or plaited in places. 
The upper part of the mantle is attached to the shells 
near the hinges that hold the two shells together. The 
edges of the mantle are deeply tucked or folded, and 
provided with a fringe of cilia. The folds of the man- 
tle at the front of the oysters have at their juncture 
four irregular triangular plates, close together, that 
surround an opening that forms the mouth of the 
animal. These plates form the tentacles of the oyster. 
M 177 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


They select its food and transfer it into the mouth, 
which organ is capable of being made larger, and is 
situated directly over the stomach. 

The food of the oyster enters the mouth and 
passes into the stomach of the animal, the oyster be- 
ing able, like the sea-anemone, to cause currents of 
water to flow into its mouth by means of its cilia. 

From the end of the stomach, opposite the mouth, 
a long and thin intestine passes. The stomach and in- 
testine are surrounded on all sides by the liver, which 
is the dark or black portion of the oyster. When the 
oyster is not in good health the liver is filled with a 
yellow liquid that forms the bile. 

You see, therefore,’' said the doctor, “ that Harold 
was quite correct in saying that oysters have their 
stomachs and intestines placed in the liver, and the 
mouth on the stomach.” 

Harold then continued his remarks on the oyster. 

“ I am sure you will be surprised,” he said, ‘‘ at the 
great number of eggs an ordinary oyster is capable of 
producing. All I can tell you is that this number is 
very great. I guess scientific men are not certain just 
how many eggs one oyster can produce. One man says 
it is one hundred thousand (100,000). Another says 
it is two hundred thousand (200,000). Another man 
says it is ten millions (10,000,000). Now,” he con- 
tinued, ‘‘ suppose we put the number of eggs a single 
oyster can produce at a smaller number, say only two 

millions (2,000,000). Then ” 

But here the speaker was again interrupted by a 
178 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


laugh, especially from the brown boys; for Harold 
now knew enough of the Polynesian language to make 
it clear to them how great were these figures of which 
he was speaking. It was clear that they were unwill- 
ing to believe for a moment that it was possible for 
one oyster to produce such a prodigious number of 
eggs. As to David he openly laughed, and said to 
Harold : 

Oh, come, Harding, don’t try to queer us in that 
manner. You don’t expect us to believe such a fairy 
story, do you ? ” 

I don’t care whether you believe it or not,” ex- 
claimed Harold. Here is the statement I have just 
made,” reading to the class a short quotation from 
Tandon’s book before referred to. He then turned to 
the doctor, and said: Doctor, am I not right? ” 

And the doctor assuring the boys that he was correct 
in this statement, Harold continued his address : 

The eggs of the oyster are not deposited and 
hatched outside the body of the animal, as is the case 
of many other animals of the sea, but stay in the mouth 
in the folds of its mantle until hatched. During this 
time they are surrounded by a quantity of mucous 
matter on which they feed while young. 

“ When the eggs are hatched they are thrown out of 
the mouth in the shape of a very fine dust. This, how- 
ever, is living dust; for it consists of a very great 
number of exceedingly small oysters — so small, indeed, 
that they can only be seen when examined by a micro- 
scope. Minute as they are, these oysters are furnished 
179 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


with a complete shell. In this condition, since the 
young oyster is provided with vibratory frills, it can 
swim or move about through the waters. For quite 
a while the young oysters remain in the neighborhood 
of their mother. When frightened they rapidly seek 
the protection of their mother’s mouth, hiding in the 
folds of the mantle. 

“ This living dust is called oyster spat. If it settles 
in water where there is a good, hard, clean bottom the 
young animals attach themselves to the bottom, and 
from that time on are never again able to leave it. 
They then grow rapidly, and in about three years are 
big enough to be taken to the market and eaten. 

Oysters,” continued Harold, “ are now regularly 
raised in what are called oyster parks or artificial 
oyster banks. A part of the ocean is selected where the 
water is of the right depth and a good, hard bottom 
formed by throwing in bits of rock, pieces of broken 
earthenware, or any other hard objects, to which the 
young oysters can fix themselves. Then a number of 
oysters, that still have in their mantles the animals that 
are about hatched, are thrown into this part of the 
ocean, when the little oysters soon attach themselves 
and begin growing.” 

At this moment one of the boys said to Harold : 

“ Can we ask questions, Harold ? ” 

“ Certainly,” said Harold ; “ only I don’t promise 
to answer them. I will do the best I can, and if they 
are too hard for me, then I will ask the doctor or the 
captain to answer them.” 

i8o 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ Well, then,” inquired the boys, if there are so 
many eggs in a single oyster, why does not the part of 
the ocean near an oyster bank soon become filled with 
them ? ” 

I can answer that question all right,” replied Har- 
old. “ I thought some of you would ask it. At the 
time of the year the eggs are hatched, and the waters 
over an oyster bank are filled with multitudes of mi- 
nute oysters swimming near their mothers, many ani- 
mals that are very fond of baby oysters come and eat 
great numbers of them. Then again, although these 
little oysters can swim, yet very often strong currents 
of water carry them away into very deep water where 
they die. It is only a few, therefore, that continue 
living.” 

There was one peculiarity about oysters that seemed 
strongly to appeal to Harold, who, like most healthy, 
growing boys, had an excellent appetite. He, there- 
fore, seemed especially pleased to call attention to the 
fact that the oyster not only possesses a pleasant taste, 
but was easily digested ; for this reason it was possible 
for a person to eat a great number without being made 
sick. He then told about something he had read in a 
book about a man who was able to eat as many as forty 
dozen without any ill effect. 

What a pig that fellow must have been,” whis- 
pered Charley to Oliver, who was seated next to him. 

As the doctor afterward told the boys, while oys- 
ters were pleasant to eat and were readily digested, 
they are not very nourishing food, since they contain 
i8i 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


such small quantities of the nitrogen necessary for the 
production of the fleshy tissues of the body, so that if 
one lived entirely on oysters it would be necessary to 
eat large quantities. 

Harold was followed by Oliver, who had selected 
edible mussels for his talk. Like oysters, mussels are 
headless, bivalve mollusks. Unlike oysters, however, 
mussels are attached to the rocks or other solid bodies 
in the water not by means of limestone, but by means 
of the byssus or silk threads referred to in a previous 
chapter. 

Oliver greatly interested the boys by a description of 
the manner in which the edible mussel attaches itself 
to the rocks by means of the byssus. 

Although they are not such delicious food as oysters, 
yet mussels are highly esteemed by many people, and 
are eaten either raw or cooked. There are certain sea- 
sons of the year when the mussels are not only un- 
wholesome as food, but are even poisonous ; but just by 
what this is caused is unknown, though it is probably 
the character of the food the animal eats at this sea- 
son of the year. Our space will not permit a full de- 
scription of Oliver’s address. There was one point, 
however, mentioned that appeared to especially interest 
his hearers, and that was that mussels, like oysters, are 
now cultivated. The story of the discovery which led 
to this cultivation he told as follows : 

“ It seems that during the year 1235, three Irish- 
men were shipwrecked on the coast of France in the 
creek of Aiguillon, in the neighborhood of Rochelle. 

182 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The shore lands here consist of a great extent of al- 
most interminable mud flats. One of these men, named 
Walton, who was an ingenious fellow, succeeded in ob- 
taining food for himself and companions by driving 
posts in the soft mud and weaving between them the 
branches of trees somewhat after the form of huge 
baskets or nets. In this manner he succeeded in catch- 
ing a number of sea-fowls that were plentiful on that 
coast. 

Now Walton observed that in certain places where 
the posts were partly invaded by water during high 
tide they soon became covered with mussels that at- 
tached themselves to them. He noticed also that the 
mussels which were sufficiently high on the post to be 
protected from the mud, not only increased rapidly in 
size, but had a much better taste than those that were 
covered occasionally by the mud. Taking this hint he 
thought of a plan for raising mussels, a plan it may be 
remarked that was so successful that it is now employed 
to a very great extent in what are known as mussel 
parks. 

In mussel parks, built according to Walton’s plans, 
long lines of posts are driven vertically in the soft mud 
so as to project many feet above the water, and to ex- 
tend for great distances from the shore out into the 
shallow waters. The lines of posts converged or came 
together on the ends near the sea, being farther apart 
on the ends nearest the land. These posts had inter- 
woven between them branches of trees, and served as 
the points of attachment for the young animals that 

183 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


were placed on them at the proper seasons of the year.” 
(See Appendix F, Mussel Cultivation.) 

Oliver also made some remarks concerning clams, 
another variety of headless bivalve mollusk. The space, 
however, is too limited to permit any further descrip- 
tion. 


184 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XVI 

Charley's Talk on Mollusks 

Charley's talk followed Oliver’s, but before describ- 
ing it we must give a short description of some of the 
peculiarities of the important class of mollusks known 
as the cephalopods or headed mollusks. 

Like the acephalopods or headless mollusks, the 
headed mollusks are either destitute of hard shells for 
the protection of their bodies, or like the bivalves are 
provided with shells of limestone. There are three 
classes of mollusks with heads. The gasteropods, or 
the belly-footed mollusks, or those provided with feet 
or tentacles attached to the lower sides of their bodies ; 
the pteropods, or wing-footed mollusks, or those pro- 
vided with winglike feet formed by a prolongation of 
the mantle; and the cephalopods, or head-footed mol- 
lusks, or those provided with feet or tentacles arranged 
around the head of the animal. 

Since the naked or shell-less headed mollusks have 
no covering, their heads can be easily seen, and this the 
more since the head is furnished with long feelers or 
antennae, by means of which the animal becomes ac- 
quainted with external objects by the sense of touch. 
These mollusks are provided with a pair of watery 
eyes, and, in addition, there are generally a number of 

185 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


tentacles or feathery projections surrounding the 
mouth. 

There are many kinds of headed mollusks. One of 
the most interesting is known as the sea-hare. This 
animal takes its name from its long neck and hollow 
projecting harelike ears. It lives either among the 
algae or the other plants of the sea. 

The headed mollusks whose bodies are covered by 
shells have generally a single shell only, and are there- 
fore known as univalves. In some cases the mouth of 
the shell can be tightly shut by means of a piece of hard 
material generally known as the operculum or door. It 
must not be supposed that this door is an additional 
valve or shell. If it was, these mollusks would not be 
univalves or single-shelled, but bivalves, an entirely dif- 
ferent kind of mollusk. 

The doctor informed the boys that the shells of most 
univalve mollusks have a spiral shape; that is, are 
twisted like a corkscrew; and that, moreover, in most 
cases, the direction of this twist is from right to left. 
In some rare instances the shells are twisted in the 
opposite direction ; such shells he said are highly prized 
by collectors on account of their rarity. 

There are many belly-footed or gasteropodous uni- 
valve mollusks, the shells of which are especially beauti- 
ful, since they are covered with markings of various 
colors and shapes. 

In the pteropoda, or wing-footed mollusks, the ani- 
mals are provided with two membranous feet, or 
wings, placed on each side of the head. These are em- 

i86 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


ployed not only for the movement of the animal 
through the water, but also for breathing. By throw- 
ing out water some of these animals become sufficiently 
light to rise to the surface. Sometimes too, when the 
wings are caught by the wind they are carried rapidly 
over the surface of the water. When alarmed, how- 
ever, most of these animals can take in water, when 
they rapidly sink. 

In the head-footed mollusks a number of feet or 
tentacles branch out around the head of the animal. 
Head-footed mollusks are divided into three different 
classes : 

Cuttlefish^ or those provided with eight arms that 
extend down on each side of the body, and two longer 
arms or tentacles. Each arm has four rows of suckers. 
These mollusks have a soft bone running down each 
side of the sac. 

Calmars or Squids, or those provided with two dis- 
tinct bones attached to the upper part of the body, and 

Poidpes, that have no bones. 

But I must now tell you something about Charley’s 
talk on mollusks. Charley was beyond doubt the most 
generally liked boy in the Harding School, and indeed, 
for that matter, on the island. He had such a jolly 
way about him that the boys always liked to be in his 
company. It was a common expression among them 
when they saw him coming : 

Here comes Charley. Now we’ll have some fun.” 

This belief was based on ample experience; for 
Charley was a brainy fellow, and was constantly in- 

187 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


venting games or proposing something to do that 
possessed the great charm of novelty. 

It was among the brown lads that Charley was es- 
pecially liked, we might almost say revered ; for, 
while with Harold on the Island of Captivity, he had 
been able to do so many things that the Polynesians re- 
garded as magic, that he was known as the “ Great 
White Priest.” Indeed, he had so impressed both 
Mahinee, the king of the island, and the priest of their 
Plouse of Idols, as possessing supernatural powers, 
that he was declared by them to be “ taboo-taboo,” 
meaning something especially sacred, who was not 
to be touched thoughtlessly by ordinary mortals. 

As Charley began to talk he had in one hand the 
two shells of an oyster, and in the other a univalve shell 
of a mollusk known as a cone, that he had obtained 
from the museum. 

You all know,” he said, referring to one hand, 
the appearance of the oyster that lives in these two 
shells, but the mollusk that lived in this shell, presented 
to the museum by our curator, possibly some of you 
have never seen. This animal is called a cone because 
of the shape of its shell. Since these mollusks have 
heads they also have, as you might suppose, what gen- 
erally goes with heads, namely, brains ; or at least,” he 
added, something that takes the place of brains. It is 
very funny, however, that their brains are not placed 
in their heads, but on their necks in the shape of a loose 
ring. What is queer about these rings, is that the 
animal can move them forward or backward as it 
1 88 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


wishes. Sometimes the brain is pushed nearly into the 
head; at other times it is drawn into the body. 

Imagine,” continued Charley, “ how great an ad- 
vantage it might be for an animal to be able to move 
its brain away from its head. Suppose it thought an 
enemy was about to cut off its head, it could thus save 
its brain by pulling it down into its body. Indeed,” 
he added, “ I have read that some kinds of snails can 
live for some time after their heads have been cut off 
if they have only been quick enough to move their 
brains out of the way. 

Having a brain,” continued Charley, it is natural 
to suppose that these mollusks should also possess the 
sensations common to animals with brains, and this is 
correct, for these mollusks can smell, hear, and see. 
They also have the sense of touch; for they possess 
whiskers like a cat and, strange to say, their eyes 
are often placed at the end of these whiskers. I don’t 
mean,” said Charley laughing, “ to say that scientific 
men actually give the name whiskers to the organs in 
which the sensation of touch is found and on the ends 
of which the eyes are placed. They call them anten- 
nae, feelers, or tentacles. 

Single-shelled mollusks,” continued Charley, 
“ have very funny ears that are placed at the bottom of 
their necks. I call their ears funny because they have 
no opening that can be seen to let the sound in. These 
ears consist of closed bags with sides so transparent 
that one can look through them. These sacks are 
filled with a thin liquid in which a number of very small 
189 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


stones are suspended. You may get some idea how 
small these stones are when I tell you that in some 
species, although the sacs forming the ears are not 
quite the one five-hundredth of an inch across, yet they 
contain from fifty to sixty stones. The sound waves, 
or tremblings in the air, striking against the bag, 
shake it, causing the little stones to move to and fro, 
so that the animal hears. 

Headed mollusks produce eggs that are either de- 
posited one by one, or in piles of various shapes. The 
eggs have different shapes and colors, being of nearly 
all the colors of the rainbow with the exception of the 
blues.” 

Charley now put on one of his serio-comic faces, 
and the boys knew from experience that something 
funny was coming. 

I have not forgotten how you laughed a little while 
ago when Harold spoke about the great number of 
eggs a single oyster is able to lay. Now, for the sake 
of truth, I am obliged, although reluctantly, to tell you 
that the least number of eggs I am willing to assert 
is laid by these mollusks is one million (1,000,000), 
while in point of fact I ought perhaps to put it at a 
higher number.” And when the boys began laughing, 
he continued : I can’t help your laughing, but this 
laughing will not decrease even by a single egg the 
total number actually laid by this remarkable mollusk. 

“ But now, coming back to my subject, I wish you to 
look at this headed mollusk that is provided with wing- 
like feet or wings, and is therefore known as a ptero- 
190 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


pod. The shell is of a beautiful violet color, and for 
this reason this mollusk is called the violet snail. The 
animal has a white spongy mass, called the raft, sus- 
pended from it consisting of a material that somewhat 
resembles soapsuds. This material is very light and 
acts as a float, that enables the animal when it has 
lightened its body by the expulsion of water to float on 
the surface. This mollusk has no door or operculum 
like many other shells of its species, but can to some ex- 
tent use this float for a kind of door. The little bags 
or sacs suspended from the lower part of the raft are 
eggs. When the animal becomes alarmed it throws 
out from its body a bluish-red liquid that possesses the 
power of staining paper, and has been employed as an 
ink. 

‘‘ Univalve mollusks attach themselves to marine 
plants or rocks, to which they can cling with great 
strength. Unlike oysters, that when once attached to 
the bottom must continue in such positions for the 
remainder of their lives, the univalve mollusk can 
loosen its hold and can walk slowly, or perhaps more 
correctly, can crawl on its bellylike foot; for the uni- 
valve mollusk is belly-foted, or a gasteropod. Here,” 
he continued, ‘‘ is a shell from each of these animals, 
I have taken from our collection, as you can see the 
belly-shaped foot on which the animals can walk as 
well as a part of their heads that are furnished with 
antennae. 

I heard Oliver tell you the other day about the 
beautiful silk fabric that can be spun from the threads 
191 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


some of these mollusks employ for fastening them- 
selves to the rocks. I want to tell you to-day that some 
mollusks are capable of producing a most beautiful 
purple dyestuff, that can be used for dyeing fabrics, 
and I suppose that the mollusk’s silk fabric could be 
easily dyed by the mollusk dye. Such dyestuff is ob- 
tained from the animals that live in these univalve 
shells,” he said, showing them two specimens. “ They 
are known as the bloody-mouthed purpurea, and the 
murex.” (See Appendix G, “ Tyrian Purple.”) 

I have told you some little about belly-footed and 
wing-footed mollusks. There now remains the head- 
footed mollusks, or those that have feet or tentacles ar- 
ranged around the head. 

“ There are three kinds of these animals ; i. e., cuttle- 
fish, calmars, and poulpes. 

“ One day, when Harold and I were exploring a 
limestone grotto, in that portion of our island which is 
now occupied by the Harding Channel, we were at- 
tacked by a huge cuttlefish that caught me by the arms 
and Harold by his legs, and would have thrust us down 
its mouth into its horrid body had we not fortunately 
had in our hands a bayonet-lance and a spade almost 
as sharp as a razor, and been helped by Rompey. This 
animal was an awful-looking brute, with a long, 
rounded body. It had a great head and two large 
eyes, one on each side of the head. It had a horny 
beak, a huge mouth, around which eight huge arms 
with two additional longer arms were arranged. This 
animal could move all its arms very quickly. 

192 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ Generally these animals attach themselves to a 
rock on the bottom, and patiently wait until a fish 
or some other animal on which they live comes in the 
neighborhood, when the arms are at once thrown out, 
attaching themselves 
to it. Even if it is 
a fish, which as all of 
you know, has very 
slippery sides, it can 
hold tight to it while 
carrying it to its 
mouth; for the arms 
are furnished with 
suckerlike things that 
enable it to hold onto 
an object by the pres- 
sure of the atmos- 
phere. 

There are many 
different kinds of 
these mollusks,” he 
continued, ‘ ^ o n e is 
called a calmar or 
squid. This animal 
has two bones attached to the upper part of the 
body, and eight arms arranged around the mouth, as 
shown in the figure on this page. It has huge eyes on 
each side of its head. These eyes have an awful 
wicked appearance when they are turned and raised 
toward any animal that may have attacked it. 

N 193 



Calmar, or Squid 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The bones of the cuttlefish are light, soft, limey 
substance, called cuttlebone. These extend far down 
into the body stiffening it. Many of you may have 
seen a piece of cuttlebone placed inside the cage of a 
canary bird. The bird uses it in sharpening its bill. 
Indeed, this variety of limestone was at one time 
much employed as a polishing substance. 

“ I think,” continued Charley, “ all of you have seen 
me making pictures in India ink. Perhaps some of you 
may not know that this kind of ink is obtained from a 
cuttlefish. When the animal is attacked by an enemy 
from which it wishes to escape, it throws out from its 
body in the water a quantity of a black liquid 
that darkens the water, and thus permits it to escape. 
This black substance which consists of highly divided 
carbonacean matter is employed in the manufacture 
of India ink. 

Head-footed mollusks deposit their eggs before 
they are hatched on the stalks of algse or seaweeds. 
Waheatoua brought me this specimen of the eggs of 
these animals for the museum. The separate eggs 
closely resemble a bunch of grapes, and are called by 
the sailors sea-grapes. 

“ I think it more than likely that some of you have 
never heard of the animal known as the chameleon. 
It possesses the power of rapidly changing the color 
of its skin. Now,” he continued, “ some of the head- 
footed mollusks possess, and even to a greater extent, 
the power of changing the color of their skin from a 
whitish purple to a gray and then to a brown with 
194 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


great rapidity.” (See Appendix H, ‘‘ Change of Color 
of Squids.”) 

“ There are stories told by the ancients,” continued 
Charley, about huge calmars and poulpes. I will 
read you a few to show you what great fellows the 
ancients were for batting them out.” (See Appendix 
I, “ Calmars and Poulpes.”) 

Charley’s talk greatly interested the boys, for it 
contained not only interesting facts, but facts that were 
expressed in such language as would enable them 
readily to understand them. Instead of being jealous 
Harold was much pleased at his friend’s success, and 
called out : 

‘‘ That’s great, Charley. You’re certainly a wonder- 
ful fellow for such things.” 

That the rest of the boys agreed with Harold was 
evident from the hand-clapping that followed the close 
of Charley’s remarks. 

When Charley was through, Frank was called to the 
platform by the doctor, who said : 

“ The youngest member of the company has some- 
thing to tell you.” 

Holding up the shell of a chambered nautilus, Frank 
said : 

‘‘ Mr. Hiram gave me this beautiful shell which he 
says is called the nautilus. He told me that the animal 
that lives in these shells can use some of its arms as 
sails, and so be blown on the water by the wind. I 
don’t know how it can do this, but the doctor says he 
will tell you all about it.” 


195 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XVII 

Some Curiosities of Mollusks 

The boys did not fail a few days afterward to remind 
the doctor of his promise to Frank to tell them some- 
thing about the nautilus, the so-called animal ship. 

‘‘ The shell Frank showed you the other day,” said 
the doctor, “ is that of a head-walking mollusk. Only 
two species of these mollusks are provided with shells ; 
the nautilus or the mollusk whose shell you saw, and 
the argonaut. 

‘‘ As you can see,” the doctor continued, again show- 
ing them the shell Frank had exhibited, the shell of 
the nautilus is very thin. For this reason it is some- 
times called the paper nautilus. It is a beautiful shell, 
very smooth on the inside, which is coated with 
mother-of-pearl. The outside is marked with dark red- 
dish-yellow bands. 

“ But,” he continued, what is perhaps the most 
peculiar thing about this shell is that it is built in the 
shape of a number of spiral chambers that gradually 
increase in size. As the animal grows he builds cham- 
ber after chamber, always living in the one last formed, 
which is, of course, the largest. The chambers are 
completely shut off from one another by a wall of 
shell, but are conected by means of a tube that passes 
196 



The Chambered Nautilus” 

Page 197 




AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


through the walls of each near the center. The animal 
is able to fill these chambers with water and thus in- 
crease its weight when it wishes to sink, or it can 
throw out either all or a part of the water they con- 
tain. In this way it is able to float in water at any 
depth. 

“ The ancients,” continued the doctor, ‘‘ regarded 
the nautilus as one of their gods, and believed it was 
able to guide ships across the trackless deep. 

And now,” he said, “ to come to what the little 
laddie spoke about as to the animal being able to raise 
two of its arms to act as sails and so let the wind blow 
it over the water. There is no doubt that some of the 
head-footed mollusks, such as the nautilus, is able to 
hold two of its feet or arms up in the air so as to catch 
the wind, but that it possesses the power of employ- 
ing its other feet as oars, as has been asserted, or as 
rudders to steer it in any direction, must be regarded 
as very doubtful. 

There is, however,” continued the doctor, a 
means by which the chambered nautilus can move 
rapidly through the water other than by the wind. In 
order to explain this, I want you to examine this draw- 
ing in which the shell of the animal on the right-hand 
side is represented as being cut in two, so as to show 
the separate chambers. The walls between the succes- 
sive chambers are provided at their centers with open- 
ings that form what is called a siphuncle. When the 
animal wishes to move rapidly through the water it 
draws its arms together holding them in the position 
197 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


represented in the upper part of the drawing. Then 
filling all the chambers, it throws the water out in a 
powerful stream. The push caused by the escaping jet 
causes the animal to move in the opposite direction. 

A beautiful poem has been written by Dr. Oliver 
Wendell Holmes on the broken shell of a chambered 



Chambered Nautilus 


nautilus. I will read it. As you can see, the doctor 
draws a contrast between the polyp of the nautilus that 
builds for itself a dwelling-place of gradually increas- 
ing size, and the human soul, that, during its life on 
the earth, inhabits the house or body provided for 
it.” (See Appendix J, ‘‘Chambered Nautilus,” by 
Holmes. ) 


198 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


I am sure it will interest you,” continued the doc- 
tor, “ to know that the waters of the ocean during re- 
mote geological times contained great numbers of dif- 
ferent kinds of mollusks that generally resembled the 
nautilus. The close resemblance of the fossil shells of 



Chambered Nautilus (upper figure ready for moving through water) 


these animals to the horns on the image of Jupiter 
Ammon caused them to be known as ammonites.” 

** Doctor,” said Charley, asking permission to speak, 
‘‘ don’t you think those shells resemble a coiled snake 
with its head cut off more than the horns of a ram ? ” 
That’s not bad, Charley,” said the doctor laughing. 

They certainly do resemble snakes more closely than 
199 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


rams’ horns. Indeed, you will be interested when I tell 
you that such fossils are found in the rocks of Ire- 
land and Great Britain, and that it has been asserted 
that they are the snakes Saint Patrick had killed by 
chopping off their heads, and that they had died in 
agony while tightly coiled. 

“ And now,” continued the doctor, as he was in the 
habit of doing in order to induce the boys to think, 
are there any other questions you would like to ask. 
Well, Charley,” he said, seeing that the lad again 
wished to speak, what is it ? ” 

“ Doctor,” said Charley, “ in speaking of the cham- 
bered nautilus you spoke as if head-footed mollusks 
were sometimes in the habit of using these tentacles as 
feet on which to walk. Have any of these mollusks 
ever been seen using their tentacles in this manner? ” 
‘‘ It is not uncommon,” was the reply, ‘‘ for a ceph- 
alopod when left on the rocks uncovered by the 
waters at low tide, instead of attempting to drag itself 
to the water by its tentacles, practically to stand on its 
head and, using its arms as feet, wobble clumsily to it.” 

‘‘ I should think it would be easier for the animal to 
pull itself along by its long tentacles ? ” remarked 
Harold. 

Its body is too soft, Harold,” was the reply. “ A 
full-grown squid would weigh so much that if it at- 
tempted to drag itself over the rocks it would probably 
scrape off large portions of its body. 

I can tell you a story,” continued the doctor, of 
how one of these animals, the rock squid, that had been 
200 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


left high and dry by the ebbing of the tide while walk- 
ing on its feet with its head downward toward the 
ocean, was seen by a naturalist who had been collecting 
shells at low tide. Thinking to stop the horrible-look- 
ing animal from reaching the water he tried to move 
it with his foot, and even laid hold of it with one of his 
hands. To his great surprise the creature became 
angry and, making a jump, fastened some of its tenta- 
cles around his bare arm; for he had rolled up his 
shirt-sleeves the better to get shells by inserting his 
hands in the crevices of the rocks. If any of you would 
like to read more about this matter you may come 
sometime to the library and I will loan you the book.” 
(See Appendix K, The Rock Squid.”) 

‘‘ Doctor,” inquired Harold, “ Charley said the other 
day that the tentacles, or what he called the whiskers, 
on some of the belly-footed mollusks, had eyes at their 
ends. Can you tell me where I can see a picture of 
such a mollusk ? It seems so funny that an animal can 
carry its eyes on its whiskers.” 

I think, Harold,” said the doctor laughing, that 
the word horns or antennae would be better than what 
Charley called whiskers, and yet,” he continued, “ the 
name whiskers is not so bad, provided you do not re- 
gard these whiskers as being the same as those you may 
get when you are old enough. They are more like the 
whiskers of the cat that are employed by this animal as 
organs of touch. But,” he continued, “ coming now to 
your question, here is a picture ” — opening Wood’s 
“ Illustrated Natural History ” — “ of an edible snail. 

201 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


As one can see, the animal has a short head and four 
horns or tentacles. The little black specks at the ends 
of the horns are eyes. In this same drawing,” he con- 
tinued, you can see that the snail is a belly walker, 
and also that it is a head-walking mollusk, for you can 
distinctly see its head. In the same drawing are shown 
other head-walking mollusks, in all of which you can 
see the head with the feelers or tentacles.” 

“ Doctor,” inquired Harold, “ has the snail a door 
it can shut when it wishes to be alone or to shut out the 
cold?” 

“ It has no regular door or operculum,” was the re- 
ply. “ In the case of the edible snail, the picture of 
which I have just shown you, the shell has the shape of 
a helix or whorl, so that the animal belongs to a genus 
known as the helix, in which there are a great number 
of species; indeed,” he added, “more than fourteen 
hundred. Although provided with no door, the com- 
mon garden snail on the approach of winter retreats 
into its shell, and closes it so as to keep out the cold by 
a deposit of hardened mucus that takes the place of 
the operculum. It is careful, however, to leave a small 
hole in this door through which it can breathe.” 

“ When you call that animal an edible snail, do you 
mean that people eat such a disgusting-looking thing? ” 
inquired Harold. 

“ There are plenty of people,” was the reply, “ who 
think the animal is an especially delicious food. In 
many parts of the world some species of snails are 
regularly fattened for the table. Indeed,” he added, 
202 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ the Romans, who were very fond of snails, built 
separate houses where they were fattened by feed- 
ing them with a mixture of meal and wine, and even 
to-day there are places in Europe where snails are 
raised for the table. 

‘‘ It will interest you,’’ continued the doctor, “ to 
learn that sometimes milk is made to pass for cream 
by squeezing into it the juice of a number of fine fat 
snails. The sticky liquid thus obtained, when thor- 
oughly mixed with the milk, gives it somewhat the ap- 
pearance of cream.” 

“ Ugh! ” said Charley; I would not care to drink 
that kind of cream.” 

I don’t think I would myself,” said the doctor. 

As was of course natural the collection made for the 
museum of The Whimples, Harding and Pleasanton 
Company, resulted in a great increase in the observa- 
tions of mollusks by all the boys, so that many speci- 
mens were brought either to the doctor or the captain 
for identification. 

One day, Harold, who was perhaps the most tireless 
collector, brought to the captain a number of empty 
shells in which were one or more holes that had been 
bored almost as regularly as if the boring had been 
done by a drill. 

How were these holes made, uncle ? ” he inquired. 
“ Were they bored in the empty shell after the animal 
had died, or while it was living? ” 

“ While the animals were still alive in the shell,” re- 
plied the captain ; “ these holes were made by a variety 
203 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


of mollusk that is provided with a filelike tongue con- 
taining teeth like those on a rasp. This animal lei- 
surely seats itself on the shell of the animal it wishes to 
eat. No matter how tightly that poor creature may 
hold the door of its shell shut, it is powerless to protect 
itself ; for its enemy proceeds to bore a hole in its shell 
and then leisurely plucks out the living animal piece by 
piece and devours it.” 

One day little Frank came running to the doctor, 
saying excitedly : 

'' O doctor, look at this funny-looking shell. It 
has stuck little bits of rocks all over it. What do you 
call it ? Don’t you think the boys would like it ? ” 

“ I am sure they would be delighted to have this 
specimen,” said the doctor, to the lad’s great delight. 

What do you call it? ” inquired Frank. 

Do you remember, Frank, what Jack calls his col- 
lection of minerals ? ” 

“ I think he calls it his mineral logical collection,” 
replied the youngster, balking at the hard word. 

“ You mean mineralogical, Frank, and that’s the 
name that is commonly given to this shell. It is called 
the mineralogical mollusk.” 

By this time the colonists from Mahinee’s and Otoa’s 
islands had reached Harding Island, and began erect- 
ing their houses. They had brought with them, on 
rafts formed of the trees they intended for the ridge- 
poles and other parts of their houses, large quantities of 
bamboo, and many flat stones for the formation of 
204 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


pi-pis, and also large quantities of leaves of the co- 
coanut palm and breadfruit trees for thatching the 
roofs. The captain had requested Mahinee to have 
these things brought so as to decrease as much as pos- 
sible the cutting down of trees on Harding Island. 

It will be remembered that on the occasion of Mahi- 
nee’s first visit, when he came in his war canoes with 
his wounded son, Kooloo, Miconareo, or Doctor Par- 
sons, Captain Harding, Hiram, Charley, Harold, and 
Jack, a number of houses had been built from the 
portable houses obtained from the wreck of the dere- 
lict brig. Since, however, the captain wished these to 
be kept for Mahinee on his subsequent visits to the 
island, arrangements had been made to erect separate 
houses for the colonists. 

Since we have already described the construction of 
the Polynesian houses, as built on Mahinee’s or Otoa’s 
islands, it is not necessary to repeat it here. It is 
enough to say that they were erected a few feet above 
the surface of the ground on a pile of stones, a neces- 
sary precaution in countries where the ground is gen- 
erally very damp during a large part of the year. 

I do not at all mean that the colonists brought 
with them a sufficient number of large flat stones to 
form the entire pi-pi. It will be remembered by those 
who have read the second volume, ‘‘ Wrecked on a 
Coral Island,” that on a part of the ocean beach of 
Harding Island there were a great number of rounded 
boulders of coral rock that had been worn by the waves 
so as to be smooth on the surface. These were em- 
205 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


ployed, as far as possible, to aid in the construction of 
the pi-pis. 

It does not take very long to erect the low open 
houses of the Polynesians, so that in a comparatively 
short time the colonists were all provided with com- 
fortable homes. At the command of Mahinee they 
then began collecting soil from different parts of the 
island so as to make flower-beds around their houses. 
They were all the more willing to do this since they 
were fond of flowers, and when they saw how beautiful 
those that now surrounded Jackson House were they 
eagerly asked that the captain give them seeds. He 
was able to do this, having brought a collection from 
Europe when he returned after selling the pearls. 

It was also necessary for the colonists to make a new 
vegetable garden. This was done by cultivating a piece 
of land that was covered with a thick layer of volcanic 
ashes on a portion of Twin Island No. i, at some dis- 
tance from the Maddox Clearing. Here they planted 
such things as sugar-cane, potatoes, yams, beets, and 
other plants that were successfully raised at Maddox 
Clearing, as well as beans, carrots, cabbages, etc., the 
captain had brought with him from Europe and be- 
lieved might be successfully raised in this part of the 
world. 

Mahinee spent a pleasant time on the island with his 
son Kooloo and his old friends, Charley and Harold. 
During this stay Frank spent much of his time with 
Mahinee and Otoa, both of whom had grown very fond 
of the youngster. 


206 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


When Mahinee and Otoa were informed by Charley 
and Harold of the new company, and the collection of 
shells it was making, they were much interested, and 
declared that they would soon send by a special boat 
many beautiful shells that could be obtained in the 
neighborhood of their islands, and that when next they 
returned they would themselves bring with them many 
other shells. 

Shortly after the erection of the houses of the colo- 
nists, Mahinee and Otoa, with their warriors and 
canoes, started from the island, and in a short while 
disappeared below the northeastern horizon. 


207 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XVIII 

Armored Animals of the Sea 

During the events described in the preceding chapters 
the out-of-door classes had not failed to be regularly- 
held. The doctor very sensibly concluded to give the 
boys some knowledge of all the branches of natural 
history before studying any of these branches in de- 
tail. He therefore gave them limited information con- 
cerning plants and animals both of the land and sea. 
While Jack joined these classes, he spent so much of 
his time on his collection of the minerals of the island 
that he did but little to help in the collection of shells 
for the museum. 

There was one kind of animal life about which the 
doctor gave the boys much information, both in the 
schoolroom and out of doors. This was that large 
and interesting class of animals known as the Crustacea. 

The Crustacea belong to a class known as articulates, 
or animals consisting of parts or segments connected 
by articulations or joints. This class includes, besides 
crustaceans, insects, spiders, and myriapods, or ani- 
mals popularly known as thousand-leggers. 

Since crustaceans live in the water they are neces- 
sarily provided with organs corresponding to the 
branchiae or gills of fishes that permit them to take 
208 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


from the water the air they need for breathing. It is 
true that some crustaceans live on the land, but even 
then they are provided with something that corre- 
sponds to gills and are obliged to live in moist places 
where they can keep the breathing apparatus moistened. 
Even the crustaceans that spend much of their life on 
the land are obliged occasionally to visit the water in 
order to do this. 

Without attempting to give the particular order the 
doctor followed, he taught the boys that the crusta- 
ceans include a variety of animals with which most 
people are quite familiar, since many of them are em- 
ployed as articles of food; such, for example, as lob- 
sters, crabs, shrimps, crawfish, and prawns. They were 
also surprised to learn that the barnacles, so commonly 
found clinging to the sides of ships, are crustaceans. 

‘Crustaceans,” said the doctor, one day when he first 
began talking on the subject, “ resemble insects since 
their parts are connected by articulations or joints. 
They differ greatly, however, from insects in that their 
bodies are generally protected by coverings or coat- 
ings not unlike the coatings of mail the knights of old 
used to protect their bodies. The separate pieces of the 
coating of crustaceans are joined together with a skill 
that makes the best coat of mail of the armorer ap- 
pear crude and clumsy by contrast. 

“ While,” continued the doctor, “ it is a comfortable 
thing for sea-animals to protect their bodies by a coat 
of mail so strong that it is very difficult for other ani- 
mals to get at them, yet such coatings are not without 
209 


o 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


inconvenience. When once formed around it, it is 
impossible for the animal to increase in size. When, 
therefore, it becomes necessary to grow, the animal is 
obliged to throw off this coat. This it does at more 
or less regular intervals. When it has thrown off its 
armor it becomes an easy prey to animals weaker than 
itself. It then hides in the crevices of rocks until it 
can make for itself a new armor. While freed from its 
armor the animal rapidly increases in size, but this 
growth ceases as soon as its new shell is formed, and 
it cannot go on again until it again sheds its shell. The 
shells of crustaceans are generally of a subdued green- 
ish-blue color that is sometimes tinged with shades 
of red. 

“ As you probably know,’’ continued the doctor, 
‘‘ there is a marked difference between the color of the 
shell of a crab before and after it passes through a pot 
of boiling water ; for boiling causes the shell to assume 
a bright red or scarlet tinge, this being especially so in 
the case of the lobster.” 

One day, while the doctor was speaking in the school 
about crustaceans, Charley said : 

“ Doctor, here is a big crab shell I found on the 
shore of Harding Lagoon. It was so nearly complete 
when I picked it up that I expected to see the crab in- 
side it, but the shell was completely empty. I know 
that crabs shed their shells, so I looked for the opening 
through which his big body and claws had passed. But 
I have not been able to find any opening large enough 
to permit this to be done. It beats any sleight of hand 
210 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


I have ever seen. Please explain to me how the animal 
does this trick.’’ 

‘‘ I don’t wonder it bothered you, Charley, for it 
has bothered many others before it was discovered how 
the animal can get out of its shell and yet leave it in 
the apparently complete condition in which you found 
it. When the animal is nearly ready to cast its shell 
its hard and firm muscles become soft and yielding. In 
this condition it is possible for the claws to be drawn 
through the comparatively small holes through which 
the tendons pass from one joint to another, when the 
sharp knifelike edges of the plates cut the muscles. 
The wounds thus caused do not apparently injure the 
animals, for they rapidly heal. The escape of the body 
from its shell is rendered possible by means of slits 
or cuts made in some parts of it. All this can be done 
with the animal leaving its cast-off shell so closely re- 
sembling an entire shell that I am not surprised you 
were deceived. 

“ The Crustacea are great fighters. Indeed, since 
they eat one another, it is necessary they should be able 
to do no little fighting in order to win their meals. 
They are provided with claws, pincers, and powerful 
jaws or mandibles, which they use in destroying one 
another. 

These animals are flesh eaters or carnivorous. 
They are, indeed, cannibals; for they do not hesitate 
to eat one another, and this too whether those they are 
eating are alive or dead. Nor are they very particular 
about the condition of their food. They do not refuse 
2II 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


to eat it even if the animal they are devouring has been 
dead for a long time. 

“ You can see, therefore,’’ he continued, ‘‘ that the 
crustaceans, like many other flesh-eating animals of the 
sea, act as its scavengers.” 

The doctor now stopped since Harold was holding 
up his hand. 

‘‘ What do you wish to ask, Harold? ” inquired the 
doctor. 

“ I saw a crab eating a smaller live crab the other 
day,” was the reply. ‘‘ The big one was holding the 
little fellow by one of its claws and was tearing off 
pieces from its body with another claw. It looked very 
odd to see the queer manner in which he put piece after 
piece into his mouth.” 

‘‘If crabs eat one another,” remarked Oliver, “ I 
must be careful not to put more than one in our aqua- 
rium ” ; for the company, with the assistance of Hiram 
had constructed an aquarium for the museum. 

“ It is very necessary to be careful, Oliver,” said the 
doctor, “ or else you may have the experience a natural- 
ist, Prof. Rymer Jones, had. 

“ It seems,” said the doctor, “ that the professor 
made the mistake of placing a number of crabs in the 
same aquarium; but I will let him tell his own story,” 
said the doctor, reading from a book. 

“ ‘ We had no idea,’ said Professor Jones, ‘ when we 
consigned them to the same vessel what a set of re- 
morseless villains we had to deal with, and much ques- 
tion whether our reformatory prisoners would show 
212 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


such an example of appropriate classification. They 
were of different sizes, their dimensions progressively 
increasing in a regular ratio, the biggest being about 
as large as an ordinary saucer, and seemed, each of 
them, to be aware of the tender mercies he might ex- 
pect from his companions, though such a presentiment, 
if it existed, apparently interfered not a bit with his 
premeditated designs upon the rest. 

‘‘ ‘ The game was not long in beginning ; the first 
that ventured out was seized upon at once by the next 
in size who, laying hold of his victim as though he had 
been a biscuit, with one pair of pincers proceeded de- 
liberately to break up his shell with the other, helping 
himself to the flesh by means of his finger and thumb, 
with as much deliberation as if he had been taking snuff 
from a snuff-box, and apparently caring little for the 
hungry eyes that seemed to glare with savage delight 
upon the atrocious spectacle. 

** ‘ The crab had, however, not very long enjoyed 
his cannibal feast before his proceedings were, as we 
thought, very unceremoniously interrupted by the on- 
slaught of a stronger foe which, seizing him exactly as 
he had done the first, proceeded to break him up in a 
similar manner, helping himself with the utmost sang- 
froid to the flesh of his already well-fed victim; while 
the latter, strange to say, by no means desisted from his 
meal upon the crab first slaughtered until quite disabled 
by his ruthless assailant; affording a remarkable illus- 
tration of the absence of suffering during the infliction 
of the well-deserved penalty.’ ” 

213 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Charley appeared highly tickled while the doctor was 
reading this story. As soon as he had finished reading, 
turning to the lad, the doctor said : 

'' Tell us, Charley, what there is about the story 
that strikes you as odd.” 

‘‘ Why, doctor,” said Charley, “ the account reminds 
me of a story told by Baron Munchausen of two ani- 
mals that began to devour one another, but had the 
good sense to begin each at the tail of the other. This 
eating went on — at least so the wonderful story as- 
serted — until each had completely eaten the other. I 
was wondering whether Mr. Jones’s story did not 
almost equal Baron Munchausen’s in improbability.” 

“ Hardly,” said the doctor, ‘‘ since here there was a 
third, entirely disinterested eater, and yet, perhaps, it 
does seem somewhat improbable.” 

One day, while the doctor had an out-of-door class 
observing the habits of the different kinds of crabs that 
were to be found both in the waters of the Harding 
Lagoon as well as in the lagoon of Twin Island No. i, 
they came across a large edible crab. As is well 
known, this crab, like many others of its kind, is able to 
run rapidly over the sand in a curious sidelike fashion. 
They had succeeded in stopping it so that it was im- 
possible for it to reach its hiding-place. At this mo- 
ment they were surprised to see the animal suddenly 
lie still as if dead. When one of the boys was about to 
pick it up the doctor cried : 

Look out, my lad. There is nothing the matter 
with that fellow ! He is only shamming, and is waiting 
214 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


for a chance to get hold of your hand. If he once 
does this you’ll wish you had let him alone.” 

Waheatoua fix him,” said Waheatoua with a broad 
grin, and holding in front of the crab a branch of a 
tree, it almost immediately grasped it with its largest 
mandible and nearly bit it in two with a vicious snap 
of its powerful massive jaws. While in this position 
Waheatoua killed it by a smart stab under its tail with 
his knife. 

“ If you ever happen to be caught by a crab,” said 
the doctor to the boys, the best thing to do is to tear 
off the mandible before trying to open its claws. In- 
deed,” he continued, ‘‘ sometimes the crab is foxy 
enough to tear off the claw himself, and then while you 
are busily engaged in opening its pincers, which con- 
tinue to grip you, scurries off and so saves itself.” 

Among the crabs caught that day was a large fellow 
on whose shell a collection of barnacles and other 
minute sea-animals had been growing. As the doctor 
pointed out, these animals are especially apt to be found 
on the shells of very old crabs, since after a crusta- 
cean has reached a certain age, it either ceases to cast its 
shell or else casts it at far longer intervals. The time 
therefore during which these little creatures can collect 
is prolonged.” 

Among other curious forms of crabs that could be 
seen in the waters of the island were some with slender 
legs covered with hairlike projections that caused them 
curiously to resemble spiders. These are called spider- 
crabs. 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Another variety of crab that attracted their atten- 
tion from its curious habits was known as the velvet 
or fiddler-crab. This crab, which is shown in the 
figure on this page, is also called the swimming crab. 
While swimming he moves his arms in a manner that 
so closely resembles the movement of the bow over the 
strings of a violin that it has received the name of the 
fiddler-crab. 



Fiddler-crab 


The term velvet-crab is applied to it from the shiny, 
silky hairs that cover its body. These hairs are so 
easily torn off that if the animal has been engaged in 
many fights, as is generally the case, his entire body is 
seldom found covered, there being large spaces from 
which the hair has been torn. 

Although a good swimmer, the fiddler-crab is easily 
beaten in this direction by a crab that has received the 
name of Neptune-crab from the god of the ocean. 

216 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Among crabs the ocean or swimming crab is not un» 
like what the albatross is among birds. It is said that 
this crab can continue swimming for days together 
without any other rest than what it finds on a floating 
piece of seaweed. Like other crabs it is carnivorous, 
living on other Crustacea, which it readily catches by 
reason of its greater swiftness. 

Another curious form of crab is that known as the 
running crab, from the great speed it is able to make 
when running on the sand. This is also called the 
fighting or boxing-crab, because when fighting or at- 
tacking another animal it employs its claws in a man- 
ner resembling the way in which a pugilist uses his 
fists. It is very funny to see two of these animals fight- 
ing with one another. Generally this fight is to the 
finish in more senses than one, since the victor never 
fails calmly to eat his victim as soon as the victory is 
gained. 

But what is still funnier about the running crab is 
the way it has, while running, of holding one huge claw 
up in the air as if it were beckoning to some one. This 
peculiarity has given it the name of the calling crab.” 

Like snails, some crabs have eyes placed on the ends 
of a footstalk resembling antennae. Now many crabs 
bury themselves in the sand or mud. In doing this the 
eyes are apt to be rendered useless by being coated with 
dirt. Some species possess the curious power of bend- 
ing the eyestalks so as to rub them against a part of the 
body covered with hairlike bristles, so that they thus 
quickly cleanse their eyes. 

217 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The doctor also gave the boys much information con- 
cerning lobsters, shrimps, crawfish, and barnacles, but 
with the exception of the latter variety of crustaceans it 
will be impossible to give any further details. 

Barnacles,” he said, “ look so much like shellfish 
that they have been mistaken for them. They are a 
variety of crustaceans known as the cirrhipeds, or ani- 
mals with tentacles or feet that are provided with bris- 
tles somewhat resembling locks of hair. Like most sea- 
animals, barnacles, when first born, can move through 
the water. But they soon fix themselves to rocks, to the 
sides of vessels, where they remain immovable for life. 

“ Without, however,” continued the doctor, going 
more fully into the peculiarities of this curious class of 
Crustacea, it is enough to say that the armor or cover- 
ing that protects their bodies is in appearance not 
unlike the shells of mollusks.” 


218 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XIX 

Charley's Grotto on Parker Cliffs 

It will be remembered that in the second chapter of 
this volume Doctor Parsons had planned making a 
thorough exploration of Parker Cliffs for the dis- 
covery of new grottoes. So many things had occurred 
to prevent this being done that it had been put off from 
time to time. One day the doctor said: 

“ Harding, what do you say to making an examina- 
tion of Parker Cliffs next Saturday? Since, like the 
rest of the island, these cliffs consist of limestone, I can 
see no reason why the rain-water has not cut grottoes 
there as well as in the portions that were thrown down 
by the earthquake.” 

“ Of course. Parsons,” replied the captain, while 
we may find grottoes in these cliffs, as indeed I think 
we will, yet it is hardly probable that the cliffs are as 
thoroughly honeycombed as those that now form the 
Harding Channel. Otherwise this part would most 
likely also have been thrown down by the earthquake 
that formed the channel.” 

I don't deny that, Harding,” was the reply; but 
I expect to find grottoes. Yes,” he added, and ex- 
tensive grottoes. I imagine we will find that in this 
part the foundations have not been much affected, and 
219 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


that they have been left standing for that reason as well 
as because the erosion there is less marked.” 

Don’t forget, doctor,” said Charley, when the 
above conversation was held, “ that you invited us 
boys to go with you when you made this exploration.” 

I’ve not forgotten it, Charley,” replied the doc- 
tor. Indeed, Harding,” he said, turning to the cap- 
tain, unless you object I see no reason why the other 
boys should not go with us.” 

‘‘ Does that take in Oliver, doctor ? ” inquired Char- 
ley anxiously. 

‘^Certainly,” was the reply; and for that matter 
even Frank can go. We need not expose him to any 
danger, and will make it a sort of pleasure trip. 

Thus far so little has been said about Rompey and 
his mate. Flora, that I fear some of my readers may 
think they are to take no prominent place in this 
volume. I hasten to assure them, however, of the in- 
correctness of any such assumption. They formed, 
as did Rompey in the preceding volume, an important 
part of the Harding Island community. Both were 
with Charley and Harold much of the time. But since 
their young masters now spent so many hours in the 
schoolhouse they of course saw less of the dogs. 

But this was not so with Frank. As already stated, 
neither the doctor nor the captain wished the little 
fellow to remain continuously in the schoolroom. They 
rather encouraged him to wander over the island, pro- 
vided he did not go far from the neighborhood of 
Jackson House. In these wanderings he was almost 
220 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


invariably attended by both dogs. Indeed, Rompey 
was always with the lad when he was not in the school- 
house, lying at the feet of Harold and Charley, for 
both boys had been able to make it perfectly clear to 
him that they placed the young lad under his protec- 
tion. 

Both animals had become very fond of the little lad. 
He was not only kind to them, but also thoroughly en- 
joyed the rompings a healthy dog is so fond of. Then 
too, he made frequent visits to the kitchen, where he 
was always welcomed by Mrs. Higgenbotham, and 
seldom failed to obtain sundry good things which to the 
dogs’ delight were always liberally shared with them. 
While both Rompey and Flora were fond of the young- 
ster, it appeared that Flora more especially regarded 
herself as belonging to him. 

‘‘ Charley,” said Frank one day after school, as the 
two boys were walking together accompanied by the 
dogs, I believe Flora understands all I say to her. 
Don’t you, Flo ? ” 

As if the animal actually did understand what the 
lad said, she began, just as Rompey was in the habit 
of doing when he was apparently trying to talk, to 
make curious sounds and tail shakings as if to say : 

“ Of course I understand you. How can I help un- 
derstanding when you speak so plainly? ” 

Look at Flo, Charley,” said Frank. ‘‘ Do you 
think she understands me ? ” 

I don’t doubt it,” was the reply. “ Just as I am 
sure Rompey understands me.” 

221 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


As the boys continued their walk, Charley said : 

Have you heard what the captain and the doctor 
intend doing to-morrow? ” 

“ No, tell me, please. Is it an out-of-door class or 
an excursion ? ” And then thinking a moment he 
said : ‘‘ I guess it must be an excursion. To-morrow 
will be Saturday and we never have out-of-door classes 
except on schooldays.” 

You’ve guessed it right, Frank. They are going 
with Hiram, Jack, Harold, Oliver, and myself to see if 
there are any more limestone grottoes in Parker 
Cliffs.” 

“ O Charley,” cried Frank, ‘‘ do you think the doc- 
tor will let me go if I promise to do everything he tells 
me? I would so much like to go with you. It will be 
fun to go under the ground, where we will have to light 
candles to see things. Do you think he will let me 
go ? ” he again asked anxiously. 

“ I am glad to say, Frank,” replied Charley, ‘‘ that I 
heard the doctor say that he intended taking you 
along.” 

‘‘ Oh, won’t that be nice ! ” exclaimed the youngster. 

Saturday morning, early, a party consisting of Cap- 
tain Harding, Doctor Parsons, Hiram, Harold, Jack, 
Charley, Oliver, and Frank in one boat, and Mr. 
Clarkson, Kooloo, Otoa, and some of the other brown 
boys in the other, might have been seen making their 
way through the Harding Channel toward the ocean. 
The boats passed along the eastern shore of Harding 
222 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Island toward the north. It was the doctor’s idea that 
openings might possibly be found on the sides of the 
cliffs near the water, and that through these openings 
they should be able to enter any caverns or grottoes 
that might exist. Although on several occasions they 
saw what appeared to be openings in the face of the 
cliffs, yet a closer examination showed that they did 
not extend into the rocks for any considerable distance. 
After having in this manner made a careful examina- 
tion of the entire ocean side of the cliffs, the doctor 
remarked to the captain : 

“ It looks as if there were no openings here, Hard- 
ing. Suppose we take the boats around to the lagoon 
side of the cliffs, where we may have better luck? ” 

But a careful examination of this side also failed to 
disclose anything like openings that extended any dis- 
tance into the cliffs. 

As they were about to give up the search, Charley, 
who had fallen into a brown study, said : 

'' Doctor, don’t you think the limestone that forms 
the Parker Cliffs is tilted from the north to the south ? 
I think I can see this dip when looking at the sides of 
the cliffs. Now, if this is so, would not the rain-water 
that falls on them run along cracks in the rocks and 
escape somewhere near the Harding Channel on the 
south rather than elsewhere? If I am right, doctor, 
would not all the underground streams flow toward 
the south, and thus make the amount of water and con- 
sequently the erosion greater here than elsewhere ? ” 

As the doctor and the captain heard the lad thus cor- 
223 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


rectly reasoning out what had probably taken place, 
they were surprised and pleased at the ability thus dis- 
played. 

“ You are a natural-born philosopher, Charley, for 
sure,’' said the doctor in a tone of admiration. “ I 
think there is no doubt you have correctly expressed 
what has taken place. What do you say, Harding? ” 

“ I agree with you,” was the reply. ‘‘ I think there is 
no doubt Charley is correct,” and then, knowing that 
the lad would not have made these suggestions had he 
not formed some plan, said to him : But what is in 
your mind, Charley? If you have any plan let us hear 
it.” 

'' I thought, captain,” said Charley, ‘‘ that if the 
underground water drains from Parker Cliffs from the 
north to the south some place might be found near the 
southern end where the water escapes from the lime- 
stone, and that here would be the entrance to any 
grotto that might exist.” 

That’s fine, Charley,” said the doctor, who now un- 
derstood what the lad had in his mind. You mean 
we should look for openings on the southern side of the 
cliffs rather than on the sides we have already ex- 
amined.” 

“ Yes, doctor,” was the reply. “ You know the 
grotto Harold and I showed you that day when we 
were returning to Jackson House, after having watched 
the steamer that was carrying away our friends disap- 
pear in the distance. I was thinking it might be possi- 
ble, if we carefully examined the wall immediately op- 
224 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


posite the opening of the grotto that Harold and I 
called the boat grotto, we might find some place where 
we could see waters escaping, and where, of course, we 
might naturally look for the opening of a grotto.” 

“ That’s splendid, Charley,” cried the doctor, “ You 
have reasoned the matter out in a very logical manner.” 
And then turning to the captain, he said : “ Harding, 
let us take the boats and examine the grotto Charley 
refers to. I think it very probable we shall find an 
entrance as he has suggested.” 

It was a full hour before noon when they entered the 
boat grotto. They at once began a careful examina- 
tion for openings or holes in the walls. Having 
brought a number of candles they were enabled by their 
light to see the walls with fair distinctness. 

At first it seemed that Charley’s suggestions, excel- 
lent as they appeared in theory, were faulty in fact ; for 
they neither could see any water escaping, nor did the 
closest examination disclose any openings. 

The tide had been running out for some time, so that 
when they began this examination it was almost at its 
lowest ebb. The floor of the grotto was completely 
covered by the waters of Harding Channel, except 
where a narrow beach or ledge extended along a part of 
the wall almost directly opposite the opening. They 
had taken both Rompey and Flora with them. As the 
bow of the boat touched the shore, both dogs jumped 
off and, running along the narrow ledge, commenced 
sniffing at the water, when suddenly, to the surprise of 
all, they began lapping it from a point near the shore, 
p 225 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘Look at the dogs,” cried Charley in surprise. 
“ The water there must be fresh. Our dogs are too 
sensible to drink salt water.” 

“ I reckon ye be right, Mr. Charley,” said Hiram 
grinning; “ and ef ye be right I reckon ye’ll find thet 
ere water wot the dogs be drinkin’ comes from thet ere 
stream ye were so cute in reasoning out as was flowin’ 
under the cliffs.” 

On tasting the water they found it quite fresh. So 
large a volume was evidently being discharged from a 
concealed opening in the limestone rock that it pre- 
vented the water of the channel from mingling with it, 
and thus remained fresh enough for drinking. 

“ It is a large stream,” said the doctor. “ I think 
beyond doubt it is the main stream that has been 
formed by the drainage of perhaps nearly all the 
cliffs. If we can find a way into the cliffs at this point 
we shall probably find the grotto for which we have 
been looking.” 

Now that their attention had been directed to the 
place of the discharge of the fresh water, it did not 
take them long to discover that the rocks back of this 
place had been eaten away by the water, since on tap- 
ping against them the sounds showed that a cavern 
existed at this point. 

“ If we can remove the rock from this place,” re- 
marked the doctor, “ I think we will find what we 
have been looking for.” 

“ Doctor,” said Hiram, “ ez ye know, I hev placed 
two of my cannon on the cliffs above, and hev brought 
226 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


here a lot of powder fer loading them. Ef ye be willin’, 
I kin place a blast of powder agin this wall where 
it sounds hollowlike, set a fuse to it, and when she 
blows off I think we’ll see something.” 

It was agreed that Hiram should make the trial. 
Employing an entire canister of powder, placed in a 
dry hole about six feet above the surface of the water, 
and packing this tightly with sand and moist earth, 
he attached to it a slow-match long enough to burn five 
minutes. Then sending one of the boats out he lighted 
the fuse and quickly entering the other boat rapidly 
pulled it to the other side of the channel. At the end 
of five minutes the sound of a muffled explosion was 
heard, their boats were slightly shaken, and smoke was 
seen pouring out from the opening of the boat grotto. 

The boys wished the captain to take the boats and 
go at once to see what effect had been produced by 
the explosion. Harold was especially desirous that 
this should be done, and began begging his uncle to go 
at once. 

We must wait a little while, Harold,” said the cap- 
tain, ‘‘ for the air in the grotto to become clear again. 
Then too, it is possible that a great number of strange 
animals like the great squid that attacked you and 
Charley in the old grotto, may have have disturbed 
by the explosion. Unless,” he added in a joking tone, 
“ you are anxious to have another fight with one of 
these gentlemen.” 

‘‘ Not for me,” said Charley laughing. ‘‘ I had 
enough of that kind of business.” 

227 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The captain’s suggestion greatly disappointed the 
boys, but they knew him too well to argue the matter 
with him. Moreover, they could not but recognize 
the wisdom of his decision. So they took the boats to 
Twin Island No. i, where they spent an hour at their 
lunch. 

When they again entered the grotto they found how 
great an effect the blast had produced. The face of the 
cliffs against which the canister of powder had been 
placed had been completely blown out for about four 
feet above where it had been placed all the way down 
below the surface of the water, leaving an opening of 
at least ten feet in height and about fifteen feet in 
width. The water at the entrance of this opening was 
evidently deep; for the material blown out from the 
face of the cliffs had not sensibly shoaled it. 

Of course they lighted their candles so as to see 
this space that had never before, at least for many 
years, been visited by man. 

'' The air appears pure and sweet. Parsons,” re- 
marked the captain. ‘‘We shall probably find the 
grotto connects somewhere else than here with the 
outer air.” 

“ I believe you are right,” said the doctor. “ As long 
as our candles burn freely there should be no danger 
in entering.” 

Watching the flame of the candles they took the two 
boats through the opening and found themselves in a 
huge cavern of several hundred feet in width. Cau- 
tiously rowing toward the north, or directly opposite 
228 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the entrance, they soon felt the keels of their boats 
grate against a sand beach not unlike the beach Harold 
and Charley had discovered in the grotto where they 
had the fight with the giant squid. 

The candles continued to burn brightly and the air 
remained pure and sweet. They could now see that 
they were in a huge grotto not unlike those they had 
already explored; for, from the roof extended snow- 
white stalactites, from the floor immediately beneath 
irregular stalagmites, while numerous irregularly 
shaped columns formed where the stalactites and stal- 
agmites had met, were holding up the roof of the 
grotto. 

But it is not our intention to describe the peculiari- 
ties of this grotto, since they did not differ greatly from 
those already described in a previous volume of the 
series. As they stood watching the beautiful under- 
ground palace thus silently sculptured by the running 
water, the doctor, turning to the captain, said : 

“ Harding, I suggest we call this the ‘ Pleasanton 
Grotto ’ ; for it was by reason of Charley’s clear idea 
of how it was probably formed that we have been able 
to find it.” 

“ Agreed,” said the captain. 

It may be said that the boys were pleased with the 
name, but instead of calling it Pleasanton Grotto,” 
they always spoke of it among themselves as “ Char- 
ley’s Grotto,” and this name soon came to replace that 
proposed by the doctor. 

They now made preparations for carefully examin- 
329 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


ing the grotto. It was not a difficult thing to do, since 
the stream by which they had located it flowed through 
a channel that as nearly as they could see occupied the 
middle portion of the cliffs. It was a big stream of de- 
licious, pure, cool water that flowed swiftly; for its 
channel, like the floor of the cavern, was inclined. 
Following this channel, on its left bank, they slowly 
ascended, making their way between the limestone 
pillars and walking around the stalagmites that pro- 
jected from various parts o’f the floor. 

After proceeding in this manner for a distance of 
more than a mile they came to a place where a tribu- 
tary stream flowed into the main stream from the left. 
Following it they at last saw, some distance beyond 
them, a dim light. 

There,” said the captain, “ is one of the openings 
that I thought we would find, by means of which the 
air of the grotto is kept sweet.” 

Making their way toward the light they saw, at some 
distance on their left, an opening resembling a room. 
Here the eroding water, in that curious way that so 
often occurs in work of this character, had irregularly 
worn away or excavated a kind of room, and had even 
left an opening in the face of the cliffs that, acting as 
a window, permitted them distinctly to see through it 
the waters of the Harding Lagoon as well as the lagoon 
of Twin Island No. i. 

It was not the room alone that surprised them, but 
a rude bench, chair, table, and something closely re- 
sembling a bedstead they found in it. 

230 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ I wonder how these things ever got here ? ” in- 
quired Harold in surprise. 

But Frank was ready with an explanation that was 
so satisfactory that as soon as his companions heard it 
none of them felt disposed to deny its correctness. 

‘‘ O doctor,” he cried, ‘‘ the dead man has been here 
and made another bedstead just like the one we found 
in his house on the swimming-pool ! ” 

‘‘ Frank’s explanation is correct,” said the doctor. 
‘‘ Maddox evidently occupied this place, probably when 
he was first cast on the island. Let us look around 
and see if he has left any other traces in this room.” 

“ He has evidently increased the size of the open- 
ing for the window,” said the captain, pointing to 
some places where markings on the limestone showed 
it had been cut by some kind of tool. The room is 
nearly at the top of the cliffs. I imagine he would be 
quite safe when once here from any intrusion from 
without.” 

I wonder how he got here ? ” inquired Oliver. 

‘‘ I don’t know,” said the captain. Certainly not 
by the opening we made, but of course great changes 
must have taken place in the opening into these caverns 
by the earthquake that formed Harding Channel.” 

While this conversation had been taking place the 
doctor had been making a careful examination of the 
room itself. At last he found a notebook containing 
writing in lead pencil that was almost illegible by the 
pages having molded from the dampness of the cave. 
It was not difficult, however, to recognize the hand- 
231 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


writing as the same as that found in the paper taken 
from the box on the dead man’s bed on Twin Island 
No. I. 

As far as they could make it out the writing showed 
that Maddox had employed this place as a house of 
refuge when he feared the approach of canoes from 
neighboring islands. 

“ There is much here,” said the doctor, examining 
the paper, that I think we can decipher when we have 
more time, but let us now return. We have been un- 
derground long enough.” 

While on their way back Charley whispered to Har- 
old, and said : 

“ What a splendid place this would be to hide in 
should we ever want to do so.” 

“ It would, indeed,” was the reply ; and we must 
not forget it.” 


232 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XX 

Frank and Mrs. Higgenbotham 

The building of a Polynesian village on Harding 
Island was a great event to the native boys of the 
Harding School, for many of them had relatives or 
friends among the colonists. To the lads who had 
been homesick the coming of their people was a great 
boon. For the next few weeks after the arrival of the 
settlers, at the close of the school, the boys were in the 
habit of going over to the settlement,” as they called 
the place. At first some of them wished to spend the 
night in their friends’ houses. Mr. Clarkson, who 
lived at the dormitories with the boys, forbade their 
doing this, and at first had some trouble in having his 
orders obeyed, but before long the trouble ceased ; for 
the boys began to appreciate the difference between the 
comfortable bedsteads and mattresses in the dormi- 
tories and the hard mats placed on the stones of the pi- 
pis only a few feet above the damp soil of the island. 

The people at the settlement asked the lads many 
questions about their new life; what they did during 
the day; what the white people did, and the kinds of 
food they ate. The kind of food the boys received es- 
pecially interested their friends ; for they soon saw that 
whatever other advantages Harding Island might pos- 

233 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


sess, it was unable to produce either the quantity or 
diversity of vegetable foods that were to be obtained 
on the islands they had left. They were already begin- 
ning to miss the breadfruit and the other fruits of the 
island. They did, however, thoroughly appreciate one 
thing. The waters along the coasts of Harding Island 
and its lagoons gave them a far greater variety of fish 
and other animal food than they had been able to obtain 
on the Island of Captivity, where a visit to the seashore 
was an unusual occurrence. 

But it was not only the Polynesian boys who fell into 
the habit of visiting the houses at the settlement. The 
place possessed an equally strong attraction for the 
white lads, and this not only for Oliver, Frank, and 
David, but also for Jack, Charley, and Harold. Char- 
ley and Harold were still Charleyo and Harealdo to 
the Polynesians. They were still looked on as white 
priests, especially Charleyo; and while they welcomed 
all the white lads, they were always especially pleased 
to see these two. 

Mahinee and Otoa had left the government of the 
settlement in the hands of a man named Maro. Under 
ordinary circumstances Maro would have been called 
the King of the Settlement, and indeed he was so in 
point of fact. Mahinee, however, had the good sense 
to tell the people that Captain Harding was their king. 
Any matter of great importance that came up was to be 
left to his decision. In less important things, how- 
ever, it was the word of Maro that was to be obeyed. 
In this Mahinee had avoided the trouble that might 

234 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


readily have arisen from the presence of two different 
rulers on the island. So far everything had gone on 
in a satisfactory manner, and nothing had yet occurred 
that the captain had been called upon to adjust 

The people at the settlement were especially anxious 
to hear about what was going on both at Jackson 
House and at the school. While their frequent visits to 
both places were made pleasant, at last the white peo- 
ple found it necessary to ask their visitors not to enter 
their buildings without first knocking on the doors. 

The settlers soon became very familiar with the 
schoolhouse. Mr. Clarkson, who, as already men- 
tioned, intended to become a missionary to the people 
of the South Pacific was rapidly learning their lan- 
guage, and had already established meetings in the 
schoolhouse both on Sundays, when religious services 
were held, and on certain afternoons of the weekdays 
for singing and talking. 

Of all the visitors at the settlement there was no one, 
after Charleyo and Harealdo, who was more warmly 
welcomed than Frank. When they found that the little 
lad was Charleyo’s especial friend, they took it for 
granted that like him he was a priest, and called him the 
Little White Priest.” This opinion was strengthened 
when one day Frank, who had a pocket camera that he 
was accustomed to use for taking snapshots, informed 
them that he would take some magic pictures. These 
were subsequently developed by Oliver, and when 
Frank took them to the settlers, the people then were 
convinced that the white people were indeed very 

235 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


wonderful, since even their little children could per- 
form such feats of magic. From that time Frank’s 
name as the “ Little White Priest ” was firmly estab- 
lished. 

• Among the many wonderful things Charley had 
done on the Island of Captivity that led Mahinee and 
his chiefs to believe that he possessed great magic 
powers, was his predicting that knife-stones, i. e., 
sharp fragments of obsidian or volcanic glass, would 
be found near the top of one of the mountains that 
could be seen from the valley, and had persuaded 
Mahinee to send Kooloo with an expedition to this 
part of the island. Now, Mahinee and his people knew 
that the lad had never been on that mountain, so that 
when such stones were actually found and carried in 
triumph to Mahinee, both he and his people were con- 
vinced that the magic of the white lad was something 
far beyond that of their priests; for this lad they 
thought could see what was invisible to other people. 

There were very few things that occurred on Hard- 
ing Island that were not almost immediately known at 
the settlement. When, therefore, the news spread of the 
discovery of the wonderful grotto on Parker Cliffs, 
they were anxious to hear how the discovery had been 
made. It would have been much better for the white 
people to have kept this matter to themselves; but, as 
was natural, Kooloo, Otoa, and the other Polynesian 
boys, who had been with the party when the grotto 
was discovered, carried the news to their people. 

There is one respect in which civilized and un- 
236 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


civilized people do not greatly differ; both delight in 
dwelling on the marvelous. When the native boys 
told their people how the discovery of the grotto had 
been made they especially dwelt on what seemed to 
them to be the magical part. When they learned that 
after the doctor and the captain had been unable to 
find the grotto, Charleyo had looked directly through 
the cliffs and told them just where the opening was, 
they ceased to wonder. Of course, they argued, this 
was done by magic, and to a great white priest like 
Charleyo it was a very simple matter. 

Again, when they were told that after the opening^of 
the grotto had been discovered, an evil spirit had closed 
the entrance, it seemed perfectly natural when, as they 
declared, Charleyo instructed Hiram to bring a new 
kind of ‘‘ make-thunder ” that killed the evil spirit 
and opened the door of the grotto, they again looked 
on the occurrence as but something that was to have 
been expected. 

When the doctor afterward heard that all the par- 
ticulars of the Pleasanton Grotto had been disclosed to 
the people of the settlement, he said : 

“ Harding, I am sorry this has been done. It would 
have been better had this discovery been kept to our- 
selves. I am not looking for trouble, but it might 
readily happen that some time in the near future a 
place like the Pleasanton Grotto would be of great 
value to some of us as a hiding-place.’' 

‘‘ I know it is unfortunate,” replied the captain 
“ We must be careful in future about such things.” 

237 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ But, Doctor,” said Charley, who was present, ‘‘ the 
grotto is so big a place, and so much of it has been left 
unexplored, that it would not be difficult to find other 
parts, the exact location of which we could keep to 
ourselves.” 

Charley’s suggestion so pleased the doctor and the 
captain that they determined to go the next Saturday 
with Hiram, Jack, Harold, Charley, and Oliver and 
make a more extended examination of the place. 

The exploring party started for the grotto early 
next Saturday morning. Expecting to be away nearly 
the entire day, they took food with them, plenty of 
candles, and fuel for a fire. Besides this, the captain 
took his photographic camera and materials for a 
flashlight, so as to be able to take pictures of any par- 
ticular portion of the grotto that especially attracted 
their attention. Remembering the aid Rompey had 
given to Charley and Harold in finding the entrance 
on the day they were lost in the great grotto, they 
took the dog with them. They left Flora, however, 
to keep Frank company; for the doctor did not think 
it advisable to permit the lad to be exposed for so 
long a time to the damp air of the grotto. 

The little fellow was bitterly disappointed when he 
learned next morning that they had gone on an ex- 
cursion without him. At the request of the doctor, 
Hiram had left word with Mrs. Higgenbotham to 
break the news to him after they had gone. When the 
lad found that not only had the doctor and his party 
gone off in a boat, but that the Polynesian boys had 
238 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


taken the other boat and had gone with it to Twin 
Island No. i, and that Mr. Clarkson was shut up in 
Jackson House studying, he felt very homesick, and 
wandered into Mrs. Higgenbotham’s kitchen. 

“ Come in, my little laddie,'^ said the good-hearted 
lady. ‘‘ Tram hashed me to say that the doctor was 
hawful sorry he had to leave you here, but that since 
they ^expected to be gone nearly all day, he was 
hafraid to ’ave you with them. Your brother says, tell 
Frank to take Flora and see what new things he can 
find to tell him when he sees him again at supper- 
time.’’ 

Mrs. Hiram, I would have liked very much to go 
with the doctor and the boys,” said the little fellow, 
“especially with Ollie; but if they think I had better 
stay here, why, I guess Fll have to be satisfied.” And 
then looking around as if to see whether any one but 
Mrs. Higgenbotham could hear him, he made a confi- 
dence that greatly surprised the good lady. 

“ You know, Mrs. Hiram, I miss my mother so 
very, very much. Ollie comes next to mother, so that 
when, like to-day, he’s away from me I feel very 
lonely.” 

This confidence was a great revelation to Mrs. Hig- 
genbotham. He had been so brave about the separa- 
tion from his mother, and had been so able to conceal 
how greatly he missed her, that no one except his 
brother, with whom he slept, had any idea how he 
hungered for mother-love. 

Now, although from the ordinary standpoint of 

239 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


general knowledge, Mrs. Higgenbotham was an igno- 
rant woman, and from a social standpoint a woman 
from the lower ranks of life, yet it is to be greatly 
doubted whether, from the standpoint of what con- 
stitutes a true womanly woman, she did not take a rank 
equal, if not, indeed, greatly ahead of that held by most' 
women, no matter from what condition of life they 
may have been selected. By the use of her motherly 
instinct she was able at once to understand the feelings 
of the little fellow, who so greatly missed that mother- 
love which is the right of all young children. She un- 
derstood how wretched the little fellow must be in the 
absence of his mother, so taking him into her arms she 
pressed him to her bosom, saying : 

“ Mandy ’Iggenbotham can never be what Frank’s 
mother is, but she will do the best she can,” and she 
hugged and kissed the little fellow. Now, had this 
been done when there were any onlookers, the young- 
ster would have resented such familiarity as unsuited 
to one of his great age ; for like all young children, es- 
pecially boys, he had in his imagination reached an 
age far greater than was warranted by fact. 

Stop crying, laddie,” she said. “ Don’t forget 
what a little man you are growing to be. A year’ll 
soon pass, and ye’ll see mother again. And won’t she 
be surprised,” she added, “ when she finds how big 
her Frank has grown and how much he knows? ” 

That will be nice, Mrs. Hiram,” replied Frank, at 
once interested. ‘‘ I am learning much from the doc- 
tor. I know all about the different kinds of wigglers, 
240 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


jumpers, runners, and swimmers that live in the ocean, 
and can tell mother and father many things they never 
knew before/’ 

‘‘ I am sure your mother and father will be very 
proud of their boy,” said Mrs. Higgenbotham. 

Mrs. Higgenbotham, who had a full measure of 
what is common with sensible women, i. e., tact, saw 
that it would be best to get the lad talking about his 
mother ; therefore, she had so spoken as to lead him to 
think of the time when he would meet her again. 

Frank sat for more than half an hour in Mrs. Hig- 
genbotham’s lap, talking about the things he had done 
and the things he intended to do, so as to surprise his 
mother and father when he next met them. During 
this conversation Mrs. Higgenbotham became con- 
vinced that much the doctor and the captain had re- 
garded as sickness was in reality due to the lad’s 
secretly grieving about the absence of his mother. 

Mandy ’Iggenbotham,” she said to herself, may 
be a very hignorant woman, but the next time she sets 
her heyes on Doctor Parsons or Captain Harding she 
will just tell them the way to make this here young- 
ster well again is to let him ’ave some mother-love, and 
Mandy ’Iggenbotham will give it to him as well as she 
can.” 


Q 


241 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XXI 

Adventures of Frank and Flora 

Fearing he was tiring the good woman the little fellow 
at last slipped off her knee, and said : 

“ I’ve had a very nice time, Mrs. Hiram. Ollie will 
be real glad when I tell him how kind you have been 
to me. Now,” he continued, “ I guess I’ll go out and 
take a walk with Flo. She is waiting for me.” 

While they had been talking the dog had come 
into the kitchen, and had laid herself down at Frank’s 
feet, occasionally looking up at him with half-opened 
eyes. But she at once jumped up and wagged her 
tail when she saw that he was ready to go out. 

That’s right, my little laddie,” said Mrs. Higgen- 
botham, take a nice long walk. Wait a moment till 
Mandy puts you up lunch. You are sure to get hungry 
after a while.” 

As if the good woman believed that because he had 
been low spirited he needed a big lunch, she began put- 
ting up more food than three hungry grown people 
could get away with. When Frank saw this, he said: 

‘‘ Goodness gracious, Mrs. Hiram ! don’t put up so 
much, please : I cannot eat it all.” 

Never mind,” was the good-natured reply, “ what 
you can’t eat you can give to Flo.” 

242 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Then/^ said the boy laughing, I guess it will not 
be too much, for Flo can eat a lot. Come on, Flo,” he 
added. ‘‘ Good-bye, Mrs. Hiram. Fm going to take 
a good long walk, and won’t be back for some time.” 

The little fellow, accompanied by his do'g, wandered 
in the direction of the settlement, at which he remained 
for but a short time. He then went toward the south- 
eastern end of the island. 

Somehow or other the way in which Hiram’s good 
lady had treated him had been very pleasant to the 
little fellow. It seemed to fill a want he had long been 
without, and which before to-day none of the people 
on the island had been able to fill except his brother 
Ollie, and even there he did not get just what he 
wanted. But when Mrs. Higgenbotham had tenderly 
coddled him when no one was looking, it seemed that 
something had come into his life that he had been miss- 
ing since he left his mother; something that none of 
the men or boys had been able to understand. All of 
them had made the mistake so common, that as soon 
as a little lad begins to put on some of the signs of boy- 
hood everything pertaining to his baby life should be 
buried forever. But he had now met Mrs. Higgen- 
botham, a womanly woman, who possessed a wisdom 
about very young boys, like himself, that far exceeded 
the ripe, scholarly wisdom of either the doctor or the 
captain. 

He was therefore happy, and showed this happiness 
by romping and frolicking with Flora, as well as in ex- 
amining the flowers and birds and other living things 

243 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


he saw around him. Flora was greatly delighted with 
the conduct of her little master. Never before did she 
remember seeing him in such high spirits. 

Indeed, the little fellow felt so happy that he con- 
tinued his walk farther than he had intended until, to 
his surprise, he found he had almost reached the south- 
ern shore of the Harding Channel. Here he was met by 
one of the colonists, a man named Buhea. This man 
was what is known as an imbecile. An imbecile differs 
from a madman or a maniac, in that a maniac is sub- 
ject to fits of frenzy; while an imbecile is, generally 
speaking, quiet and harmless. 

Buhea had formerly been a priest on the Island of 
Captivity, and had been a man of considerable im- 
portance in his family. When his mind weakened, and 
it became impossible for him to remain with the other 
priests in the House of the Idols, he had been taken 
into one of his people’s homes, where he was looked 
after pretty much in the same way in which people 
look after a very young child. He was regarded not 
only by his people, but also by those on the island, as 
being merely weakminded. The priests of the Island 
of Captivity, glad of an opportunity of getting rid of 
the man forever, had persuaded Mahinee to place his 
family among those who were to be sent to form the 
new colony. In colonies of this kind it is not always 
those who wish to change their homes that do so, but 
those who are selected by the king. 

Frank had met Buhea several times at the settlement, 
and was therefore not at all surprised when the man 
244 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


came and walked along with him toward the shores of 
the channel. 

One can never tell when an imbecile may change into 
a violent maniac. I do not mean to say that this is al- 
ways the case, since when the brain, the noble organ 
that separates man so markedly from the lower animals, 
begins to soften, the imbecility generally continues 
until death relieves the patient. Sometimes, however, 
a maniacal idea possesses him and he becomes a mad- 
man. 

Now, one peculiarity about madmen is that they gen- 
erally possess the power of artfully concealing their 
loss of reason, so that when talking to others they often 
give the impression of being in the possession of all 
their faculties. 

Like many other imbeciles, Buhea had lucid inter- 
vals. At one time he had a fairly powerful mind, and 
it gave him no little worriment to feel he had lost 
command over it. He instinctively felt that his 
memory was growing weaker ; that the conclusions that 
he reached about things were too frequently foolish 
and childish, and this caused worriment ; at least as far 
as an imbecile is able to worry about anything. More- 
over, a change was beginning to take place that had it 
been known to a man like the doctor would have 
warned him to see that the man was looked after. He 
believed he heard voices talking to him. He imagined 
his gods were saying they had punished him by taking 
away his mind because they had not lately received a 
living sacrifice. He was fully convinced they were 

245 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


calling on him to offer up as a sacrifice a living white 
boy. Already he had laid plans for capturing Charley, 
Harold, or Oliver, but somehow or other when he came 
to think how he could best carry out these plans he had 
sense enough left to know that the lads were amply able 
to take care of themselves, and had therefore put the 
matter off for some other time. 

When Buhea saw the little lad with no companion 
but Flora he imagined this was the sacrifice his gods 
demanded. He therefore determined to kill the little 
fellow. He feared to make such an attempt in the full 
light of day ; for he knew his people would not hesitate 
to kill him should they see him make such an attempt 
on Frank, who was much beloved by all, and especially 
by the great Mahinee. 

Having heard of the wonders of Charley’s Grotto, or 
as all the natives referred to it, the grotto of the 
Young White Priest, and not knowing that the captain, 
the doctor, and his friends were then exploring it, 
he determined, if he could persuade the lad to go 
with him, he would there offer him up as a sacrifice to 
his gods. And then he thought perhaps he would 
regain his mind, and could go back to the Island of 
Captivity and resume his priesthood. 

In many respects the lower animals are far better 
observers of people than man. It was certainly so 
in the present case; for, while Frank saw nothing in 
Buhea to occasion alarm, this was far from being the 
case with Flora. She growled angrily when the man 
came near to the little fellow, and invariably placed 
246 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


herself between the two when Buhea tried to get 
nearer to the boy. 

Buhea did not like his treatment by Flora, but evi- 
dently thought it better to conceal his feelings. Turn- 
ing to Frank, he said: 

You have big brother named Olivero?’’ 

“Yes,” said Frank, “his name is Oliver; but what 
about him? ” 

“ Buhea saw him over there,” pointing to the boat 
grotto. “ He go in boat with other white people to 
cave of the Young White Priest. He say to Buhea, 
' Find my little brother, Frank, and bring him here.’ ” 

Frank was so glad to get the invitation that he did 
not see, as he should have done, how improbable it 
was that his brother should have sent any such mes- 
sage, since he had assured him through Mrs. Higgen- 
botham that the doctor did not wish him to accompany 
them. He did not know where they had gone, but 
thought that perhaps they had gone to the grotto and 
had changed their minds about not wanting him, and 
wishing to give him pleasure he had sent for him. He 
therefore turned to Buhea and said: 

“ I will go with you to Ollie, but how can we cross 
the channel ? ” 

“ Buhea has canoe here. Will take little fellow 
across heap quick.” 

“ All right,” said Frank. “ I’ll go with you.” 

Leading him to the boat and helping him in it, 
Buhea at once joined him and tried to push off the 
canoe so quickly as to prevent Flora from getting into 
247 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


it. The animal, however, was too quick, and springing 
in laid herself down at the feet of her little master 
with her face toward Buhea. 

‘‘ Buhea no want dog. Tell dog to get off boat. 
No room.” 

“ I won’t do any such thing,” said Frank. ‘‘ If 
Flo can’t go I will get out of your canoe.” 

But this did not satisfy Buhea. He picked up one 
of his paddles and aimed a blow at the dog, but so far 
from being alarmed Flora evaded it, showed her teeth, 
and began growling in a manner that clearly proved 
it would be very dangerous to touch her. So he con- 
cluded to let her go with them. 

There was one thing that Frank did not understand. 
Before getting into the canoe Buhea collected materials 
for a fire, consisting of the husks of cocoanuts, some 
dead branches of different kinds of trees he found in 
the neighborhood. 

What’s the wood for, Buhea? ” inquired Frank. 

‘‘ Maybe Buhea build fire in cave for men to cook 
by. They ask him to bring wood.” 

This seemed quite probable to the little fellow, so he 
said no more about it. Buhea rowed the canoe to- 
ward the other side of the channel and soon entered 
the grotto. Of course he had not the slightest idea the 
white people had gone to make a further exploration 
of the grotto of the Young White Priest and were then 
in it. Had he known this it would have been the last 
place in the world to which he would have taken the 
little fellow for the awful purpose he had in mind. 

248 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Entering at the opening that had been made by the 
blast, he collected the firewood he had brought and 
led the little fellow along the side of the stream Frank 
ascended with the doctor and his companions on the 
occasion of their former visit. Had he not been in so 
great a hurry he might have seen the captain^s boat 
moored about ten feet from where he had left his 
canoe. 

After walking for a considerable distance up the 
inclined side of the stream they came to a place where 
a stalagmite had assumed a form closely resembling 
that of an altar. Recognizing this resemblance, Buhea 
at once stopped and began building a fire. Among 
the many other things the captain had brought from 
Europe with him were several hundred gross of boxes 
of friction matches, and these were among the things 
the colonists most highly prized. Buhea had obtained a 
few matches, one of which he employed as above stated. 

“What are you doing, Buhea?” said Frank. 
“ Where is Ollie waiting for me ? ” 

But Buhea made no answer to the inquiry; he only 
mumbled something to himself, and for the first time 
the lad observed a marked change in the appearance of 
the man that greatly alarmed him. Knowing that he 
would have to depend on Flora for protection he com- 
menced petting her, just as if to say: 

“ Now, Flora, I expect you to look after me. Don’t 
let that man hurt me.” 

The fitful red light from the flames of the burning 
fuel feebly lighted the white sides of the stalagmite 
249 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


altar, and passing beyond it was flung back by a num- 
ber of snow-white stalactitic columns, giving to the 
grotto at this place a peculiarly weird appearance. As 
for Buhea, he said nothing to Frank, but began to 
mumble and mutter words from which it was evident to 
the lad that he was praying to his gods. 

“ What are you going to do, Buhea ? ” said the little 
fellow. If you try to hurt me I will set Flora on you, 
and you will find she is a great fighter.” 

But it was unnecessary now for the little fellow to 
make any further inquiries; for the madman drawing 
his dagger approached him. Flora at once sprang be- 
tween the two, snarling and showing her teeth in a 
manner that frightened Buhea. Indeed, it was evident 
that Flo was saying to the savage as well as she could : 

‘‘ Dare to touch him and see what I’ll do to you.” 

Although frightened by the appearance and action 
of the dog, Buhea was not turned from his purpose. 

Buhea’s gods,” he said, ‘‘ ask for sacrifice of little 
white boy. They say to Buhea, ‘ Kill little boy.’ So 
Buhea must kill you.” 

Saying this he again approached Frank with his up- 
raised dagger. 

But we must now for a short time return to the doc- 
tor and his party. They had been in the grotto for a 
long time, and were still busy with their explorations. 
On this visit, instead of following the left bank of the 
main stream, they followed the right bank. For some 
reason or other a tributary stream was not reached 
250 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


on this bank until at a much greater distance than on 
the other side. But at last they reached the tributary 
and followed it to the right. Here they found an open- 
ing on either side of the cliffs, somewhat resembling 
that on the other side. From it they had a good view 
of the ocean. 

Without going into a detailed description of what 
they discovered, it is enough to say they spent the 
entire morning in explorations, and at last stopped on 
the left bank of the main stream, to which they had re- 
turned after crossing the tributary stream. Lighting a 
number of candles they sat down by the stream and ate 
their lunch. During their exploration the captain had 
obtained a number of beautiful flashlight exposures of 
some of the more remarkable features of the grotto. 

After lunch they continued their explorations and 
had gone some distance down the stream when Rom- 
pey, who it will be remembered was with them, be- 
gan acting in a manner that showed great disquietude. 
He began running ahead of them, every now and then 
returning and looking up into the face of Charley, 
would bark as if to say : 

‘‘ There is something going on here I don’t like. 
Had you not better come with me and see ? ” 

There was no doubt that Rompey wanted them to 
follow him. He repeatedly ran a short distance ahead 
of them and barked, as if asking them to come on, and 
when they failed to do this he would run up to Char- 
ley, and catching gently hold of the leg of his trousers 
would endeavor to pull him after him. 

251 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ There’s something wrong here,” said the doctor. 
“ Don’t you think so, Charley ? ” 

“ I’m sure of it. Doctor,” was the reply. ‘‘ Rompey 
would not act in this way unless he thought that we 
should follow him. As you know, he is a very intelli- 
gent dog and I do not think would give an alarm 
thoughtlessly. I think we had better follow him.” 

So they began to follow the dog who, seeing that 
they were coming, now ran in the direction of the en- 
trance. At this moment they heard the fierce barking 
of a dog. 

“ That’s Flora’s bark ! ” exclaimed Charley ex- 
citedly. “ What can have happened to bring her 
here?” 

And then almost immediately afterward they heard 
a voice crying: 

“ Ollie, quick ! Come and save me. The black man 
is trying to kill me.” 

“ That’s Frank,” cried Oliver, making a dash after 
Rompey. 

Again was heard the fierce barking of a dog, which 
was suddenly muffled as if it had taken hold of some- 
thing. 

‘‘ Flora has put her teeth in something,” said the 
doctor, as they all ran after Rompey, who was now 
rushing madly toward the entrance. 

At last they got near enough to see what was going 
on. It was an awful sight that disclosed itself to their 
horrified eyes. There on the stalagmite altar — for 
that it was intended for an altar there was no doubt — 
252 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the madman had kindled a fire, by the fitful glare of 
which he was advancing menacingly with a drawn 
dagger toward the lad. Flora was standing ready to 
spring on the madman in an endeavor to protect her 
little master, who had a stone in his hand and was 
about hurling it at the madman. 

What the madman was about to do was not only 
evident from his position and from his surroundings, 
but from a remark he made in the Polynesian lan- 
guage that of course the doctor thoroughly understood. 
He was evidently talking to one of his gods, for he 
cried : 

O Oro, I bring thee a choice sacrifice. Therefore 
send thy servant his mind again that he may serve thee 
in the House of the Idols.’’ 

The rescuing party were fully fifteen feet from the 
altar. It was therefore impossible for them to reach 
Frank in time to prevent Buhea from striking him with 
his dagger. But the youngster hurled the stone and 
struck the man in the head. This kept him from stri- 
king for a moment, but it was only for a moment, for 
again he rushed at the boy and struck at him with the 
dagger. 

Without any hesitation Flora sprang at the madman 
and caught him by the throat with her powerful jaws. 
Apparently not feeling the grip the blow fell, but in- 
stead of injuring the boy it struck the dog, that fell to 
the ground as if dead. 

With a fierce yell Rompey now reached the scene of 
conflict and attacked the man furiously, and bore him 

253 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


to the ground. The dagger that fell from his hand 
was seized by Hiram, while the doctor flung him- 
self on the man and soon had him in control. As 
Oliver reached the altar with the others Frank threw 
himself into his arms with a cry of joy and fainted. 

Rompey now began examining his wounded mate, 
Flora, licking the blood from a severe wound in her 
shoulder. 

‘‘ Neither the man nor the dog should die,” said 
the doctor, who had been examining both. “ The 
wounds are not very deep. I am glad of this,” he 
added, turning to the captain, since no matter what 
this man has been trying to do, if he died from Rom- 
pey’s wounds there would be an ill-feeling against the 
dog, who would probably be poisoned. As it is, I do not 
believe the man will live very long, but it won’t be the 
bites of the dogs that will kill him. He has a kind of 
madness that is very apt when it has reached this 
stage to produce an early death.” 


254 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XXII 

An Undesirable Inhabitant of Harding Island 

As the boats passed out of the grotto into the waters 
of the Harding Channel, Oliver, who was still hold- 
ing his little brother in his arms, said anxiously : 

‘‘ Doctor, Frank is still unconscious. I have never 
known to him to remain in a faint as long as this.’^ 

“ Don’t worry, my lad,” said the doctor; the little 
fellow will soon be himself again.” But it was evident 
from the doctor’s appearance that he was trying to con- 
vince himself of the truth of this statement; for the 
lad now had been unconscious for a long time. 

“ The poor little chap looks very bad,” said the cap- 
tain anxiously. 

Doctor,” said Hiram, who like the others was also 
worried about Frank’s appearance, ‘‘ I alius keep a lit- 
tle port wine in this here locker fer accidents. Would 
ye like to give the laddie a little of it? ” 

“ It is what I have been wishing I had, Hiram,” said 
the doctor. If we give him a small quantity I think 
he will soon regain consciousness.” 

The doctor’s prediction was verified ; for when 
Frank’s lips were moistened with a few drops of wine 
his face rapidly lost its colorless appearance. Open- 
ing his eyes, he again cried in alarm : 

^55 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Quick, Ollie, come and save me ! The black man 
is trying to kill me,” and then seeing his friends around 
him, and that he was sitting in Oliver’s lap, he gave 
his brother a hug, saying : “ I was sure you’d come and 
save me, Ollie, if I could only make you hear.” 

“ You are all right now,” said his brother assuringly. 
‘‘ The black man is not here. We won’t let him hurt 
you.” 

‘‘ Did he hurt Flo ? ” anxiously inquired the little 
fellow. 

‘‘ Yes, but not very bad. The doctor says Flo will 
be all right again in a few days.” 

‘‘ Fm glad of that,” said the little fellow. Flo is a 
brave dog. She was not afraid of the black man, and 
jumped at him when he tried to stick me with his knife. 
Flo and I are going to be greater friends than ever; 
for she saved my life. Where is she? ” he inquired. 

‘‘ She is lying in the bottom of the boat, near Char- 
ley and Rompey.” 

But the excitement had been too great for the little 
lad, who said : 

‘‘ I feel very tired, Ollie. I think Fll take another 
nap. Keep tight hold of me,” and almost instantly 
he again became unconscious. 

I can’t understand how it is, Harding,” said the 
doctor, that Frank continues in such poor health. 
As far as I have been able to see there is no organic 
trouble except a tendency to weak lungs. Somehow 
or other he don’t seem to get the advantage the pure 
air of Harding Island should afford him. Were he 
256 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


older I should suspect it was a bad case of worry, 
but of course he is much too young for that.” 

“ Doctor,” said Oliver, “ my little brother is ex- 
tremely sensitive, and is very unwilling to have any of 
us know how much he grieves for his mother. He is 
very young to be left without her, and I know he is 
constantly thinking about her. As you know, Frank 
sleeps with me, and often when he thinks I am asleep 
I can hear him sobbing softly to himself for his 
mother.” 

Hello,” cried the doctor, “ I wish you had told 
me that before, Oliver. But for the matter of that, it 
has been very stupid in me not to suspect it long ago. 
Now, that I know it, I am sure I can do something for 
the youngster to make him well again.” 

‘‘ Parsons,” said the captain, I see now how very 
careless we have both been not to think of this matter. 
Frank is such a manly little fellow that we have un- 
consciously come to regard him as much older than he 
is. I wish there was some woman on the island who 
could help us in looking after the little lad.” 

There be Mandy,” suggested Hiram. “ I be sure 
she’d do what she could fer the little feller.” 

That’s true, Hiram,” said the captain. I did not 
think of her. We will certainly ask her to help us.” 

When the people at the settlement heard of Buhea’s 
attempt to kill Frank as a sacrifice to their god, Oro, 
there was great indignation. Rushing to the canoe 
into which the man had been thrown when bound, they 
declared he must pay the death penalty then and there. 

R 257 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Maro agreed to this. They had already seized the 
wretched man and were about dashing out his brains 
with a club when Doctor Parsons, or, as they knew him, 
Miconareo, said to King Maro in the Polynesian lan- 
guage : 

“ This matter must be referred to the Great White 
King, who is here. It is a matter of life and death 
and, as I heard the great Mahinee declare, all such 
matters must be referred to the Great White King,” 
pointing to the captain. 

Maro, who knew that he did not dare disobey Mahi- 
nee, replied to Miconareo, saying: 

‘‘ Maro will do all the Great White King com- 
mands.” 

“ It is my command,” said the captain, ‘‘ that Buhea 
be left alone now. I will carefully consider what shall 
be done with him and send word to Maro. In the 
meanwhile,” he said, turning to Maro, “ I will hold 
you responsible for the life of the prisoner.” 

They had only stopped for a moment at the settle- 
ment, but the news of the attempt on Frank’s life had 
reached both the schoolhouse and Jackson House, and 
Mr. Clarkson, closely followed by Mrs. Higgenbotham, 
were seen running at a swift pace toward them. Rush- 
ing up to Oliver, who still held the little fellow in his 
arms, Mrs. Higgenbotham stopped a moment to kiss 
him and then rising cried aloud in an angry tone : 

Where is the black brute who wanted to kill my 
baby? Pll gouge his eyes out and tear him to pieces. 
To think of ’arming such a little fellow who never did 
258 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


’urt to hany one.’' And then seeing the man being led 
away by some of Maro’s men, she rushed after them, 
crying : I’ll tear the brute to pieces,” until Hiram, ap- 
proaching her, said : 

“ I reckon, Mandy, ye hev good reason to be mad 
agin thet ugly feller, but ye must not fergit thet he is 
softlike and hez no sense. He didn’t know wot he was 
doing, so ye must forgive him.” 

It is not certain what conclusion Mrs. Higgen- 
botham would have reached, but we think it was very 
fortunate for the prisoner that at that moment Frank 
again regained his consciousness and seeing Mrs. Hig- 
genbotham called to her : 

“ O Mrs. Hiram ! come here, please. I am so glad 
to see you again.” 

The good lady who, as we have already seen, was 
very excitable, now rushed toward the lad, caught him 
in her arms and began hugging and kissing him. 

You hain’t any gladder to see me than I be to see 
you. Come,” she said, I’ll carry you to my room at 
the Jackson House, where you can tell me about it.” 

Mr. Clarkson remained with the people at the settle- 
ment. He saw that they still harbored a bitter feeling 
against the madman. This, however, he at last suc- 
ceeded in decreasing, pointing out to them that when 
the man had his senses about him he was a fairly good 
fellow; that he had lost his reason so they should 
make allowance for him. Moreover, he took advan- 
tage of the fact that the Polynesians generally held 
madmen in high repute. 


259 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ At the same time,” he said to them, “ I shall expect 
you all to keep a watch over Buhea to see that he does 
not make another attempt on the life of the Little 
White Priest.” 

As the party, headed by Mrs. Higgenbotham with 
Frank in her arms and Oliver walking next to him, 
approached Jackson House, Frank whispered some- 
thing to Oliver who, turning to the captain, said : 

“ Frank wishes to know whether you have any ob- 
jection to letting us room for a while at Jackson House. 
He wishes to be near Mrs. Higgenbotham, of whom as 
you see he appears to be very fond.” 

“ There is no objection at all, Oliver,” was the re- 
ply. “ ril arrange to have a double bedstead placed 
in one of the rooms on the same floor as the room oc- 
cupied by Mrs. Higgenbotham. I think that would be 
an excellent arrangement, don’t you, Parsons ? ” in- 
quired the captain. 

“ It is just what I would like to see done,” said the 
doctor. 

But in the meanwhile Mrs. Higgenbotham had some- 
thing to say; for, giving Frank to Oliver, she beckoned 
to the doctor and the captain to come where no one 
would hear what she was about to say : 

“ Now, gentlemen,” she began as soon as they were 
alone, ‘‘I. ’opes you will not feel that Mandy ’Iggen- 
botham is taking too much on herself, but she has 
something to say that she would be very cowardly if 
she left hunsaid. What she ’as to say is that this little 
fellow is fretting himself to death, quietly like, on 
260 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


account of love for his mother. Now, let me look after 
him so as to try to take his mother’s place. I know I 
can’t do it like his mother, but I’ll do the best I can. 
He and his brother can sleep in one of the rooms ’ere. 
Then Frank can come to me in the night when he feels 
lonelylike, just as he was in the ’abit of going to his 
mother.” 

It was not because either the doctor or the captain 
had the slightest doubt as to the advisability of doing 
what they were asked that they hesitated. It was the 
additional revelation that Mrs. Higgenbotham was a 
woman far superior to what they had imagined. They 
were reproaching themselves for having failed for so 
long a time to see the needs of the little fellow as this 
so-called ignorant woman had already seen. Think- 
ing they were hesitating, Mrs. Higgenbotham added : 

If you wish to make a well laddie of him again 
you’ll not ’esitate to do what Mandy ’Iggenbotham 
hasks.” 

We will be glad to do it, Mrs. Higgenbotham,” 
said the doctor, and then turning to the captain, he 
added : Harding, the good woman is quite right. 

We have both been very careless in not seeing what 
she has seen so clearly.” 

The captain was too intelligent a man not to see, 
now that his attention had been called to the matter, 
that Mrs. Higgenbotham was indeed correct in her 
ideas. He, therefore, at once made arrangements to 
fit up a room for Frank and Oliver on the same floor 
as that occupied by Hiram and his wife. And many a 
261 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


time when Oliver was asleep, and the little fellow 
began to grieve for his mother, he would steal quietly 
into Mrs. Higgenbotham’s room where he was sure 
of being comforted. At times, unselfishly feeling 
that his brother was missing fun at the dormitories, 
he would persuade him to leave him alone for a night 
or so and occupy his old bed. 

We will only add here that the plan adopted was so 
successful that it soon became evident that the little 
fellow had been given the one thing that was needed 
to restore him to health, and that was a little bit of 
the mothering young children should always have in 
abundance. 

But this recovery did not by any means come at 
once. Frank’s nervous system had been so shocked 
by his narrow escape from the madman, that it was 
some time before it entirely recovered its normal tone. 
Much of this time he spent indoors with Mrs. Higgen- 
botham or Hiram and out of doors with Flora. He 
did not, however, seem to care to go very far from 
Jackson House. 

It was Hiram’s workshop that at this time pos- 
sessed special attractions for him. He delighted to 
sit near Hiram and watch him doing wonderful things 
in carpentry or cabinet-making. 

“ ’Iram,” said his wife one day, would you like 
to do something to please little Frank? ” 

“ I sartingly would, Mandy,” was the reply. Tell 
me what it be and I’ll do it fer both of ye.” 

Then hask the little fellow if he wouldn’t like you 
262 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


to make a wonderful work-box for his mother, so that 
he can give her the next time he sees her.” 

‘‘ Thet be a capital idee, Mandy. I’ll ax him about 
it,” said Hiram. 

It is unnecessary to say that Frank was more than 
delighted with Hiram’s offer. 

'' It is very kind of you, Mr. Hiram. When can you 
begin?” he inquired anxiously. 

“ I kin git at it right now, immediate,” was the 
reply. ‘‘ We’ll plan what kind of a work-box it shall 
be.” 

'' Let’s ask Mrs. Hiram to come and help us. I 
guess she knows more about work-boxes than either 
you or I.” 

“ I reckon ye’re right fer sartin,” grinned Hiram. 
'' I’ll go and call Mandy.” 

So Mrs. Higgenbotham was called and the three 
entered into grave consultation as to the particulars 
of the great piece of work. Charley, Harold, and 
Oliver came into the room while this was going on; 
for they almost always came now during recesses to 
look after Frank. 

Thinking that they might be intruding, Charley said 
to his companions: 

“ I guess we had better go. Our friends appear to be 
talking about some private matter.” 

'' Oh, don’t go, Charley,” said Frank. “ If you and 
Harold and Ollie will only stay you can help us.” 

“ Yes, my lads,” grinned Hiram, we sartinly need 
your help.” 


263 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAll ISLANDS 


When Charley learned what was going on, he took 
a sheet of drawing paper from his pocket and said : 

“ Suppose I make sketches of the different kinds of 
boxes you may plan. You can afterward select the 
one that pleases you the most.” 

“ That’s bully, Charley,” exclaimed Frank. And 
after a long consultation and the drawing of many 
different plans, they finally agreed on the dimensions, 
shape, etc., of what they all agreed would certainly 
be the most wonderful work-box that the world had 
ever seen. 

And now, Hiram,” cried Frank, let’s pick out the 
kind of wood we’ll use for the box.” 

There was no difficulty about this, for Hiram had 
brought with him from Europe many different kinds 
of hard woods, and since he was expert at cabinet- 
making, and had brought all the necessary tools also, 
there was eventually produced a wonderful box. But 
it was not completed in a hurry. On the contrary, at 
the special request of the doctor, Hiram so managed 
matters that its construction took many weeks, during 
all of which time Frank was happily engaged in super- 
intending the great work. 

The feeling in the settlement against Buhea con- 
tinued for some time. When, however, it was seen 
that the man was gradually dying, this feeling happily 
decreased. Indeed, the man actually died within three 
weeks after his attempt on Frank’s life. 

We must now refer to something that happened at 
264 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the settlement that was the beginning of very serious 
trouble to the white people of Harding Island. On one 
of the many days when Charley and Kooloo had been 
making a visit to the settlement, Charley especially 
noticed that one of the Polynesians was closely watch- 
ing him and Kooloo, and was endeavoring to prevent 
them from looking directly into his face; for, when 
a change in their position brought them in front of the 
man, he would always manage to turn his back, though 
always as if this change in position was accidental. 

At first Charley thought it must be imagination on 
his part to believe that the man was endeavoring to 
hide his face. But being a bright lad he was deter- 
mined he would see, once for all, if he had been mis- 
taken. Mentioning the matter to Kooloo they agreed 
to approach the man from different directions, and 
thus make it impossible for him to hide his face from 
both of them. At the same time Charley cautioned 
Kooloo that if he recognized the man to say nothing 
about it, so as not to let him know that they suspected 
him. 

Acting in this way Charley succeeded in looking di- 
rectly into the man’s face and, indeed, when he turned 
so as to hide it from Charley, Kooloo did the same 
thing. 

That single look had been sufficient for both lads. 
They recognized him as a man named Mauai, a Poly- 
nesian from the Western Valley of the Island of Cap- 
tivity. Neither said anything, but they both remem- 
bered only- too well that the man was a cannibal, and 
265 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


was one of those who took the principal part in the 
cannibalistic feast on the bodies of the warriors of 
Mahinee they had slain in the attack on the mountain, 
the day Charley and Kooloo were made prisoners. 
Moreover, Mauai was one of the people of this island 
who were loudest in their demands that Charley and 
Kooloo should be slain so as to make another feast. 

I don’t like to have that fellow living here on 
Harding Island, Kooloo,” said Charley. 

“ Heap bad,” replied Kooloo. “ Mauai very bad 
man. Great cannibal.” 

But he is not a cannibal now, of course, Kooloo,” 
replied Charley. 

Kooloo don’t agree with Charleyo. Mauai canni- 
bal now. Man once a cannibal always a cannibal.” 

“ What shall we do, Kooloo ? ” inquired Charley. 

Do nothing,” was the reply. ‘‘ Keep eyes open. 
When the great Mahinee comes here Kooloo will say, 
‘ Mauai here. What will you do ? ’ And Mahinee will 
say, ‘ No want you here, Mauai. Go back to Mahinee’s 
valley.’ ” 

That’s all very well,” said Charley; “but in the 
meantime let us talk to Doctor Parsons and Captain 
Harding about this. They will be able to tell us what 
to do.” 

“ All right,” said Kooloo. “ Tell Miconareo about 
it,” he said, using the name by which Doctor Parsons 
had been known by the people of the Western Valley. 
“ Miconareo has big head. Heap wise man. He will 
tell us what to do.” 


266 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


When the doctor heard from Charley about the 
man^s presence on the island, he said : 

This is very bad news. I will speak to the captain 
about it, and advise him to call Maro’s attention to 
this matter. I don’t think there is any immediate 
danger, but we must not forget that Mauai is a dan- 
gerous man. That there are great stores on our 
island of articles the people of the neighboring islands 
— who, as you know, are more or less cannibals — 
would only be too glad to come and take for themselves. 

“ It is by no means uncommon,” continued the doc- 
tor, for the people of the neighboring islands to form 
marauding parties, and, suddenly descending on islands 
like ours, kill and eat the people and carry away such 
things that strike their fancy. However, come and 
we will talk to the captain about this.” 

The captain agreed with the doctor as to the desir- 
ability of getting rid of Mauai as soon as it could 
safely be done. On a consultation with Maro it was 
agreed that a canoe manned by four men should at 
once be despatched to Mahinee and Otoa in order 
to ask their advice in the matter. 


267 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XXIII 

The Theft and Escape of the Thieves 

Several weeks had now passed since the events re- 
corded in the last two chapters. Frank had rapidly 
improved in health, so that the doctor felt sure he 
would soon be a thoroughly well boy. The museum of 
the Whimples, Harding and Pleasanton Company had 
made many additions to its specimens. The out-of- 
door classes were going on regularly, and were more 
attractive than ever. Frank now spent much of his 
time with Mrs. Hiram, as he called the good lady. 
The doctor, aided by the captain and Jack, worked in- 
dustriously at the manuscript of the great book. 

While engaged at this work many questions arose 
that neither the doctor nor the captain could answer 
satisfactorily. These questions related to the forma- 
tion of coral islands which, while resembling Harding 
Island in some respects, differed from it greatly in 
others. It is true that on these occasions much valua- 
ble information was obtained from Waheatoua and 
Kapiau who, although of course uneducated men, were 
close observers. Still there were many details these 
men could not supply. One day after they had been 
questioning them concerning certain points in this 
direction, Waheatoua said to the doctor : 

268 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ Why not go in boat and let Waheatoua and Kapiau 
show you these islands ? Only one and one and one, 
and one days off there,” he remarked, pointing to the 
east of the northeast. You go, learn heaps, and then 
come back all right.” 

On hearing what Waheatoua said the men looked at 
each other without saying anything. Each had often 
thought of doing this, but had been unwilling to sug- 
gest it, since they did not wish to leave their friends 
alone on the island. 

“ I see, Harding,” said the doctor laughing, ‘‘ that, 
like myself, you have been thinking of this. I imagine 
you have turned it down as being somewhat risky.” 

“ You are right. Parsons,” was the reply. I guess 
we won’t take the risk.” 

In the meanwhile Charley, Harold, and Oliver, who 
were together so much of their time that they were 
generally known by the other boys as the “ Great 
Three,” had been busily engaged in collecting the 
shells of mollusks for their museum as well as study- 
ing the animals that lived in these shells. 

The doctor and the captain were desirous of ob- 
taining drawings of seaweeds, sea-anemones, and other 
forms of life in the ocean. Since Charley was the only 
one on the island who could do this work satisfactorily, 
they were obliged to depend on him for the sketches. 
He did this willingly, not only because he liked to 
sketch, but also because he had, like Jack, become much 
interested in the doctor’s book and, moreover, greatly 
admired its author. 


269 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


But there were so many things the doctor wished 
to have drawn that Charley was unable to find time 
for the work. 

One day when the “ Great Three ” had gone to a 
part of the lagoon where Charley wished to make a 
sketch of some sea-anemones, Harold said to Charley : 

“ I don’t understand why a bright fellow like you 
should be willing to spend so much time in making 
sketches of these animals when you might so easily 
take photographs of them.” 

“ I’d like to take photographs all right, Harold, if 
I could,” was the reply ; “ but I have tried to do so 
several times, and have never been able to get pictures 
the doctor can do anything with. They are never 
sharp and distinct.” 

“ I wonder why that is,” remarked Harold. “ Have 
you any idea ? ” 

‘‘ I think I know,” was the reply. ‘‘ Much light is 
always thrown off from a water surface, so that when I 
try to get a picture of anything below the surface, I 
cannot help getting a picture of the surface also, and 
the two pictures confuse each other. Then again,” he 
added, “ some of the light from the object below the 
water fails to pass out at the surface, much being 
thrown back again, and this of course decreases the 
amount of light received by the photographic plate.” 

‘‘ Then,” inquired Harold, ‘‘ why don’t you give the 
plate a longer exposure ? ” 

‘‘That’s just the trouble,” replied Charley; “and, 
indeed, coming to think about it,” he added, “ I guess 
270 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


it is the principal trouble, for the surface of a body of 
water is always moving, and this motion prevents the 
image of the object from being sharp and distinct.” 

“ I understand it now, Charley,” said Harold. “ Just 
let me think about it.” 

Knowing that his friend was a bright fellow, and be- 
lieving that something practical might come from this 
thought, Charley had the good sense to keep quiet. At 
last Harold, looking up, exclaimed: 

I say, Charley, I think I can show you how to take 
a good picture of an object below the surface of the 
water. Place your camera inside a water bucket.” 

** You mean like the lens we put in the bottom of a 
bucket so as the better to see things below the sur- 
face ? ” exclaimed Charley. 

‘‘ That’s it,” was the reply. Don’t you think it 
would work?” 

It’s a great idea, Harold,” was the reply. I 
think your plan will enable one to take good photo- 
graphs of anything on the bottom of the lagoon or 
ocean where the water is clear enough.” 

‘‘ Then let’s try the plan to-morrow,” said Harold. 

“ Agreed,” said Charley, taking out his sketchbook. 
“ It would be something like this, wouldn’t it, Har- 
old ? ” and rapidly made a sketch of a long tube so ar- 
ranged that it fitted tightly to one end of the outside 
tube of the camera, and was provided at the other end 
with a large convex lens. 

You see,” he said to Harold, we will place the 
end of the long tube so that the lens it contains 
271 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


shall dip below the surface of the water like the lens 
in our bucket water-glass. By using a lens here a 
greater amount of light will be swept into the camera. 
And then,” he said with a chuckle, showing how 
greatly the idea tickled him, “ by plunging this end 
of the tube a little below the surface we won’t be trou-' 
bled by the shaking of the water. In this way we 
ought to obtain fairly still water as well as avoid ob- 
taining a picture of the surface of the water. Now,” 
he added, let’s go and get Hiram to help us make 
this attachment.” 

Hiram, who was an ingenious man, was especially 
happy when making something new, especially when 
it was for Charley, to whom he was greatly attached. 

The next day without saying anything they made 
a number of exposures with the new attachment, and 
when the pictures were afterward developed they 
found them clear and sharp. When they took them 
to their teachers these gentlemen were greatly sur- 
prised and pleased. 

“ They are magnificent, Charley,” said the doctor. 

I have never seen pictures of objects under the water 
as sharp as these. How did you get them?” 

“ By means of a clever idea of Harold’s,” said Char- 
ley, who then explained how it was done. 

These pictures will be a great aid to us in the 
preparation of the book, captain,” said the doctor. 
“ Come out on the lagoon now, boys, and show us how 
you took them.” 

The working of the apparatus was so satisfactory 
272 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


that both the captain and the doctor requested Hiram 
to make similar attachments to their cameras. 

Among other things Hiram had brought with 
him from Europe was a portable blacksmith’s forge, 
together with coal for its fire. Hiram was a clever 
workman in many directions, and possessed no little 
skill as a blacksmith. It was a never-failing source 
of wonderment to the Polynesians, to whom the black- 
smith shop possessed a great fascination, to watch the 
rapidity with which Hiram would plunge a spike be- 
neath the glowing coals of his forge, urge the fire with 
the bellows until it was sufficiently heated, when he 
drew out the white, glowing piece of iron, and holding 
it on an anvil with the tongs, would rapidly shape it 
by beating with a hammer into a knife, dagger, spear, 
or other form. Then, in order to put on it a cutting 
edge, when such edge was desired, they delighted to 
see the speed with which this was done when he held 
it against a grindstone. They would eagerly contend 
for the honor of turning the stone; because it seemed 
to them that it was a kind of magic, and that by turn- 
ing it they imagined they had something to do with 
the magic. So too, they liked to see the manner in 
which a still finer edge was placed on the article by the 
use of an oil-stone which, however, Hiram never per- 
mitted them to use. 

Another reason they liked to hang around Hiram’s 
workshop was because of the many kegs of spikes, 
great nails, or pieces of iron or steel, and the racks 
supporting great bars of steel and iron that were 

273 


s 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


stored there. They liked to feast their eyes on this 
enormous amount of wealth, just as some people take 
pleasure in visiting the vaults in any of the United 
States mints to see the piles of gold ingots. 

Among the many visitors to the forge was Mauai, 
the Polynesian, who had been recognized by Charley 
and Kooloo as one of the cannibals from the Western 
Valley of Mahinee’s island, or what Charley and Har- 
old called the Island of Captivity. Mauai was generally 
accompanied by a man that neither Charley or Kooloo 
remembered having seen before. 

Mauai looked with greedy eyes on the many kegs 
that were filled with spikes and heavy nails, as well as 
on the rods and bars of soft iron and steel hung on 
the racks. 

It will be remembered that neither Charley nor Koo- 
loo had let Mauai know they had recognized him. He 
therefore seemed to have come to the conclusion that 
he had no reason to hesitate to mix freely with the 
other Polynesians, so he frequently visited Hiram’s 
workshop. 

Do you know the man who is always with Mauai, 
Kooloo ? ” inquired Charley one day. I don’t like 
his looks. I don’t think I’ve ever seen him before.” 

Kooloo don’t know man,” was the reply. ‘‘ Ask 
Waheatoua.” 

On being questioned Waheatoua informed Charley 
that the man was Otu, a cannibal, who lived on a large 
island about five days to the east northeast of Hard- 
ing Island; that, like him, all his people were canni- 

274 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


bals and spent much of their time in making raids on 
the neighboring islands. 

‘‘ Otu bad man,” said Waheatoua. “ When Mahi- 
nee come next time Waheatoua will tell him Otu is 
here.” 

“ But had you not better tell the doctor and the 
captain now?” inquired Charley. 

“ Yes, tell him now, but tell Mahinee too. These 
people more afraid of Mahinee than of the captain or 
the doctor.” 

The captain and the doctor were somewhat alarmed 
when informed of the presence of Otu on the island 
and his friendship for Mauai; but when they talked 
the matter over with Waheatoua he assured them that 
the great fear the people of the many cannibal islands 
in that neighborhood had for Mahinee would effect- 
ually prevent their coming to Harding Island. 

“ These people,” continued Waheatoua, know that 
Mahinee is the great friend of the King of the Island 
of the Great White Priest,” as they called Harding 
Island. Afraid to come to island. That would make 
Mahinee their enemy.” 

'' But, Waheatoua,” said the captain, “ suppose they 
send an expedition to the island without Mahinee 
knowing it? ” 

On hearing this remark, Waheatoua smiled in a 
manner showing how little he believed such a thing to 
be possible. 

‘‘ The great Mahinee knows everything,’’ he said. 
‘‘ Some of his men on the water all the time, and so 

275 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


carry him news. If he hear of war canoes going to 
the island of the Great White Priest, Mahinee will 
follow and kill them all, heap quick.” 

“ I guess Waheatoua is right, captain,” said the 
doctor. ‘‘What do you think?” 

“ That there is no reason for our worrying about 
the matter any more,” was the reply. 

Lulled into a feeling of false security by the opinion 
of Waheatoua, which by the way was an honest 
opinion, the captain and the doctor gave themselves 
no further anxiety about either of the two men, and 
continued their pleasant work in the preparation of the 
book. 

But, in the meanwhile, Hiram began to miss various 
small objects from the forge and blacksmith shop. 
The missing articles consisted mainly of spikes, nails, 
and pieces of soft iron and steel, and rods and bars 
of the same material. Then too, some of his carpenter 
and cabinet-making tools also began to disappear. 

One day, after he had made this discovery, while he 
was visited by the “ Great Three,” turning to Charley, 
he said: 

“ Mr. Charley, there be thieves among the brown 
men who come here from the settlement. I mostly sus- 
pect two fellows, Mauai and Otu. Now I ax ye and the 
other boys to help me watch these fellows when they 
come here. Ef we kain’t stop this thievery soon there 
won’t be much left.” 

The boys willingly promised to do what they could 
to catch the thieves. Like Hiram, they were convinced 
276 



In a fezv moments terrified screams 
were heard from them 


Page 277 


I 


I 


t 

> 


V 




t 





i. 


4 


4 


I 

A 



I 


\ 


I 


. 4 

'•I 


» 



» 


I 

« 


«-• ■ 1 I ■' 

. ) 




• • 


} ^ ‘ 






( 


♦ 


A 


• « 


4 


: 


I 








I 


t 

» 


I 



< , 





r 


* 






r 


I 



• % 




I 


I 







\ 



I 


I 


\ 


* • 



i 



9 



P 


I 


1 . 




I 


« 



I 


9 





I 



-. •' * 


'A 



« • > 


s » 





' i 



t . 


t 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


from the suspicious manner in which Mauai and Otu 
acted that they were the ones to be especially watched. 
But the men were on their guard and, although when 
they left some of the smaller articles disappeared with 
them, they were not able to detect them in the theft. 

“ We’ll have to try some other plan,” said Charley. 
“ I think I will try an electrical trick on them. I’ll 
ask the doctor to loan me his induction coil. Then 
we’ll fix its circuit in a keg of spikes so that any one 
handling the spikes will receive a strong shock. We’ll 
leave this barrel in some out-of-the-way place, and 
when the thieves attempt to help themselves they’ll 
get such a shock that they will not be able to avoid tell- 
ing on themselves.” 

When Hiram learned of Charley’s plan he was much 
pleased, and said : 

Thet be a capital plan, Mr. Charley. You fix thet 
ere trap and ye’ll catch Mauai and Otu unless I am 
very much mistaken.” 

The result was as Hiram had expected. Shortly 
after Charley had set the electrical trap the two men 
came into the place, while Hiram pretended to be busy 
with the three lads in another part of the shop. Char- 
ley had placed the trap in connection with a keg of 
spikes in a part of the shop where it was not easily 
seen from where Hiram was working. As soon as 
the two men saw this they moved stealthily toward 
the keg, and in a few moments terrified screams were 
heard from them. They had both taken hold of an 
electric conductor and had received such a powerful 
277 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


discharge through their hands as to make their fingers 
convulsively grip the conductor. They were unable, 
therefore, to loosen them. 

Without letting the men see what he was doing, 
Charley, after permitting them to receive the discharge 
for a full half-minute, opened the circuit, thus releasing 
them. Without saying anything they rushed from the 
place and disappeared in the direction of the settle- 
ment. 

‘‘ I reckon,” said Hiram with a grin, ‘‘ thet those fel- 
lers won’t trouble us agin.” 

But Hiram was mistaken. It is true that neither of 
the men put in another appearance around Jackson 
House while anybody was around, but a few nights 
afterward, when every one was asleep, they were 
wakened by the fierce barking of Rompey and Flora. 
This alarm was heard both at Jackson House and at 
the schoolhouse. Hastily dressing they ran out of 
doors and found Hiram’s workshop had been set on 
fire. There was no doubt as to the fire having been 
kindled for the purpose of burning the building, for 
they could see a pile of wood had been placed against a 
portion of the wall and ignited. 

Fortunately, owing to the warnings of the dogs, they 
were able to put out the fire before it had done any 
great damage. When this was done, Hiram, who at 
once began to examine the stores of iron and steel, 
exclaimed : 

‘‘ The thieves hev taken three kegs of nails and 
a-many pieces of iron and steel.” 

278 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ Let us try to catch them, doctor,” said the captain. 

Are Waheatoua and Kapiau here?” 

The individuals mentioned came forward with a 
grin. 

“ I want you to help me catch the thieves,” said the 
captain. 

‘‘Heap glad to help you,” said Waheatoua; “and 
Kapiau will help too. Wait a while,” and both men 
ran rapidly toward the settlement and disappeared in 
the darkness. In about five minutes they returned, 
saying : 

“ Canoes of Mauai and Otu not at settlement. Man 
there say they see these men go off in their canoes 
toward Harding Channel and row in that direction,” 
pointing toward the east of the northeast. 

“ Did you hear whether they had anything in their 
canoes? ” 

“ Man not certain,” was the reply, “ but think had 
heap big load in them.” 

“ We will take our largest boat and follow them,” 
said the captain to the doctor. 

Unfortunately it took nearly an hour to load the 
boat with water and food and collect their firearms and 
go with Waheatoua and Kapiau in the direction in 
which the fugitives had disappeared. But though they 
rowed hard and continued their pursuit until late the 
next afternoon, they were unable to get any sight of 
the fugitives. 

This was a great disappointment to both the cap- 
tain and the doctor, because they feared if these fel- 
279 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


lows were able to make their escape without being 
punished with such a great amount, of what to them 
was the most valuable booty, it would be easy for them 
to persuade the people of the cannibal islands to make 
an invasion of Harding Island. 

Waheatoua did not share their fears. He had such 
strong faith in the power of the great Mahinee that he 
did not for a moment believe the cannibals would dare 
to invade an island like the Harding Island, that con- 
tained people from the islands of both the great Mahi- 
nee and of Otoa. 

And then too, Waheatoua had another argument 
to show that he was correct, and this he advanced with 
great pride. It was that both Mahinee and Otoa had 
sent word to all the neighboring islands that Harding 
Island, or, as they called it, the Island of the Great 
White Priest, was taboo, and was not to be invaded at 
the peril of their punishment. 

They also consulted Maro as to the danger of an 
invasion of the island being made by people brought by 
Mauai and Otu. Maro had no hesitation in express- 
ing his opinion that there was no danger whatever of 
an invasion. 

Maro,” he said, “ has heap warriors here. Ten and 
ten and ten. Good fighters. No one come to the 
Island of the Great White Priest. Afraid of Maro. 
Still more afraid of Mahinee and Otoa.” 

It was in this way that the dread of the captain and 
the doctor of an invasion gradually disappeared, and 
they again set about their ordinary work. 

280 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XXIV 

A Boat Voyage for the Sake of Science 

Two full weeks had passed without anything happen- 
ing, so that the doctor and the captain began to think 
that what Waheatoua and Maro had said concerning 
the influence of the great Mahinee in keeping Harding 
Island from invasion was correct. Indeed, they were 
now so convinced that Maro with his thirty warriors, 
aided by the fighting force of the island, would be able 
to repel any invasion, that they finally decided to leave 
the island for a while with Waheatoua, Kapiau, and 
Jack and visit a number of distant coral islands where 
they could see for themselves the peculiarities of forma- 
tion they wished to study. 

Before leaving, the captain appointed Mr. Clarkson 
to act during his absence as King of the Island, and 
notified Maro that he was to obey him in whatever 
he commanded to be done. Charley and Harold 
wished to accompany them, but the captain told them 
that as much as he would be pleased to have their com- 
pany, yet he preferred they should remain on the 
island. 

While I do not believe any trouble will occur dur- 
ing our absence,*’ said the captain to Charley, ‘‘ I am 
so sure both you and Harold would be of great help 
281 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


to Mr. Clarkson and Hiram in an emergency, I would 
like you to remain.” 

“ Yes, Charley,” said the doctor laughing, “ if any- 
thing unusual should turn up while we are away I am 
sure the ‘ Young White Priest ’ will be able to frighten 
the cannibals so that they will leave the island without 
cooking and eating its inhabitants.” 

All right, doctor,” replied Charley, laughing at 
the idea of his protecting the island ; “ I’ll do the best 
I can, but I don’t believe that either you or the cap- 
tain have any idea there will be trouble here. If you 
had I am sure you never would leave us exposed to 
danger.” 

I reckon ye be right thar, my lad,” said Hiram, 
who had heard the above conversation. 

As the boat passed through the Harding Channel 
on its long voyage toward the east-northeast, the 
stay-at-homes gave them three rousing cheers, while 
the captain shouted : 

You may look for us in three or four weeks.” 

When the boat got too far off for any conversation 
to be kept up, the party on the shore climbed to the top 
of Parker Cliffs, from which they watched them with 
their glasses until the boat disappeared below the east- 
northeastern horizon. 

“ I hope,” said Hiram, when this had occurred, 
“ that nothing will go wrong here while they’re away; 
and yet, Mr. Charley, I be free to confess thet I’ll be 
mighty glad when they git back. I don’t like them 
fellows Mauai and Otu getting away so slick with their 
282 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


booty, rm afeered their friends will argy that ef 
two fellers like them could steal so much and not git 
caught, why couldn’t they do the same, especially ef 
they raised a big crowd and came all to once like.” 

“ Oh, come, Hiram,” said Mr. Clarkson, “ it is not 
so bad as that. We have Maro and his warriors here 
to protect us, as well as the boys at the school, besides 
our own party. And then, Hiram,” he added, don’t 
forget the big guns you have put here on the cliffs as 
well as at Jackson House. When it comes to fight- 
ing,” he continued, “ I am sure you will do your part 
in driving away the invaders.” 

“ Hiram Higgenbotham will do all he kin,” was 
the reply ; yet he’ll be glad all the same when them 
five people come back agin. The captain and the doc- 
tor be much more than fighting men. They kin fight 
with their heads, and plan things better nor we kin.” 

The absence of that small party of five made a great 
difference in the little community of white people on 
Harding Island. At Jackson House their absence was 
especially felt; for at this place there were now only 
Hiram and his wife, and Oliver and Frank. The ab- 
sence, however, was also felt at the school. It is true 
that there were only three absent there; but since two 
of these, the doctor and the captain, were the heads of 
the school, their absence was felt keenly. While the 
out-of-door classes had to be discontinued as far as 
natural history was concerned, yet Mr. Clarkson was 
able to interest the boys in the phenomena of the at- 
mosphere, the different forms in which its invisible 
283 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


moisture became visible as clouds, dew, rain ; its winds, 
etc. This was something all the boys could under- 
stand, and many pleasant hours were spent out of doors 
in this study. 

There was something that Mr. Clarkson was just 
beginning to do that attracted the attention of all 
the people of the island, especially those at the settle- 
ment. Like any other missionary to a race of people 
who spoke an entirely different language from his own, 
it was necessary not only to learn the language of 
those to whom he wished to preach, but also to teach 
them to read their own language. He hoped in this 
way to make it possible for them to read the Bible, so 
that they could find for themselves what God wished 
them to do. To do this the people, of course, had first 
to learn the letters of the English alphabet, and here 
Charley’s illustrated alphabet and method of instruc- 
tion became of great value. 

All this was a great undertaking. In the first place 
he was obliged to make a thorough study of the Poly- 
nesian language. He had commenced this before leav- 
ing England for Harding Island, and had made great 
progress; for he had the advantage of the teaching 
of Doctor Parsons. Having become familiar with 
this language, he had commenced a translation of some 
portions of the Bible he wished them to read. This 
was, indeed, a very difficult matter, and had it not been 
for the help Doctor Parsons had given him he could 
not have taken up the work he was doing until he had 
put a greater amount of study on it. 

284 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


He had brought with him from Europe a printing- 
press and several fonts of type, and was ready to 
begin setting up a number of chapters of the New Tes- 
tament. He had already taught the people, with con- 
siderable difficulty, how the words of their language 
could be written or printed in the letters of the English 
alphabet. 

On the day when the first impression was to be made 
the people from the settlement crowded into Hiram’s 
workshop, where the printing-press had been set up, 
anxious to see the wonderful magic the white people 
were about to perform. They watched Mr. Clarkson set 
up the first page of type, place it in the bed of the press, 
and move an ink-roller over the face of the type. Then 
when a sheet of white paper was placed on the type, 
they eagerly watched Hiram as he turned the wheel 
of the printing-press and brought pressure between the 
paper and the inked type. 

It seemed very wonderful to them, when the paper 
was removed, that markings could be seen on its sur- 
face that some of them were able to read. 

‘‘ Great magic ! ” some of them exclaimed. ‘‘ Teach 
us to read that?” several eagerly inquired of Mr. 
Clarkson, and were much pleased when he promised 
to do so. 

But the greatest of this magic was yet to be seen. 
Somehow or other they thought that pieces had been 
removed from the face of the type, so that, of course, 
it would now be impossible to make other markings on 
the paper. But when they saw that on more ink being 
285 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


placed on the type, impression after impression could 
be made, their astonishment found vent in words of 
praise for the people who could do so magical a thing. 

They were still more delighted when Mr. Clarkson 
promised that, as soon as the ink on the paper had 
dried, he would give each of them one of these sheets to 
look at. 

It was now nearly three weeks since their friends 
had left in the boat. So far nothing had been heard 
from the two thieves. They were beginning to believe 
their fear of trouble was unfounded. Hiram, how- 
ever, had not changed his opinion in the least. On the 
contrary, one day Charley found him busily engaged 
in cleansing the big guns, two of which, as has already 
been mentioned, had been placed on Parker Cliffs, and 
the other in front of Jackson House. 

It will be remembered that one of these was a large 
and the two others smaller guns, but that even the 
smaller ones were much larger than the make-thun- 
der ” Hiram had taken from the wreck of the pirate 
vessel in the Sargasso Sea of the Pacific, and with 
which he had gained among the savages so great a 
reputation as a gunner by putting a ball through two 
of the cannibals of the Western Valley on Mahinee’s 
island, during the fight that had taken place when 
Charley, Harold, and Marbonna were captured. 

One day Hiram said to the ‘‘ Great Three : 

“ Mr. Charley, I wish ye, Harold, and Oliver would 
come with me to Parker Cliffs. I want to teach ye how 
286 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


to load and fire the big guns. A feller never kin tell 
what may happen here, and it might be some day, ef 
those cannibal fellers should come to the island, and I 
warn’t around, ye would like very much to know how 
to load and fire.’' 

‘‘ I’d like to know how to manage the guns, Hiram,” 
said Charley ; “ but you’re not really afraid of canni- 
bals, are you ? ” 

“ Mr. Charley,” said Hiram gravely, I acknowl- 
edge that I be afeered. Even ef they don’t come here, 
ye might as well larn how to load and shoot, might 
ye not ? ” 

“ Oh, as for that,” said Charley, I’d like very much 
to learn, and I’m sure Harold and Oliver would.” 

** We would for a fact,” said the boys in chorus. 

When they reached Parker Cliffs they found that 
Hiram had thoroughly cleaned the guns, so that on 
looking into the muzzles they could see the light re- 
flected from their thoroughly cleansed walls. He then 
showed them how to load, ram in the wadding, and in- 
sert the balls, that were also held in place by wadding. 

“ It may be,” said Hiram, “ thet sometimes ye may 
wish to put two balls in the guns, or even three,” he 
"said, ef there be room.” 

He then taught them how the priming is placed and 
the cannon fired. He was not satisfied, however, with 
this', but had them discharge the guns themselves. The 
loud reports soon brought the people from the settle- 
ment who, crossing the lagoon in their canoes, stood 
watching the trials. 


287 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


After the guns had been fired, to the great pleasure 
and admiration of the natives, whom they could hear 
talking about what would happen if the cannibals 
should invade the island, they returned to Jackson 
House, where they were met by Mrs. Higgenbotham, 
who said : 

‘‘ ’Iram, I want you to show me ’ow to load and fire 
that gun that stands in front of the 'ouse.” 

‘‘ Why, Mandy ! ” exclaimed Hiram in astonishment ; 
‘‘ why do ye wish to do that? Ye surely don’t think 
we’d let a woman fight fer us.” 

‘‘ It don’t make any difference, ’Iram, what ye hex- 
pect,” was the reply. ‘‘ Mandy ’Iggenbotham don’t 
intend letting any cannibalmen come around here. 
Suppose they should come when you wasn’t here, and 
only little Frank and Mandy was in the ’ouse. What 
could a woman like me do? No, ’Iram,” she con- 
tinued, “ ye must show me ’ow to load and fire that 
gun, and also ’ow to use revolvers. Yes, and leave 
them with me.” 

‘‘ I reckon, Mandy,” said Hiram, with marked ad- 
miration, “ ye be right in this thing ez ye ginerally be. 
I’ll show ye now how to load and fire the gun ez well 
ez how to load and use pistols.” 

If any of those fellers come around here,” said 
the good lady, ‘‘ and try any tricks with Frank and me. 
I’ll blow them up. I don’t mean to let the property of 
the captain and the doctor, which ’as been left in our 
charge, be destroyed or carried away.” 

Mrs. Higgenbotham proved an apt scholar. She 
288 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


soon learned how to manage the gun and pistols in a 
manner that surprised both her husband and the boys. 

Frank, who, of course, was around when this prac- 
tice with the cannon was going on, greatly enjoyed it, 
exclaiming : 

This is better than the Fourth of July, Ollie. It 
makes more noise, don’t it ? ” 

Hiram did not seem satisfied with what he had al- 
ready done in the way of getting ready for invaders. 
He got out the pistols and rifles and cleansed them, 
giving them to the boys. He also did the same for 
Kooloo, Otoa, and some of the more intelligent of the 
native boys. 

The pistols greatly pleased Kooloo and young Otoa, 
who spoke about what they would do should an inva- 
sion be made. 

‘‘ Kooloo and Otoa use make-thunders,” said Koo- 
loo, “but will not throw away war clubs and spears. 
Know how to use them better than make-thunders.” 


T 


289 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XXV 

Invasion of Harding Island by the Cannibals 

Another full week passed without anything unusual 
occurring on the island. Convinced that Hiram had 
permitted his fears to get the better of his understand- 
ing, Charley and his companions began jollying him. 

“How about the cannibals, Hiram? exclaimed 
Charley one Saturday morning, when Hiram had re- 
quested the three boys to meet him on Parker Cliffs, 
where he had gone in advance to look after the guns. 
“ Don’t you think it looks,” he continued, “ as if they 
had been told of the dreadful things you intended to do 
to them should they dare come to Harding Island ? ” 

“ It’s a great chap you be for jollying, Mr. Charley,” 
said Hiram good-naturedly. “ Ef it be thet Hiram 
Higgenbotham hez made a mistake about them thiev- 
ing cannibals going off and bringing a lot of others 
like them to come here and make way with us, then 
he’s more’n glad. Howsumever,” he continued, “ I 
must say, Mr. Charley, I reckon there be plenty of 
time yet fer them to come here.” 

“ But, Hiram,” said Harold, “ aren’t you forgetting 
how long it has been since Mauai and Otu got off? 
It’s now over three weeks, so it don’t seem to me as if 
there is much chance for their comihg.” 

290 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ Fm not denying it hez been a long time, Mr. Har- 
old,” said Hiram, “ but Fll not conceal from ye that I 
fear their coming ez much, ef not more now, ez I hev 
at the fust. Don’t fergit, Mr. Harold, thet the captain, 
the doctor, and the others will hev reached some of 
them islands long ago. Now, don’t ye see how them 
fellers, ef they hear that some of our fighting men 
hev gone away from Harding Island, will be all the 
more likely to come here ? ” 

“ I hope they don’t come,” said Oliver. ‘‘ It would 
be bad enough for me, but to think of my little brother 
being eaten it is terrible.” 

“ So you think you’d not mind being eaten, Oliver,” 
said Charley in his jollying tone, ‘‘ if it were not for the 
little kid ? Now, Oliver,” he said, putting on one of his 
serio-comic looks, I don’t agree with you. I would 
not like to be eaten even if I was alone on the island. 
When I die I hope my friends will give me decent 
Christian burial. I’m free to confess that I don’t like 
the idea of being buried in the pot-bellied stomach of 
some of those fellows like Mauai and Otu. Think 
what a shock it would be to my ghost if I came back 
to earth, after being killed and eaten, if the fellow who 
ate me had placed a big card over his stomach bear- 
ing this inscription, ‘ Sacred to the memory of Charles 
Young Pleasanton, one of the first settlers of Harding 
Island, who was buried here during a feast on Twin 
Island No. i ! He was invited to this feast and came 
reluctantly.’ ” 

Oh, shut up, Charley,” cried Oliver and Harold, 
291 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


shuddering ; what a horrible idea ! Let’s stop talking 
about such frightful things.” 

Hiram looking at Charley grinned, and said: 

‘‘ Wall, Mr. Charley, you sartinly be a jolly lad. 
Perhaps your way of looking at this may be better nor 
mine. I only hope ye be right and thet them fellers 
will never come here.” 

During the latter part of the conversation, Harold, 
possibly to get the awful picture called up by Charley 
out of his mind, had been looking through his glasses 
at the ocean toward the east-northeast, suddenly ex- 
claimed in a startled tone: 

‘‘ Quick, Charley, look through your glasses over 
there,” he said, pointing in the direction in which he 
was still examining. Unless I am very much mis- 
taken there are a great number of canoes heading this 
way.” 

Charley at once looked in the direction indicated by 
Harold, when he exclaimed: 

You are not at all mistaken. Here, Hiram,” he 
said, handing his glasses to him, ‘‘ look, and tell me 
what you see.” 

After looking long and earnestly through Charley’s 
glasses, Hiram exclaimed : 

“Ye be right, my lads, they be canoes coming this 
way; and, moreover, they be not the canoes of Mahinee 
and Otoa. They be much smaller and there be more 
of ’em.” 

“ How many men would you say were in them, 
Hiram?” inquired Harold. 

292 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ Ez fer ez I kin see,” Hiram exclaimed, there be 
perhaps one hundred and thirty more or less.” 

As the canoes came nearer they could be seen with 
sufficient distinctness to enable them to estimate 
roughly that they contained from six to eight men 
each. 

“We must warn our people of this,” said Charley. 
“ How can we best do it, Hiram? Some of us should 
remain here to man the guns.” 

“ Write a note to Mr. Clarkson at the schoolhouse, 
Mr. Charley,” said Hiram, “ and one to Mrs. Higgen- 
botham at Jackson House, telling ’em the cannibals 
be coming. Tie one of them to the neck of Rompey 
and the other to Flora, and let Mr. Harold and Mr. 
Oliver take them in the boat to the other side of Hard- 
ing Channel, and send them to the school and Jackson 
House, and then come back here with the boat.” 

The dogs seemed to understand the service that was 
required of them; for when the notes were fixed to 
their collars they ran toward the places to which they 
had been told to go. 

When the boys returned they found that Hiram was 
greatly pleased with something. 

“ We be in luck, my lads,” he said. “ I kin see Maro 
a-coming here with all his boats.” 

“ He could not have got the news from either Mr. 
Clarkson or Mrs. Higgenbotham, could he? ” inquired 
Oliver. 

“ Ef course not, my lad,” replied Hiram. “ I hev 
noticed thet fer a week and more Maro hez been 

293 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


trainin’ his men fer fightin’. He brings them in their 
canoes to this part of the island. I reckon,” he added, 
** that like me he is beginning to think he might as well 
git ready fer a big fight.” 

As the boats on the lagoon approached Parker Cliffs, 
Maro saw Hiram and the boys, who signaled him to 
approach. This he did, commanding the other canoes 
to await his return. 

Informed of what they had seen, Maro was greatly 
excited, and when Hiram handed him the glasses, he 
exclaimed : 

Heap boats from islands of Mauai and Otu. Bad 
men; all cannibals. Too many men for Maro to drive 
away,” he added, as he began rapidly counting the 
number of boats. 

'' But we must fight them, Maro,” said Charley. 

Maro and his men will fight them, but heap too 
many. Maro only ten and ten and ten and there,” 
pointing to the approaching boats, “ ten and ten and 
ten and ten and many more.” 

“ But we’ll fight them for all that, Maro, won’t we ? ” 
said Charley excitedly, fearing he would wish to sur- 
render. 

The answer he received was in one way quite satis- 
factory, although far from assuring in another way. 

“ Maro and his men must fight, but they will all be 
killed and eaten.” 

It will be remembered that Hiram had sent one of 
the letters to Mr. Clarkson at the schoolhouse, and 
another to Mrs. Higgenbotham at Jackson House. 

294 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Charley, who had remained with Hiram and had been 
naturally very much excited, said to Hiram when the 
boys returned: 

I don’t think the dogs will find Mr. Clarkson at 
the school. When I left this morning I heard him 
planning to take all our boats and those of the peo- 
ple at the settlement to spend the day at the Maddox 
Clearing in weeding and hoeing.” 

“ That’s so, Charley,” said Harold ; “ I remember 
myself now.” 

“ Wall, my lads,” said Hiram, it kain’t be helped. 
We’ve done what we could to let ’em know.” 

Do you know, Harold,” inquired Oliver anxiously, 

whether Frank went with them? ” 

“I’m not certain,” was the reply; “but I heard 
Frank ask Kooloo and Otoa whether they wouldn’t go 
with him to the swimming-pool.” 

“ Then he is with them.” 

“ There kain’t be a-many left at the settlement or at 
our place,” said Hiram anxiously. “ I hope nothing 
will happen to Mandy. But,” he added, “ we kain’t 
leave the cliffs. We must stay here to fire the guns. I 
must fust find out from Maro fer sartin whether he be 
sure these men air cannibals.” 

When asked this question, Maro replied without 
hesitation that he was sure the boats came from the 
islands of Mauai and Otu. 

“ Maybe,” he said to Hiram, “ you speak to these 
people with make-thunders and tell them not to come 
here.” 


29S 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


'' I’ll do that,” replied Hiram, and then turning to 
the boys, he said : My lads, git ready to bring powder 
and balls. We’ll do the best we kin with these guns to 
sink some of them canoes.” 

Hiram,” said Charley, “ would it not be well for 
Maro to take his men and boats and hide in the grotto ? 
Then they could take the best way to surprise some of 
them.” 

When Charley’s plan was explained to Maro he 
grinned, and said : 

Young White Priest heap good fighter. Maro 
will hide in grotto with canoes and fight with some of 
the cannibals’ canoes when all are not here. But may- 
be,” he added, you tell big make-thunders to speak 
loud to them.” 

The plan being agreed on Maro took his boats and 
men into the grotto. 

As the fleet of cannibals’ boats approached nearer to 
the island all doubts about the number of the invaders 
disappeared. 

‘‘ They have fully a hundred and twenty-five fight- 
ing men with them,” said Charley to Harold. 

I wish the captain and the doctor were here,” said 
Harold. 

“But they are not here, Harold,” was the reply; 
“ so we must do the best we can without them.” 

The cannibal canoes were now near enough for 
Hiram to risk shots from both of the guns that had 
been brought to bear on the water. Hiram took care- 
ful aim with the largest gun at the middle of the ap- 
296 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


preaching boats. The idea that anything could be 
thrown against them from such a distance never en- 
tered the minds of the savages who, therefore, made 
the mistake of keeping their canoes closely bunched 
together. The gun was discharged with a roar, the big 
ball crashing into one of the canoes, sinking it. 

They could not certainly see whether any of the peo- 
ple had been killed, although Charley declared that of 
the six who had been in the canoe only four were lifted 
out of the water into one of the others. In a similar 
manner the discharge of the smaller gun sank another 
canoe. 

Instead of learning the dangerous fighting character 
of the party they were attacking, and either avoiding 
bunching of their canoes or withdrawing beyond fir- 
ing distance, what had happened only enraged them; 
so giving a war shout they urged their canoes still 
closely bunched together rapidly toward the island. 

Now Hiram’s forethought of having taught the boys 
how to load and fire bore excellent fruit ; for the Hard- 
ing Island gunners managed to keep up a fire from both 
guns, with the result of destroying two additional 
canoes, thus making the enemy the weaker by four 
canoes, and probably from six to eight warriors. 

They could distinctly recognize the two thieves, 
Mauai and Otu, as the canoes entered the Harding 
Channel, who were apparently in command of the ex- 
pedition. By this time they had apparently recognized 
the dangerous character of the make-thunders; for, 
instead of sending a party to the top of Jackson Cliffs 
297 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


to attack them at the guns, they turned all their canoes 
in the direction of Twin Island No. i, except four that 
moved rapidly in the direction of the settlement, the 
schoolhouse, and Jackson House. 

‘‘ They be going fer more of the spikes and bits of 
iron,” said Hiram. 

'' I hope all the people are away from Harding 
Schoolhouse,” said Charley. 

“ I hope Mandy gits off safe,” said Hiram. 

A bend in the shore cut off a view of the settlement 
from the cliffs. They could, however, see the higher 
parts of Jackson House and the schoolhouse and dor- 
mitories above the tops of the cocoanut palms that sur- 
rounded these buildings. 

They could see from their positions on Parker Cliffs 
the main body of canoes land at the eastern end of 
the island, near the swimming-pool. The warriors 
rapidly left the canoes and marched in a body hurriedly 
toward the Maddox Landing by the way of the north- 
ern shore of the island, disappearing in the grove of 
trees. 

While watching these people they heard the boom 
of another gun in the direction of Jackson House. 

I reckon thet be Mandy gitting in her work. 
Wall, she sartinly be a brave woman.” 

‘‘ I hope she hits some of them,” said Charley ; and 
I wouldn’t wonder if she did, for I remember what a 
good shot she is. What do you think about it, 
Hiram?” 

I reckon them fellers hev a fust-class chance of 
298 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


being struck. Fer a woman, Mandy’s the best shot 
with a gun I hev ever seed.” 

But whatever was happening at Jackson House, 
there was evidently some one there capable of loading 
as well as firing; for several successive discharges of 
the gun were heard. 

Exciting as was the fact that fighting was going on 
at Jackson House, they were still more interested in 
observing something on the shore of Twin Island 
No. I nearest the swimming-pool. A few only of the 
savages had been left in charge of the canoes. It was 
a splendid chance for Maro to attack the small guard 
and, capturing all their canoes, leave them marooned 
on the island. 

Nor was Maro slow to recognize the advantage. 
He was soon seen stealthily taking his canoes to Twin 
Island No. i. He reached the island without being 
seen by the men in charge, who were watching the 
march of their companions toward Maddox Clearing. 
There was a fight not only with the guard but also with 
a detachment from the rear of the marching column. 
In the severe fight that took place Maro lost some five 
of his men, but not without inflicting still greater loss 
on the invaders. 

Maro succeeded in getting off with all the invaders’ 
boats; not, however, before fully one-third of the in- 
vaders had reached the place. 

It appeared to Hiram and his party, who were 
watching the events from the top of Parker Cliffs, that 
Mauai’s men contemplated plunging into the water 
299 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


and swimming to the boats, but some shots from both 
guns sent into them from the cliffs caused them to 
change their minds, so again forming in marching 
order they retreated rapidly in the direction of the 
Maddox Clearing. 


300 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XXVI 

Frank^ Kooloo^ and Otoa Captured by the 
Cannibals 

But we must now go back to the same Saturday morn- 
ing during which the events recorded in the preced- 
ing chapter had taken place. As already stated, Char- 
ley and his two chums, Harold and Oliver, had gone at 
Hiram’s request to meet him on Parker Cliffs. Mr. 
Clarkson had taken the rest of the boys from Harding 
School, together with most of the people from the set- 
tlement to the Maddox Clearing. After putting the 
people at work on the clearings, Mr. Clarkson had gone 
to the Maddox House to look after some of the vege- 
table products they had stored there. Frank had asked 
permission to go to the swimming-pool with Kooloo 
and Otoa, with whom he had become very friendly. 
The little fellow could now swim so well that Mr. 
Clarkson did not hesitate to give his consent, especially 
because Kooloo and Otoa were probably the best swim- 
mers on the island. 

‘‘ I will be through my work here in a few hours,” 
said Mr. Clarkson to Frank and his companions, 
“ when I will join you at the pool. Take lunch with 
you so that you need not return until we are all ready 
to go back to the main land.” 

301 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


As they walked toward the pool, Frank kept up a 
constant prattle with his companions, who had be- 
come much attached to him; for, like most children, 
he made pleasant company. Both brown boys were 
now able to talk in fairly good English, although they 
had not as yet learned that rtiost difficult thing in ac- 
quiring another language; i. e., the arrangement of 
the successive sentences. However, they had no diffi- 
culty in understanding what the little fellow said to 
them. 

“ Kooloo,” inquired Frank, “ when will your father 
come back here ? ” 

“ Kooloo not certain,” was the reply ; ‘‘ but think 
he come back in a few weeks now.” 

“ Fm glad of that,” said Frank. I like your 
father very much. Don’t you think the pictures he 
has on his body are very beautiful ? ” he added, re- 
ferring to the tattooing. 

My father, the great Mahinee,” said Kooloo, who 
always referred to his father in these terms, “ has very 
beautiful tattooings. Do you think that some day you 
will have them put on you? ” he inquired. 

‘‘ Fd like to, Kooloo,” was the reply, ‘‘ but the cap- 
tain and the doctor don’t want me to have them. 
But Fd like to have a lot of such pictures all the same,” 
he added. 

Frank had lately heard so much about the canni- 
bals that he now endeavored to obtain some additional 
information from his companions. 

Kooloo,” he said, “ do most of the people who live 
302 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


on the islands near Mahinee’s island eat their 
enemies ? 

‘‘ Yes, nearly all do,’’ was the reply. ‘‘ But some 
don’t.” 

“ Do your people eat their enemies, Kooloo ? ” in- 
quired Frank. 

‘‘ My people, the people of the great Mahinee, are 
no cannibals,” was the proud reply of Kooloo. 
‘‘ Never eat enemies.” 

‘‘ Are there many cocoanut trees on your island, 
Kooloo ? ” inquired the little fellow. 

‘‘ Heap cocoanut trees. Heap other trees — ^bread- 
fruit, oranges, banana, and many others.” 

‘‘ I’d like to live where I could get as many oranges 
and bananas as I could eat. But tell me, please, about 
the breadfruit trees. They must be funny trees.” 

Kooloo entered into a long description of the bread- 
fruit tree ; of how the fruit is baked, as well as of the 
many other good things that were to be found on his 
island, until Frank exclaimed, to his great delight: 

‘‘ I’d like to go to your island some day, Kooloo.” 

‘‘ Maybe the great Mahinee will ask the captain to 
let you make a visit there some time.” 

As they slowly walked in this way along the beach, 
they gradually drew near the swimming-pool. 

At this moment they heard the first discharge of the 
large cannon from the ocean side of Parker Cliffs. 

“ What is that, Otoa ? ” inquired Kooloo of his com- 
panion. ‘‘ You think Hiram seeing if make-thunder 
shoot all right? ” 


303 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ Otoa don't know," was the reply. Perhaps 
cannibals have come and Hiram is firing off make- 
thunder to chase them away." 

Frank and his companions would have been able 
to see Hiram and the boys had the cannon been placed 
on the side of the cliffs near the swimming-pool; for,* 
in their walk they had reached a place almost imme- 
diately opposite the pool. But the guns had been taken 
to the ocean side of the cliffs and were therefore 
invisible. 

A great gun was now fired the second time and 
again the third time. Suspecting that something was 
wrong they listened carefully. At last they heard the 
war cry raised by the approaching savages when an- 
gered by the death of some of their companions. Koo- 
loo cried out excitedly : 

‘‘ Cannibals come. Mr. Hiram shoot at them with 
make-thunder. Will be here heap quick. Suppose we 
climb high tree where they can’t see us? Can Frank 
climb tree to get away from cannibals ? " he inquired. 

“ Yes, Kooloo," was the reply. I can climb. Don’t 
you remember you taught me how to climb? I can 
climb to the top of a very high tree." 

The little fellow had no difficulty in getting with his 
two companions to the top of a high cocoanut palm. 
Here they hid themselves in its thick foliage, so that if 
the savages passed them when marching toward Mad- 
dox Clearing by the way of the northern shore, they 
would probably fail to see them. 

Before long they saw them coming almost directly 

304 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


toward the tree, so that Kooloo and Otoa had no diffi- 
culty in recognizing the faces of Mauai and Otu, who 
were evidently the leaders of the invading party. 

“ See, Otoa,’' whispered Kooloo, excitedly, Mauai 
great chief now. Leads cannibals. You know island 
they come from? ” 

Yes,” was the whispered reply. ‘‘ Come from 
Mauai’s island. All man-eaters. Bad men.” 

“ They’re coming this way, Kooloo,” whispered 
Frank in an excited tone. 

Don’t be frightened,” was the reply. They can’t 
see us up here in the tree unless you make noise.” 

‘‘ I will sit very quiet,” whispered the youngster. 

But they could also distinctly see from the tree in 
which they were hiding Maro’s canoes steal out quietly 
from the grotto. 

Maro heap good warrior,” they remarked. ‘‘ Steal 
away Mauai’s canoes and leave his warriors on the is- 
land.” 

When the fight between Maro’s warriors and the 
savages began, Kooloo and Otoa were about descend- 
ing from the tree to aid Maro when suddenly the fight 
was over. Maro, temporarily gaining an advantage 
before many additional men had joined his opponents, 
had retired safely, taking all the canoes with him. 

Five of Maro’s men had been slain. Instead of 
leaving these bodies, the cannibals took them on their 
shoulders and ran off rapidly with them in the direction 
of the Maddox Clearing. Kooloo said quietly to Otoa : 

‘‘ Carry Maro’s men away. Will cook and eat them.” 

u 305 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


While they were watching the men disappear with 
the dead bodies in the direction of the clearing they 
heard a discharge of a cannon from the neighborhood 
of Jackson House. 

‘‘Who firing gun at Jackson House?” inquired 
Otoa. “ No one left at settlement but old men and 
women. Who fire gun, Kooloo ? ” 

“ Kooloo don’t know,” was the reply. 

“ But I know,” exclaimed Frank. “ It’s Mrs. Hi- 
ram. Mr. Hiram showed her how to load and fire a 
gun.” 

The idea of a woman firing a gun seemed greatly to 
amuse the two lads. Nevertheless, the action called 
forth high praise. 

“ Mrs. Hiram,” they exclaimed, “ heap brave 
woman. Great warrior. Hope she hits some of their 
boats.” 

“ Mrs. Hiram can aim very straight,” exclaimed 
Frank. “ I hope she does hit some of them,” and then 
beginning to fear lest his friends should be captured, 
he turned to Kooloo and said : 

“ Please, Kooloo, let’s go at once to Jackson House. 
I’m afraid these cannibals might hurt Mrs. Hiram, and 
Mrs. Hiram is one of my very best friends.” 

“ Suppose we get down from tree,” said Kooloo to 
his companions, “ and run that way to other end of 
island,” pointing to the southern shore. “ Maybe we 
reach there before Mr. Clarkson and others go away in 
boats.” 

Descending from the tree they bent Iheir bodies to 
306 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the ground while running and, thus passing over the 
piece of open ground in the neighborhood of the swim- 
ming-pool, entered the wooded portion of the island, 
and ran rapidly toward the west. Unfortunately, while 
making their way in this direction they were seen by 
the people from the boats that had been driven away 
from their attack on Jackson House by the gun practice 
of Mrs. Higgenbotham. They were thus taken prison- 
ers, their hands bound, and they were led on a run in 
the direction of the swimming-pool and thence to the 
Maddox House by the same route as that taken by 
Mauai’s warriors. 

When captured Kooloo and Otoa remained silent. 
They knew it would be a matter of great satisfaction 
to their captors if they showed any fear. Even the 
little fellow did not appear to be greatly alarmed at 
being captured as long as he remained with Kooloo and 
Otoa. He had heard about cannibals eating people, 
but somehow or other he believed that as long as he 
was living there was no danger. It did not occur to 
him that they might kill him and eat him afterward. 

The prisoners were taken to an encampment Mauai 
had formed in the neighborhood of the Maddox House. 
He had just heard that Maro had attacked and killed 
the guard left in charge of the boats, and had succeeded 
in carrying off all of his canoes, so that they were now 
on the island without any means of escape except that 
afforded by swimming. He also learned that one of 
the canoes sent to attack Jackson House had been de- 
stroyed. Both he and Otu, who was sitting near him, 

307 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


were very angry and began upbraiding the warriors 
for permitting such a defeat. 

Wishing to pacify Mauai, his men now brought the 
five dead bodies of Maro’s warriors, and at once com- 
menced a long explanation of the brave manner in 
which some of the rear guard had returned and had 
driven Maro from the field. 

Although this was pleasant news, yet it was not 
enough, and Mauai again began reproaching them for 
permitting the enemy to capture their canoes. At this 
moment the people from the attack on Jackson House 
brought Kooloo, Otoa, and Frank as prisoners before 
Mauai and Otu. The chiefs gloated with savage joy 
as the prisoners were led before them. Their joy in 
making such important prisoners did much to make up 
for the loss of their canoes. 

“ We’ll feast to-night on dead warriors of Maro,” 
said Mauai. ‘‘ And to-morrow,” he said, turning 
fiercely to Kooloo and Otoa, “ we will eat you, Kooloo 
and Otoa. We will thus punish Mahinee, who killed 
so many of our friends in the Western Valley and made 
Mauai come to island of the Great White King.” 

But Kooloo showed no fear when Mauai thus spoke 
to him. He said boldly : 

Dare to kill and eat Kooloo and Otoa, and the 
great Mahinee and Otoa, their fathers, will not sleep 
until you, O Mauai and Otu, are caught and punished. 
And not for this only, but because you have cared not 
for the taboo each of them has placed on Harding 
Island.” 


308 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The two lads assumed, as a matter of course, that 
they would be killed. They knew, however, as indeed 
did Mauai and Otu, that neither Mahinee nor Otoa 
would rest until they had wreaked their vengeance on 
the men who had disregarded their taboo ; for, among 
these people, to set a taboo at naught is regarded as a 
great disgrace to the person placing it, and unless 
punishment is meted out to those who disregarded it 
their standing in the community is greatly lessened. 
But Mauai and Otu especially knew that if they ac- 
tually killed and ate the sons of these two chiefs neither 
they nor their people would rest until they had been 
severely punished. Therefore, Kooloo had spoken as 
already stated. 

Mauai did not appear to think it advisable to make 
any reply to what Kooloo and Otoa said. He simply 
continued speaking as if they had kept silent, and said : 

“We keep little fellow,’’ pointing to Frank, “ for 
ransom. Great White King and Miconareo glad to 
pay a big ransom for him.” 

While these exciting events had been going on the 
sounds of the cannonading had reached Mr. Clark- 
son’s ears. At first he believed that it was only Hiram 
practising with his guns. Being unwilling, however, 
to take any risks in this matter, he sent a swift runner 
in the direction of the swimming-pool, instructing him 
to learn, as far as possible, what the firing meant and 
return as quickly as possible. 

The runner succeeded in obtaining full particulars 

309 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


of what was going on. He had seen the battle taking 
place without being seen himself, and was sure that 
neither Frank, Kooloo, nor Otoa was with the canni- 
bals. He also brought word that Maro had captured 
nearly all the canoes of the cannibals. Without wait- 
ing for the result of the fighting he had succeeded in 
passing the savages as they were marching toward 
the Maddox House and gave the information to Mr. 
Clarkson without being seen. 

Satisfied that the boys had succeeded in escaping, 
Mr. Clarkson assembled his people and, hurriedly go- 
ing to the eastern shore of the island, returned safely to 
Jackson House in their boats and canoes. 

During this retreat some of his men at once spied 
the empty canoes that had been left on the southern 
shore of Twin Island No. i, near its western end. 
These boats were taken with them, so that the entire 
invading force of Mauai and Otu were left now on 
Twin island No. i without any means of leaving it 
except by swimming. 


310 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XXVII 

Feast of the Cannibals on Twin Island No. i 

But let us now return for a while to the encampment 
of Mauai’s cannibal army. The three boy prisoners 
had been brought before him and sentence pro- 
nounced on them. Kooloo and Otoa were to be killed 
and eaten the next day. In this way the cannibal chiefs 
would not only gratify their taste for human flesh, but 
what was more to the point, would wreak vengeance 
on the great Mahinee and Otoa. The little white lad 
was to be kept for a big ransom; for Mauai was sure 
the captain and Miconareo would only be too willing 
to pay well for him. The bold manner in which Koo- 
loo and Otoa had replied to the threats of Mauai had 
greatly angered him, but concealing his anger he 
motioned to some of the warriors to take the three 
boys away, and put them where they could not escape. 
While being led away Kooloo whispered to Otoa: 

‘‘ Where are they taking us, Otoa ? ” 

‘‘ Otoa don't know," was the reply. 

‘‘ But I do," whispered Frank. They are taking 
us to the Dead Man’s House," the name Frank always 
applied to the deserted cabin in which they had found 
the skeleton of John Maddox when they first came to 
Harding Island. 

311 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


They soon saw that Frank was right; for on reach- 
ing the log cabin the savages led their prisoners 
through the door that Hiram had supplied with hinges 
and set up again in its place. The palm tree was 
still standing in the ground near the center of the 
room. 

The boys were securely tied with their hands back 
of them to the frame of the wooden bedstead, that was 
still sound and strong despite the many years that had 
passed since it was first put up. When this was done 
the men left them in the room, remaining outside, how- 
ever, to watch. 

What are they going to do now, Kooloo?*' in- 
quired Frank. 

Kooloo thinks they make a great feast and cook 
and eat the bodies of Maro’s men killed in fight near 
swimming-pool.’’ 

They won’t hurt you and Otoa to-night, will 
they ? ” added the little fellow. 

“ Bad men kill and eat Kooloo and Otoa to-mor- 
row,” was the reply, unless we get away. But they 
won’t do anything to them to-night.” 

They tried to escape, but the fiber cords were too 
strong to be broken and they were unable to get at 
them to untie them. 

We must now leave the prisoners and go in 
imagination to Jackson House, the schoolhouse, and 
the settlement. Mr. Clarkson had succeeded in safely 
reaching the main island with all the boys from the 
312 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


school and nearly all the people of the settlement who 
had gone with him to the Maddox Clearing. Here he 
had confidently expected to find Kooloo, Otoa, and 
Frank, but no one had seen them. He feared, there- 
fore, that the lads had all fallen into the hands of the 
enemy. Great sorrow, not unmixed with fear, had 
fallen on every one. All knew the great danger to 
which they were exposed from Mauai and his cannibal 
army. Unless something unexpected occurred they 
knew that as soon as the enemy could devise some plan 
for reaching the main land of the island they would do 
so, and although all were ready to fight for their lives, 
yet they were almost certain that in the end they would 
be defeated, since they were so greatly outnumbered 
by the enemy. 

Mr. Clarkson keenly felt the responsibility that 
rested on him, and was busily consulting with Maro 
as to the best disposition they could make of their men, 
and how they could best guard the shore of the lagoon 
in the neighborhood of their school, so as to prevent 
the boats from being retaken by some of the cannibals 
swimming across the lagoon. 

But it was Mrs. Higgenbotham whose lamentations 
were the loudest. She was bemoaning the fate of the 
little darling, as she called Frank, who had entered so 
deeply into her life. 

I fear the black fellows ’ave made him a prisoner, 
unless Kooloo and Otoa ’ave been able to escape with 
him. Then my ’Iram ’as not come back with our three 
boys — Charley, ’Arold, and Holliver. Oh, this is a sad 

313 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


day for ’Arding Hisland. Sorrow a-plenty ’as come 
on all of us.” 

But while the good lady was loudly lamenting the 
many sad things that had occurred, one of the brown 
lads from the school came running into her room, cry- 
ing: 

'' Boat coming with Mr. Hiram and three white 
boys!” 

Rushing to the shore Mrs. Higgenbotham had much 
of her trouble rolled from her shoulders, for there 
sure enough, not in the slightest degree harmed, were 
Hiram and the three boys. 

“ ’Iram,” said his wife, I hope you have some good 
word from Frank, Kooloo, and Hotoa.” 

‘‘ Why, aren’t the lads with ye, Mandy? ” exclaimed 
Hiram excitedly. 

“ No, ’Iram,” was the reply. “We ’oped they were 
with you.” 

“ We haven’t seen them since early this morning,” 
said Charley. “ We were watching Mauai’s men from 
Parker Cliffs, and are certain the boys were not with 
them then. If they have been taken prisoners it must 
have been since we saw them marching in a body to- 
ward the Maddox Clearing.” 

“ Tell me all about the fight, Charley,” said Mr. 
Clarkson, “ so that I can form some idea as to what 
may have become of the boys.” 

Charley had about completed describing in detail 
the fight between Maro’s men and a part of Mauai’s 
forces, when Maro himself came into the room and 

314 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


gave a report to Mr. Clarkson of the battle on Twin 
Island No. i. 

When he learned that Kooloo, Otoa, and Frank were 
missing, Maro said to Mr. Clarkson : 

'' Maro send spy to encampment of Mauai. Maybe 
spy will find out and tell us whether boys are 
prisoners.” 

There were a number of native boys who had fol- 
lowed Maro into the school. When he spoke of send- 
ing a spy to Twin Island No. i, nearly all the lads 
begged he would send them on this expedition. Of 
course they knew how dangerous the mission would 
be, but did not hesitate. They were greatly attached 
to Kooloo and Otoa, the sons of their great chiefs, and 
were especially fond of little Frank. 

Maro smiled with pride at the eagerness of the lads 
to undertake the dangerous work. 

‘‘ Maro only send one. You go,” he said, pointing 
to the son of Waheatoua. “ Find out if Kooloo, Otoa, 
and the little fellow are prisoners. Then come back 
quick and let me know.” 

Some of the other lads begged Maro to permit them 
to go with young Waheatoua, so as to share with him 
the dangers of the expedition as well as its glories 
should it be successful. But Maro said decidedly : 

‘‘ Maro only send one. Perhaps spy be killed. Too 
few men for fighting to risk more than one.” 

The boy spy was sent off that night, and soon dis- 
appeared in the shadows lying between Twin Island 
No. I and the shore at Jackson House. 

315 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


There was plenty to do while waiting for the return 
of the spy. Mr. Clarkson continued his consultation 
with Maro as to the best disposition of the men. Both 
feared that an attempt would be made to retake the 
canoes by some of the savages swimming from Twin 
Island No. i in the darkness of the night. They there- 
fore set watches along the shore, and especially at the 
place where the enemies’ canoes had been moored. 

Maro appeared especially tickled with the idea that, 
although they had made efforts to kill off as nearly as 
possible all the man-eating sharks in the waters of 
Harding Lagoon, they had not succeeded. It is true 
that at first very few sharks were seen after several 
hunts had been made, but lately they had come in in 
great numbers from the ocean outside Harding Island, 
so that it was now very dangerous to attempt much 
swimming in the channel. 

‘‘ Maro’s men watch on shore for cannibals. But,” 
he added, big fellows in water,” referring to the 
sharks, ‘‘ watch better.” 

About three hours after leaving, young Waheatoua 
returned safely. The news he brought was very dis- 
quieting. Kooloo, Otoa, and Frank had been taken 
prisoners, and Mauai had announced his intention of 
killing them the next day. That night a cannibalistic 
feast was to be held. That, as far as he could find out, 
it had been determined to hold Frank for a ransom on 
the return of the captain and Miconareo. He had ob- 
tained this news while in the foliage of a large cocoa- 
nut palm he had succeeded in climbing when no one 
316 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


was looking. Of course, as he explained, he had been 
able to hear only a little now and then, so that 
they must not suppose his information was entirely 
correct. 

When Mrs. Higgenbotham heard that Frank and his 
two companions were in the hands of the savages, she 
was anxious to go in person to the island and try to 
set them at liberty. Indeed, she got very angry with 
Hiram and Mr. Clarkson when she was unable to per- 
suade them to try to do this at once. They had much 
difficulty to make her see how foolish such an attempt 
would be considering the great superiority and number 
of the enemy. 

** Now, Mandy,’' said Hiram, I must go with 
Charley, Harold, and Oliver to Parker Cliffs to look 
arter the guns. Ef ye so wish it Til leave the boys with 
ye and go alone, but I need their help.” 

‘‘ Take the lads with you. Tram,” said the brave 
lady. Your Mandy will look hafter the gun ’ere. 
I’ll do my best to kill the black men who try to land on 
this part of the island. But don’t forget, ’Iram, to take 
a lot of stuff in the boat to eat. You don’t know ’ow 
long you may be away.” 

It will be noticed that Mrs. Higgenbotham, as in- 
deed did some of the others, occasionally persisted in 
referring to the cannibals as black men, a mistake quite 
natural since the brown skins of these people appeared 
of a black color from the tattooings with which they 
were covered. 

It was after sunset when Hiram and the boys took 

317 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


their boat to the northern side of Harding Channel 
and, after carefully hiding it in Charley’s Grotto, 
climbed to the top of the cliffs, and lying down near its 
edge opposite the lagoon looked through their glasses 
at Mauai’s encampment. Fortunately the encampment 
had been placed on an open piece of ground about half 
a mile south of the Dead Man’s House. 

They had reached the top of the cliffs about the same 
time that some of the people from the encampment 
were beginning to build a number of separate fires. 

“ They be getting ready to cook the bodies of the 
poor fellers wot were killed at the fight near the swim- 
ming-pool,” said Hiram. 

They could now count five separate fires that had 
been started. 

Thet be a fire fer each body,” said Hiram to the 
boys. 

While waiting for the bodies to be roasted by the 
glowing embers, the cannibals began a war dance, at 
the same time chanting a war song. It was evidently 
some vainglorious song reciting the brave manner in 
which they had slain their enemies. After a long dance 
they seated themselves on the ground, when they 
could see some of the men who attended the fires cut- 
ting huge pieces of flesh from the bodies and handing 
them around to the men. 

The whole proceeding was so horrible that the boys 
and even Hiram shuddered while looking at it. 

‘‘ What an awful thing it is for men to devour one 
another in this manner,” said Oliver. 

318 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


But Charley was not thinking so much of what was 
happening as what might possibly happen to Kooloo, 
Otoa, and possibly even to Frank. He was a practical 
sort of a chap, and did not believe in wasting time in 
fretting when it might be used for more useful pur- 
poses. 

‘‘ Oliver,” he said, as if in answer to Oliver’s re- 
marks as to the horrible thing that was being done, 
“ that is exactly what young Waheatoua said they in- 
tended to do with Kooloo and Otoa to-morrow.” 

And might do also to my little brother,” said 
Oliver. 

'' Yes, Mr. Oliver,” said Hiram, “ they might fer a 
fact.” 

Boys,” said Charley, you remember how far 
the Dead Man’s House is from where these fellows 
are holding their horrible feast? What do you say to 
our going there in our boat, trying to get into the 
house without being seen, when we can cut the bonds 
of our friends and return with them? We can leave 
Hiram here to look after the guns.” 

‘‘ Ef ye think, Mr. Charley, ye kin leave Hiram Hig- 
genbotham here while ye make a brave attempt to set 
them boys in the Dead Man’s House free, ye don’t 
know him.” 

“ But, Hiram,” said Charley, some one must re- 
main here to fire the guns should the cannibals attempt 
to reach the mainland of Harding Island by swimming. 
I know, Hiram,” he added, “ that no one could for a 
moment think that you were afraid of going with us 

319 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


in the attempt to free our friends. If you say so, I’ll 
stay here with the guns and let you go in my place.” 

‘‘ I reckon ye be right, Mr. Charley,” said Hiram. 
‘‘ While I would be glad to leave ye here and go in 
your place, yet I haven’t the headpiece ye hev for 
planning. Tharfore, I say, go with the boys. Do your 
best to get on the island without being seen, and may 
God give ye help in safely bringing back them boys 
with ye.” 

Taking their boat from the grotto below, they were 
soon passing through the waters of Harding Channel 
to those of the Harding Lagoon. The moon was shi- 
ning so brightly that it would have been foolhardy to 
have gone directly toward the island. Fortunately, the 
moon was sufficiently low down in the eastern sky to 
cause the cliffs to cast a dark shadow on the waters of 
the lagoon. 

Rowing their boat in the shadow of the cliffs as 
quietly as possible, they were able without being seen to 
reach a portion of the lagoon that was considerably to 
the north of the place where the cannibals’ feast was 
going on. 

“ Now,” said Charley, we must take the risk of 
rapidly crossing to the island. We can only hope we 
will not be seen.” 

But the cannibals were so intent on the feast and 
were making so much noise that the boat crossed the 
lagoon unobserved. Mooring it in the shadow of a 
clump of cocoanut palms that grew almost on the 
side of the Harding Lagoon, they silently approached 
320 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the Dead Man’s House. Charley planned to leave one 
of their number in the boat. 

** Should the cannibals seize the boat while we are 
gone,” said Charley, “ we would be trapped on the 
island.” 

Both Harold and Oliver wished to accompany 
Charley, but agreed to leave the matter to him. 

“ I guess, Oliver, Harold and I are more accustomed 
to working together. I will choose you to remain in 
the boat until we return.” 

The two boys crept stealthily toward the Dead Man’s 
House. They were careful to avoid, as far as possi- 
ble, their bodies casting any shadows in the moonlight. 
This was not a very difficult thing to do since, as al- 
ready stated, the house was surrounded by a dense 
grove of cocoanut palms. 

They at last reached a position from which they 
could distinctly see the hut and its surroundings. The 
door was half open. No sentinels were in sight. 
Charley, whispering to Harold, said : 

Let me go ahead, Harold. One will make less 
noise than two. If there are any sentinels near the 
house they will be less apt to see one than two.” 

Harold agreed to this without any argument. He 
had so much confidence in Charley’s judgment he was 
satisfied to do as he had been requested. 

It was an anxious moment while Charley was creep- 
ing stealthily toward the Dead Man’s House. If there 
were any sentinels about the place the chances were 
that he would be caught, and they knew that if taken 
321 


V 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


prisoners while attempting to release the others he 
would almost certainly be killed. 

Fortunately there were no warriors near the house. 
All three prisoners were awake. When, therefore, 
Charley quietly entered the room, Kooloo at once 
recognized him despite the partial darkness, and said in 
a whisper to his companions : 

Charleyo, the great white priest, come. He will 
cut our bonds and let us go with him.” 

“ Charleyo brave white priest,” said Otoa. Don’t 
fear to come here among the cannibals.” 

“ O Charley,” said Frank in a low tone, I am so 
glad you are here. Where is Ollie ? ” 

‘‘ Near here,” said Charley, while rapidly cutting 
their bonds. Come, let us go. The sentinels may 
come back at any moment.” 

“ Sentinels gone to get cooked flesh to eat,” said 
Kooloo. ‘‘ Kooloo heard them talking.” 

They went quietly but rapidly to the boat, endeavor- 
ing as before to walk as nearly as possible in the 
shadows of the trees. They rejoined Harold and were 
soon seated in the boat with Oliver. 

The cannibals were so intent on their feast that no 
notice had been taken of the escape of their captives. 

On reaching the entrance to the grotto they found 
Hiram anxiously awaiting them. Shaking them 
heartily by the hand, he said : 

‘‘Ye sartinly be great boys. I reckon them canni- 
bal fellers will be surprised when they larn how ye hev 
treated them.” 


322 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ When ‘ The Great Three,’ ” said Charley, in his 
laughing tone to Hiram, “ make up their mind to do 
anything you can be sure that if it is possible it will 
be done.” 

“ I believe ye, my lad,” said Hiram, who entertained 
the highest regard for Charley. 

Kooloo and Otoa were deeply sensible of the great 
service the three boys had rendered them. They knew 
that beyond doubt their death would have taken place 
some time during the next day; for when cannibals 
once get a taste of human flesh they are apt, like wild 
animals, to hunger for more. 

‘‘ Kooloo never forget what his half-brothers, Char- 
leyo and Harealdo and their friend, Olivero, have 
done. When the great Mahinee hears of it he will be 
their friend more than ever.” 

“ And so will the great Otoa,” said young Otoa. 


323 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XXVIII 

The Pursuit. Hiding in the Grotto 

The rescuers and the rescued sat talking for some 
time about what had happened, when Hiram said to 
Kooloo and Otoa: 

‘‘ I reckon, my lads, ye understand that there is much 
work to be done yet. Them cannibal fellers will soon 
discover that ye hev disappeared, and will kick up a big 
row. I think it likely that ez soon ez day breaks they 
will begin to build a raft, or will do something to cross 
over to this part of the island. Now ye kin be sure 
there’ll be a great fight between them and our people. 
I don’t know jist how they’ll do it, or where, but thet 
they’ll manage to do it somehow or other I’m sartin. 
Now, there be too few fightin’ men with Mr. Clarkson 
and Maro fer you two fellers to stay here, so I think 
ye’d better let Mr. Harold and Mr. Oliver take ye and 
the little feller in the boat across the channel when 
ye can leave him with Mrs. Higgenbotham, and then 
report to Mr. Clarkson at the settlement.” 

Even before Hiram stopped talking Kooloo spoke : 

Kooloo says Yes. He and Otoa will go with little 
fellow to Jackson House, and then to Mr. Clarkson and 
Maro. What you say, Otoa ? ” he said, addressing his 
companion. 


324 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ Otoa will go with Kooloo to fight the cannibals,” 
was the reply. 

As they were leaving, Hiram said to Kooloo : 

When ye see Mr. Clarkson tell him not to be sur- 
prised like ef he hears the guns. Ef we see any of the 
cannibals trying to swim across the lagoon we’ll fire 
at ’em.” 

Entering the boat with Harold and Oliver, Kooloo 
and his companions were quickly rowed across Hard- 
ing Channel, when they started at once for the settle- 
ment and Jackson House. Watching their companions 
until they disappeared among the trees, Harold and 
Oliver took their boat back across the channel, and hid- 
ing it in the grotto climbed to the top of the cliffs and 
joined Hiram and Charley, whom they found lying at 
the western edge of the cliffs examining the encamp- 
ment through their glasses. 

The cannibals had evidently just discovered the es- 
cape of the prisoners ; for they could be seen excitedly 
running to and fro in the neighborhood of the Dead 
Man’s House. Then they saw that two men were be- 
ing dragged from the neighborhood of the house to the 
camp-fires. 

Of course, in the dim light of the early morning, they 
could not distinguish the different objects with any 
certainty. By the aid of their imagination, however, 
they could fairly interpret what they actually saw 
through their glasses. When, therefore, they saw two 
men dragged before the largest of the camp-fires they 
inferred that it was the fire at which Mauai was sit- 

325 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


ting. When, moreover, after a brief pause they saw 
the man at the fire make a motion to some in the 
crowd around him, and two men came and dashed 
their clubs on the heads of the men, they inferred, and 
indeed correctly, that the man who had ordered the 
execution was Mauai, and the men killed were the 
two sentinels who had been so derelict in their charge 
of the prisoners as to permit them to escape. 

‘‘ They have killed the sentinels,” said Charley to 
his companions. 

“ Ye be correct, Mr. Charley,” said Hiram; and ef 
I beant mistaken they intend cooking and eating ’em.” 

As far as they could see by their glasses, Hiram was 
correct in this belief; for two of the men approached 
the dead bodies and apparently began cutting them up. 

‘‘It be an awful sight,” said Hiram; “but from 
our way of lookin’ at it, we hev no reason to worry, fer 
there be now two cannibals less fer us to fight against.” 

“ I thought it was only their enemies that cannibals 
ate, Hiram,” said Harold. “ Those fellows appear not 
to hesitate to eat their friends. How do you explain 
this?” 

“ These men be low-down fellers even fer canni- 
bals,” replied Hiram. “ Like ye, I alius thought it was 
only their enemies they ate, but now I know better.” 

“ Hiram,” said Charley, after a long silence had 
fallen on his companions from the nature of what they 
had been looking at, “ how far will the big gun carry ? ” 

As Hiram heard the question, he looked at Charley 
and chuckled: 


326 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ So, Mr. Charley, ye too hev been thinking of thet 
thing. Wall, I reckon she’ll carry ez fer ez the place 
whar those people are sitting, waiting fer another 
awful meal. Be I right when I think you wish to know 
ef the gun’ll carry a ball ez fer ez their camp-fires ? ” 

“ Yes,” said Charley. “ Don’t you think it might be 
well to try to hit some of them ? ” 

“ I hev been thinking thet from the very fust, my 
lad,” was the reply ; “ but when I didn’t know ef any 
of our people were over thar I was afeered to fire. 
Now I know thet Mr. Clarkson and all who went with 
him are back at Jackson House, and the three boys air 
no longer there, I think we’ll open fire on them.” 

“ Then, Hiram,” cried the boys, “ we’ll load both 
guns, aim them at the cannibals, and fire them off 
together; for, of course, as soon as they find that the 
guns can hit them from where they are they will run 
off to some other place ! ” 

The guns were loaded with two balls each, and after 
being carefully aimed at the center of the encampment, 
were fired so almost instantaneously that the sound of 
the explosion seemed to have come from a single gun. 
From the dust raised by the balls they could see they 
had struck almost in the center of the encampment. 
Evidently considerable damage had been done ; for the 
cannibals could be seen running in terror from the 
fires. A few remained, but they were so still that they 
had evidently been killed. 

“ Load up agin, my lads,” said Hiram. It sartinly 
do seem to be an awful thing to kill them poor devils 

327 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


from here, but we hev no chise about it. Ef we don’t 
kill ’em they’ll kill us.” 

I don’t believe those fellows will give us another 
shot at them, Hiram,” remarked Charley. ‘‘ See,” he 
continued, they have all disappeared.” 

Thet may be so, Mr. Charley,” replied Hiram; 
“ but we hed better load up so ez to be ready to fire the 
fust chance we git.” 

While waiting on the top of Parker Cliffs watching 
through their glasses they walked to and fro between 
the lagoon and the ocean in order to keep warm. It 
was now near daybreak, and as is so commonly the case 
in tropical climates the air had grown chilly. While 
doing this when, on one occasion, just as they had 
reached the eastern side of the cliffs they could see a 
glow of reddish light appear above the eastern horizon. 
Another day had just began to dawn. None of them 
spoke, but all were wondering whether this was to be 
their last day on earth. They felt sure that unless 
something quickly turned up they would probably 
never see the light of another day, so they silently 
looked across the expanse of the great ocean on the 
east. As the sun rose higher both sky and ocean 
were painted with the glorious gold and crimson tints 
of the sunrise, and with the light came courage man- 
fully to meet the dangers by which they were threat- 
ened. 

It was a beautiful sight. As they were Christian 
people they could not help feeling that the great Father 
who ordereth all things would not fail to look after 
328 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


them. Without saying anything, Charley knelt on the 
ground and began silently praying to God to look after 
them and deliver them from evil, and his companions 
followed him in silent prayer. 

Their prayers offered up, they rose and resumed 
their walk between the eastern and western edges of 
the cliffs. The sun rose higher in the heavens, and a 
flood of light made it easy for them distinctly to see 
both the ocean and the lagoon. At this time, Harold, 
who had been examining with his glasses the site of 
the cannibal encampment, exclaimed : 

Look through your glasses, Charley. There are 
six cannibals slowly creeping toward the camp-fires. 
Here, Hiram,” he added, ‘‘ take my glasses. You can 
see them distinctly.” 

Shall we fire at them, Hiram ? ” inquired Oliver. 

I think not, my lad,” was the reply. Unless I be 
mistaken them fellers hev come only to carry away 
their dead. I think we should allow them to do that” 

‘‘All right,” said Harold, “but let’s watch and see 
what they do.” 

Looking at the encampment in the full light of a 
tropical day was very different from doing this in the 
uncertain light of the camp-fires and the moon. Now 
they could see, beyond any doubt, what was taking 
place. The cannibals had each taken from the neigh- 
borhood of the fires the body of a man who had been 
killed by the balls from the guns. These six bodies, to- 
gether with the bodies of the two sentinels that had 
been killed by order of Mauai, were probably more than 

329 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


they could eat; for they began cutting off their heads 
and throwing them in the water of the lagoon. They 
could see one of the heads thus discarded did not reach 
the lagoon but remained on the shore close to the 
water. 

When this was done the men picked up the remains 
of the bodies and carried them toward the Maddox 
Clearing. Our friends, with the exception of Harold, 
had already had enough of the awful sight. There 
was something about the scene that appeared to pos- 
sess for him a horrible fascination. He kept his glasses 
sharply focused on the shore of the lagoon where these 
parts of human bodies were thrown into the waters. 

‘'Look through your glasses, Charley!” he cried 
excitedly. “ As soon as the heads reach the water 
they are seized by the sharks! Look,” he added ex- 
citedly, “ you can see their fins above the water ! 
There are so many sharks that they are fighting for 
the heads.” 

“Ye be right, Mr. Harold,” said Hiram grinning; 
and there be as ye say a-many of them. It sarves 
them cannibals right thet the sharks be come; fer ef 
they had not thrown parts of the poor fellers in the 
water thar wouldn’t be so many of them. I tell ye 
what, my lads,” said Hiram, “ my shipmates hev al- 
ways told me thet these man-eating sharks kin smell 
human flesh fer miles off. I suppose they hev come 
in through the channel shortly after the fightin’ begun. 
Them cannibals would think nothing of swimming 
across the lagoon, but they don’t dare try it now.” 

330 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The sun had now been up for some time, and since 
they had kept watch all night they were now tired and 
very hungry. Going to their boat in the grotto, they 
took from it part of the food Hiram’s wife had put up 
for them, and leaving the rest in the boat again climbed 
to the top of the cliffs and sat down to eat near the 
western edge. 

While eating, Hiram, turning to Charley, said : 

‘‘ Mr. Charley, didn’t I hear ye tell the doctor the 
other day that when ye and Mr. Harold went arter- 
ward to the Parker Cliffs ye hed found a path by which 
ye could git from the top into the room Maddox had 
used when he fust came to the island ? ” 

'' Yes, Hiram,” was the reply. “ Looking over the 
side of the cliffs at this place we found a narrow path 
that led down from above. I wouldn’t like to take this 
path during the night, for one could easily fall over the 
edge into the waters below, but it is easy enough dur- 
ing daylight if one only knows where it is.” 

‘‘ Then, Mr. Charley,” said Hiram, '' suppose ye 
show us now how we kin git thar.” 

‘‘ What’s the use of going there now, Hiram? ” in- 
quired Harold in surprise. “ Won’t it be time enough 
for that when the cannibals reach us? ” 

My lad,” was the reply, '' we’d all better larn how 
to git into thet room. While we won’t stay in it, it 
might happen thet thar will be reason fer our wishing 
to find the place quicklike when we’re not together.” 

That’s so, Hiram,” said Charley. '' Come, fol- 
low me. I’ll show you how to get there.” 

33 ? 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


When this was done they again climbed to the top 
of the cliffs by the way of the path. There were still 
no signs of life to be seen on Twin Island No. i. 

“ Do you suppose they have given up trying to get 
here, Charley? ” inquired Oliver. 

“ I do not,” was the reply. I think they have sense 
enough to know that somehow or other they must put 
a stop to the firing of the guns. Just how they will do 
this I do not know, but I think they will manage to get 
here.” 

“ I agree with Mr. Charley,” said Hiram. I think, 
my lads, we hed better divide ourselves into two 
parties. Mr. Charley and Mr. Harold kin watch on the 
northern end of the cliffs, while Mr. Oliver and I will 
watch the entrance to the grotto on the Harding 
Channel.” 

Hiram’s plan was adopted. The two parties took up 
positions at the extreme northern and southern ends 
of the cliffs. It was agreed that occasionally Hiram or 
Oliver should climb to the top near the channel, where 
they could get a better view of anything tliat might be 
going on on Twin Island No. i. 

But let us now see what was happening at the can- 
nibal encampment near Maddox House. As Charley 
had foreseen, Mauai was bright enough to understand 
that something must be done quickly in order to stop 
the firing of the guns from Parker Cliffs. He believed 
the magic of the white men was so great that they 
could kill them at any distance, so that they would not 

332 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


be safe on any part of the island. He, therefore, com- 
manded twenty of his men to cross the waters of the 
Harding Lagoon at a part of the northern shore, back 
of the Maddox House, where they could not be seen 
from the cliffs. 

This proved to be dangerous work, for out of the 
twenty men who had been detailed for this purpose 
four were devoured by the sharks while crossing the 
lagoon. 

As already stated, a knowledge of the details of the 
discovery of Charley’s grotto had been thoughtlessly 
given to the people at the settlement. Since Mauai and 
Otu were living at the settlement at that time they 
knew, among other things, the position of the little 
room near the top of the western edge of Parker Cliffs. 

The plan of attack laid out by Mauai, though sim- 
ple, was clever. He commanded his men to proceed 
along the northern shore of the mainland where they 
could not be seen from Parker Cliffs. When they 
reached the northern end of the cliffs they were to 
divide, half of them were to creep along the lagoon 
shore to the southern part of the cliffs, near Harding 
Channel, and the rest to scale the cliffs at their northern 
extremity. In this way they believed it would be im- 
possible for their enemies to escape. 

The men sent to the southern part of the cliffs had 
been detected by Hiram and Oliver without themselves 
being seen. Hurriedly hiding the boat they had again 
entered the grotto, and lighting a candle made their 
way along the left bank of the main stream and its 
333 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


tributary, and had safely reached the rock room in 
which they had found traces of Maddox. 

Charley and Harold were not so fortunate. The 
cannibals had succeeded in reaching the top of the 
cliffs from the side of the ocean and had seen them. 
The boys, however, saw them in time to escape. 

‘‘ Follow me, Harold,” said Charley, running in an 
opposite direction from the entrance to the under- 
ground room in the cliffs. 

“ Why, Charley,” said Harold in surprise, though 
following him, you are running away from the en- 
trance.” 

I know what I am doing, Harold,” said Charley. 
“ We must try to fool these fellows.” 

“ You’re right as usual, Charley,” said Harold. 

You can see ahead much further than I can. Go 
on. I’ll follow you.” 

Charley gave the cannibals a long run ; for he had 
the advantage of knowing the surface of the cliffs 
thoroughly. He was able, therefore, eventually to 
double on his tracks and reach the entrance to the un- 
derground room without being seen by them. Here 
he found Hiram and Oliver awaiting him. 

They quickly told one another of their experiences. 

My lads,” said Hiram gravely, ‘‘ we be in a wery 
bad place. I reckon it won’t be long afore the fellers 
on the top of the cliffs discover the entrance, and the 
fellers what hev entered from the channel will be 
coming this way. Listen,” he added, ‘^ye kin hear 
them running about below there.’* 

334 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Hiram,” said Charley, “ I think we had better leave 
here and try to find a better refuge.” 

Charley’s proposition was so sensible that it was at 
once agreed upon. Leading the way, he and his com- 
panions made their way toward the ocean side to 
another room, somewhat like the one they had left. 
They found that it also was provided with a window or 
opening through which they could obtain a good view 
of the great ocean. 


33S 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XXIX 

The Fight in the Grotto 

On reaching the room on the eastern side of the cliffs, 
Charley and his companions only gave themselves a 
short rest, for they recognized that their position was 
attended by many dangers. With sixteen determined 
men hunting for them the probabilities of soon being 
found were excellent. After a brief rest, Hiram said : 

‘‘ My lads, let’s see ef we kin think of eny plan to 
keep these man-eaters from coming here easylike from 
the grotto.” 

The room to which they had gone, like the one they 
had left, was only an extension of the main grotto. 
The opening at its window let in light that could readily 
be seen for a considerable distance by any one in the 
grotto. It would, therefore, naturally be a place their 
enemies would especially be apt to visit. They had, 
however, this in their favor, the place was partially 
shut off by a number of stalactitic columns that were 
sufficiently close together to give them protection for a 
short time. 

Seeing the advantage this peculiarity of the room af- 
forded, Charley at once suggested that they look for 
something they could use for closing the spaces between 
the columns, so they would be the better able to pre- 

336 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


vent their enemies from entering the room in this 
direction. 

“ Ye be right, my lad,” said Hiram. ‘‘ Look around 
and see ef there be any stuff we kin use to fill the spaces 
between them.” 

A short distance from the spaces they wished to wall 
up were a number of broken stalactites that would serve 
excellently for the purpose. After several hours’ hard 
work they succeeded in piling up enough of this mate- 
rial in the open spaces to make it dangerous for the 
enemy to attempt to enter by climbing. 

‘‘I wonder what threw down the stalactites?” ex- 
claimed Harold who, as we have seen, was of an in- 
quiring turn of mind, always wanting to know the 
reasons for things. “ Do you think it could have been 
done by the explosion that opened the grotto for us at 
Harding Channel? ” 

I don’t know,” said Charley. “ The force of that 
explosion might have been sufficient to do this, and so 
possibly may have been the firing off of our guns. I 
think, however,” he added, it was most probably the 
earthquake shock that formed the Harding Channel. 
I noticed many fragments of stalactites lying around 
on the floor of the grotto. But it don’t matter how they 
came here; they have helped to make this place less 
dangerous than it would have been.” 

The work of barricading the entrance being com- 
pleted, they sat down for a short rest. 

“ Charley,” inquired Harold, while they were rest- 
ing, didn’t you tell me the other day that you and 
w 337 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Hiram had stored an extra quantity of powder and 
balls for the guns in another part of the grotto ? ” 

“ Why do you ask, Harold ? ” 

‘‘ I was thinking we might make a kind of mine with 
one of the canisters of powder and put it in the path 
they would use in coming here, and explode it with a 
slow match.” 

Thet be a wery good idee, Mr. Harold,” said 
Hiram. ‘‘ I’ll go and git a few cannisters of thet ’ere 
powder.” 

‘‘ No, Hiram,” said Charley, ‘‘ I am young and can 
go more quickly than you.” 

“ But, Mr. Charley, suppose ye met the cannibals? ” 

“ Well, Hiram,” said Charley smiling, ‘‘ I might 
say the same thing of you. I’ll go and do my best not 
to be seen. No,” he added, when Harold and Oliver 
wished to share the danger with him, “ better let me go 
alone.” 

They had hidden the extra canisters in the lower 
part of the grotto, at some distance from where they 
had placed their principal supply. Since the barricaded 
room was near the top, and the place at which the 
powder had been placed was near the lower end of the 
grotto, there was a considerable slope or inclination 
between the two places. Charley’s path therefore led 
downward for much of the way. He did not dare light 
a candle. He knew he could reach the lower portions 
of the grotto as soon as he found the bank of the un- 
derground stream. 

At first he was guided entirely by his knowledge of 

338 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


direction. In this way he was able at last to reach the 
side of the main stream when he followed it, guided by 
the sound of running water. Before long, to his great 
surprise, he found that he could discern the objects 
around him. 

I don’t understand this,” he said to himself. 
“ Where does the light come from ? I must find out 
before I go any farther.” On looking around he soon 
saw a number of small openings extending through the 
roof of the grotto, probably to the top of the cliffs; 
for he was still in the upper portion where the distance 
to the top of the cliffs was not very great. 

At first Charley was puzzled to understand why he 
and his companions had not seen these openings when 
they first explored the grotto. At last he came to the 
conclusion that it was because they had examined the 
cave with lighted candles, and indeed he was correct 
in this conclusion. 

Aided by the dim light Charley soon reached the 
place where the extra store of powder for the guns 
had been left. Selecting two canisters and a small coil 
of fuse he at once started to rejoin his companions. 

There was a portion of the bed of the main stream 
where the water had completely disappeared in an un- 
derground channel. This portion was situated in a 
place where the path sloped at a steep grade for nearly 
fifty feet. It was so steep here that, loaded as he was 
with the two canisters, he found it difficult to reach 
the top, and this was made all the more so because 
the ground was wet and slippery. 

339 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


People differ greatly in their powers of observation. 
Some will pass by the most unusual objects without 
apparently seeing them ; others, on the contrary, permit 
very few things to pass unobserved. I think I need 
not tell my readers that Charley was a close observer. 
He had noticed when passing the upper portion of this 
slope while on the way to get the powder, that for a 
considerable distance from the top, where the inclina- 
tion was less steep, many stalactitic columns had been 
broken, and the fragments lay spread over the ground 
in such a way as to make progress difficult. From the 
great number thus thrown down, Charley was confi- 
dent that their breaking up had been caused by the 
earthquake shock that formed the Harding Channel. 

As he reached the top of this steep ascent on his 
return he had rested a moment, for the weight of the 
powder tired him. While thus resting his quick ear in- 
formed him that the cannibals had discovered him. 
He could hear their stealthy footsteps rapidly approach- 
ing the lower part of the inclination. It was too dark 
to see them distinctly, but in a few moments they had 
reached the bottom of the incline and were rapidly 
mounting it. He now had no doubt that he had been 
seen ; for he could now hear them urging each other on 
with the statement that one of their enemies was only 
a short distance ahead. They were now near enough 
to permit him to count eight shadowy forms making 
their way up the steep path. 

Now if Charley had lost his judgment, and because 
he had a start on his pursuers had attempted to escape 
340 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


by running, he would probably have been caught. But 
he was too cool-headed to make any such mistake. He 
remembered the steep slope and the pieces of stalactitic 
columns at the top of the slope, and therefore deter- 
mined to roll the stones down and thus prevent the 
cannibals from reaching him. 

It will be like a game of tenpins,” he said to him- 
self, as he began rolling piece after piece of the stalac- 
tites down the steep incline. At first their downward 
motion was slow, but increasing in speed they soon 
rushed down the incline so rapidly that they swept two 
of the men off their feet, while the others with fearful 
cries rushed away from the dangerous place toward 
the Harding Channel entrance. 

Picking up the powder Charley went on at a rapid 
pace, and soon rejoined his companions in the East- 
ern Cliff Room. Charley’s account of how he had es- 
caped was received by his companions with great satis- 
faction. His account appeared especially to tickle 
Hiram. 

Ye sartinly be a great feller, Mr. Charley!” he 
cried. I allow thet them cannibals will hev to git up 
early ef they wish to catch ye napping. But did ye 
notice, Mr. Charley, what the lads here hev helped me 
do while ye were away ? ” 

Yes,” was the reply. I see you have cleared out 
a path to the room by piling the blocks on each side 
so that if those fellows come to attack us they will be 
apt to take the path before reaching the room. Here, 
I suppose, you intend placing the mine.” 

341 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The quickness with which their plan had been un- 
derstood by Charley caused Hiram to chuckle. 

''Ye sartinly kin see things quicklike, Mr. Charley,” 
he said. " Thet’s just what we intend to do. And 
now,” he continued, " I’ll fix one of the canisters ye 
hev brought and put a piece of fuse to it.” 

" But, Hiram,” inquired Harold, " if they see the 
slow match burning won’t they put it out? ” 

" We’ll hev to take our chances on thet, my lad,” said 
Hiram. " We must put the powder fur enough off so it 
won’t blow us up, and to do this we hev to use a long, 
slow match. But I don’t believe them fellers know wot 
a slow match is. Besides,” he added, " we will hide 
it as much as we kin.” 

When everything had been arranged to their satis- 
faction regarding the mine, Hiram informed Charley 
that they had been examining the side of the cliffs in 
their window. 

" I be wery sorry,” he said, " to tell ye thet there be 
a path leading from this room to the top of the cliffs 
thet be even better nor the path leading from the West- 
ern Room. Ef them fellers diskiver this path we may 
be attacked on both sides.” 

It was clear to Charley on looking out of the open 
window that what Hiram said about the path was cor- 
rect. It would be easy by its aid to pass from the cliffs 
to the room. 

The sides of the cliffs rose in a sheer verticle height 
from the rocks on the shore of the ocean to the window 
of the room. 


342 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


‘‘ There’d not be much life left in a feller ef he fell 
down thar,” said Hiram. 

“ There would not, indeed,” replied Charley. 
“ Well,” he continued, “ if they try to enter by the 
window they must take their chances.” 

Fearing the enemy had placed some of their men 
on the cliffs above to watch for them, they did not 
think it prudent to try to reach the further end of the 
path. Nor would it be safe to leave the little room and 
wander through the grotto, since the enemy might be 
guarding it from the outside. They were compelled 
to sit quietly in the room. 

While there they made two discoveries, neither of 
which was difficult to make. One was that they were 
very thirsty and the other that they were very hungry. 
They had been hard at work for most of the day, and 
it was now late in the afternoon. They knew there 
was plenty of water to be had in the stream, but it was 
not prudent to go after it since the savages were bright 
enough to know that this need would arise, and would 
probably keep a watch at the nearest water, waiting for 
some of them to visit it. 

Shortly afterward Oliver made a valuable discovery. 
While peering into the northern side of the room he 
heard the sound of water trickling, and making a more 
careful examination discovered a small stream of clear, 
cold water pouring down toward the grotto. They 
had no difficulty in obtaining from it plenty to quench 
their thirst, and this they found made their hunger all 
the easier to bear. 


343 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


They had now been in the Eastern Room for over 
two hours since Charley rejoined them. During this 
time their enemies had not been idle. Indeed, they had 
formed a plan of attack that was more ingenious than 
would perhaps have been expected from savages. They 
had again divided their forces, and having satisfied 
themselves that the white people were still in the East- 
ern Room — for they had stealthily approached near 
enough to see the rude attempt they had made to block 
up the door — they kept guard over this door from a dis- 
tance until the party from the cliffs had discovered the 
entrance to the room through the window. An attack 
was then simultaneously made from opposite directions. 

Here they come, my lads ! ” cried Hiram. “ Mr. 
Charley, you and Mr. Harold watch the doorway and 
fire the mine when ye think the explosion will best 
reach them. Mr. Oliver and I will fight the fellers 
when they try to enter through the window.” 

And now the four people in the little room began a 
fight for their lives. Had this fight been left to mere 
animal strength it could only have had one ending; 
for they were outnumbered four to one. Eight were 
attacking them from the side of the grotto and eight 
were attempting to enter by the window. 

There is a great difference when people have the 
forethought to plan their battles before they actually 
begin. The four white people had been able to foresee 
just what had happened. They were therefore ready 
to meet it. Charley managed to fire the slow match so 
that when most of the enemy, in their eagerness to be- 
344 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


gin the fight, crowded together through the path Hiram 
and the boys had prepared for them, there was a loud 
explosion that killed three of the men and so frightened 
the others that they ran shrieking in terror to the en- 
trance at the lower part of the grotto. They were not 
cowardly men, but to them the explosion of the mine 
was something entirely new. There was no gun or 
make-thunder they could see. Evidently a great evil 
spirit had suddenly burst from the ground and had 
slain some of them with its fiery breath. This was cer- 
tainly a new kind of magic of the white people that 
not even the bravest could be expected to face. 

The fight at the entrance from the grotto had been 
short, but thanks to the explosive force of the canister 
it had been effective. In the meanwhile, the party at- 
tacking from the cliffs in their eagerness to be the first 
to enter the window, had crowded together so that they 
were endeavoring to make their entrance at the same 
time. A ball from the revolvers in the hands of Hiram 
and Oliver sent two of them crashing downward from 
the top of the cliffs, while a blow from Hiram’s cutlass 
sent the third man after him. They could hear the 
bodies dash against the rocks at the bottom of the 
cliffs. Here again fear drove the attacking party off. 
It seemed a new and awful kind of magic to kill them 
by simply pointing their fingers. 

It was most awful work at which they had been 
employed, but it was necessary work; for, well they 
knew what their fate would be if they were over- 
powered by their enemies. 

345 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The battle over they rested awhile until Charley, 
turning to Hiram, said : 

Hiram, let us see whether any of the men who were 
blown up by the mine are still living. If they are we 
ought to see what we can do for them.” 

“ All right, Mr. Charley,” said Hiram. ‘‘Ye be a 
tender-hearted lad, and I aren’t sartin but thet I agree 
with ye.” 

An examination of the bodies showed them that 
death had been almost instantaneous. Not knowing 
how long they would be obliged to stay in the cliff 
room, they passed them through the window and threw 
them over the cliffs onto the rocks below. 

“ And now, my lads,” said Hiram, “ we’ll stay here 
till night sets in, when we’ll take our boat and try to 
git back safely to Jackson House. We hev done what 
fighting we could safely from here, and they’ll need 
our help in the fight that is sure to come.” 

“ Hiram,” said Harold, “ won’t you let me go to the 
boat to bring the rest of the lunch we left. I’m awfully 
hungry.” 

“ I’m afeered, Mr. Harold,” said Hiram, “ thet it’d 
not be safe fer ye to go now. Some of them fellers 
might be lyin’ around waiting fer us. Kain’t ye wait 
a few hours longer until we git ready to go to Jackson 
House in the boat?” 

“ I can wait if you wish it, Hiram,” was the reply; 
“ but I’m awfully hungry and I don’t think there would 
be any risk.” 

“ All right,” said Hiram; “ I’ll go with ye.” 

346 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


No,” said Charley. I’ve already been there once 
to-day and know the way. Let me go with Harold. 
We’ll get the lunch and come back, and after we eat it 
we’ll wait here until it is time to start for Jackson 
House.” 


347 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XXX 

Charley and Harold Prisoners in the Dead 
Man's House 

As the lads made their way quietly down the grotto 
toward the entrance, Harold said : 

“ ril be mighty glad, Charley, when we start to- 
night for Jackson House. Won’t it be fine to get back 
there again. This having to kill people is awful.” 

'' It certainly is, Harold,” was the reply. But, 
as Hiram says, we have no choice.” 

“ How I wish the captain and the doctor were back 
here,” said Harold. ‘‘ Though you and Hiram have 
managed all right. Uncle Arthur is so splendid at 
planning things, and the doctor is such a great fighter. 
Don’t you wish they were here, Charley? ” 

Of course, I can’t help wishing they were here. 
But I would like to have Mahinee and Otoa come with 
their warriors. They would best know how to meet 
and drive away the cannibals.” 

Perhaps they may come,” was the reply. Re- 
member what Maro said about the chances of Mahi- 
nee and Otoa hearing if an expedition left any of the 
islands for Harding Island. Now this expedition of 
Mauai and Otu was probably big enough to make no 
little talk. They may therefore have heard of it.” 

348 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Fve been thinking of that/’ was the reply, “ and 
would not be surprised if they turned up now almost 
any day. I am sure they will come at once when they 
do hear of it.” 

“ So am I,” was the reply. ‘‘ I have been thinking 
what may happen to-morrow. I imagine, as Hiram 
says, that by that time the fellows on Twin Island No. i 
will have found some way of attacking the settlement, 
the schoolhouse, and Jackson House. Do you believe 
Maro and his men can drive them back if an attack 
should be made, Charley ? ” he asked anxiously. 

'' If our forces receive no help,” was the reply, “ I 
fear we will be beaten.” 

But then, Charley,” argued his companion, ‘‘ think 
of how many have been killed.” 

“ I have not forgotten that,” was the reply. I have 
counted them up again and again, but still, since there 
were probably one hundred and twenty-five men who 
landed on the island, they greatly outnumber us, so 
that in a regular fight there would seem to be but 
little doubt we would be defeated.” 

Talking in this manner they approached the place, 
near the entrance of the grotto, where they had hid 
their boat, and were about taking from it the food that 
had been left there when a number of cannibals, who 
had seen them coming and had hidden back of the boat, 
suddenly sprang upon them and securely binding their 
hands forced them to get into the boat, and following 
them rowed across the lagoon to Twin Island No. i. 

Both boys now understood the language of the Poly- 

349 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


nesians sufficiently well not only to know what was 
said to them, but also to reply in the same language. 
Their captors were greatly elated with the prisoners 
they had taken. The fame of the two lads had reached 
their island, so that they knew what was done by them 
there. They felt sure their prisoners were of such 
importance that their chief, Mauai, would be much 
pleased. They said to the boys mockingly : 

“ Great White Priests big fighters, but we bigger 
fighters and have taken you. Mauai, chief, heap glad 
to see you.” 

The only answer Charley thought it worth while 
giving to the men was to put on a fierce look and, 
pointing to himself and Harold, cried out : 

‘‘ Taboo, taboo. Beware what you do to great 
taboo.” 

The dreaded word taboo greatly alarmed the men 
who said nothing, but urged the boat toward the island 
as rapidly as they could, and although this work was 
clumsily done, since they were accustomed to the pad- 
dles of canoes and not to the oars, they at last reached 
Twin Island No. i, and mooring the boat near the 
Dead Man’s House, hurriedly led their prisoners be- 
fore Mauai and Otu. 

Their captors made no mistake when they counted 
on their chiefs being greatly elated when they saw their 
prisoners. Both Mauai and Otu knew the high es- 
teem with which the lads were held not only among the 
white people of Harding Island but also among those 
of the settlement. They knew that both were great 

350 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


white priests, and believed they possessed the power 
of magic and command over evil spirits much greater 
than that of any of their priests. It was a great tri- 
umph to have them in their power. Thinking to ter- 
rify them by threats of what they intended to do, they 
said in the Polynesians’ language: 

“ Young White Priest great, but Mauai, Otu, and 
their warriors greater. Can kill you now as you and 
your people have killed so many of us.” 

Charley, who knew that the slightest show of fear 
would be fatal, looked fiercely at Otu and cried : 

‘‘ Taboo, taboo. Ask your warriors how we have 
already killed many of them by our magic. Remember 
that not only the great Mahinee and Otoa have said 
we are taboo, but that the gods of Mahinee’s island as 
well as those of your island, Mauai, have declared 
us to be very great taboo, or taboo-taboo. Beware 
what you do, or we will call on the gods to send a 
terrible punishment to any of you who dare to injure 
us.” 

It was fortunate for the boys that the Polynesians 
are exceedingly superstitious. From different sources 
they had heard again and again of the wonderful 
things the great white priest, Charleyo, had done on 
the island. As is generally the case with stories that 
are passed on from mouth to mouth, these reputed do- 
ings had lost nothing by repetition. They therefore 
feared the white lads would bring some dreadful pun- 
ishment on them, so that when Mauai heard Charley 
say that they had already killed many of their warriors, 

351 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


he inquired eagerly about what had happened, how 
many were killed, and whether there was any magic in 
the killing. 

Now there were two reasons why Mauai’s warriors 
were willing to acknowledge the wonderful magic 
power of the white lads. In the first place, they thor- 
oughly believed that all that had happened to them 
while on the cliffs or in the grotto was due to magic. 
In the next place, they were only too willing to impress 
on the minds of Mauai and Otu that it had been im- 
possible for them to do anything against the magic of 
the white people. They therefore entered into a de- 
scription of the astonishing way in which their men 
had been killed. They declared that while in the 
grotto, when they had nearly captured the Young 
White Priest while alone and at a great distance from 
his companions, by his magic he had raised a storm of 
wind that swept the rocks down the slope up which 
they were attempting to climb, knocking over several 
of their number and blowing the others almost com- 
pletely to the far end of the grotto. 

On hearing this account Mauai turned to Otu and 
said something about this great piece of magic, the 
like of which had never before been seen. He then 
asked the men if there had been any other proof of the 
white lad’s power. 

In reply he was informed of the wonderful things 
that had happened when they attacked the white peo- 
ple while shut up in a little room near the top of the 
grotto, explaining how sixteen of them had simulta- 

352 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


neously attacked four people in the room, from the side 
of the grotto, as well as from an opening on the cliffs. 
Here, they said, most wonderful magic had been shown 
them. Although he had no “ make-thunder,” yet the 
Young White Priest called to his assistance a number 
of fearful spirits who burst from the ground at their 
feet, and blowing fire and smoke in their eyes had 
killed some of them, and by an enchantment had forced 
the others to take flight. 

The warrior who had been talking also informed 
them that this was not all. That in the fight at the 
window there was shown another kind of magic. By 
just pointing their fingers at them a new kind of make- 
thunder spoke and killed two warriors, while another 
was killed by a wonderful sharp knife almost half as 
long as one’s body. 

The manner in which they believed Charley had 
caused fiery spirits to spring from the ground greatly 
frightened Mauai and Otu. Mauai, however, assured 
Otu that he had seen while at the fight in the Western 
Valley the kind of make-thunder that they carried in 
their hand, referring to the revolvers, and killed their 
enemies by pointing them at them. The two men 
agreed that it would be dangerous to attempt to punish 
the two great white priests, so turning to them, Mauai 
said : 

“ Mauai will bid his men untie your hands and keep 
guard over you to-night. To-morrow, will tell you 
what we will do. If you try to escape my men will kill 
you.” 


X 


353 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Making a sign to some of his men the lads’ hands 
were untied, and they were led by a guard of four 
men to the Dead Man’s House. The guards appeared 
to stand in great fear of what Charleyo might do to 
them. They begged he would not injure them, ex- 
plaining that if they did not do what Mauai had com- 
manded he would order them killed. They then left 
the boys in the Dead Man’s House, warning them not 
to attempt to escape since, if they did, they should cer- 
tainly lose their lives. 

The exultation of Mauai and Otu at having cap- 
tured the two white lads was not unmixed with dread. 
They were greatly disquieted at what had been told 
them, and feared something might happen should they 
too greatly anger the Young White Priest. They 
were, therefore, unable to decide what they had best 
do with him and his companion in the morning. They 
wished to kill them, but were afraid to do so. 

On thinking the matter over they conceived the idea 
that, if they could only frighten the boys, that would so 
anger the spirits they controlled that they would thus 
lose their power over them. They had left the other 
warriors and were walking together along the shore of 
the lagoon planning how this might best be done when 
they came to the place where the head of one of the 
cannibals who had been killed by the discharge of the 
cannon had failed to reach the waters of the lagoon, 
and was lying on the shore. 

Picking up the head they walked with it toward the 
Dead Man’s House. 


354 



" They u'cre led by a guard of four 
men to the Dead Man’s House ’ 

354 




AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ Maybe head will frighten Young White Priest,” 
said Mauai. 

Beckoning two of the guards who were standing 
near the door of the Dead Man’s House to accompany 
them, they entered the room and bade them fix the 
head to the wooden wall by driving their knives 
through the ears. 

“ Mauai leaves head of man you killed this morn- 
ing by great make-thunder,” he said to the boys. “ By 
his magic Mauai will command the spirit of man to 
come and torture you.” 

It was ghastly to see that poor head, severed as it 
had been from the body, hanging to the wall by the two 
daggers. The eyes were wide open. The lower lip had 
fallen showing the white, glistening teeth. It was 
sufficiently awful to make strong men quail, much less 
young lads. 

But the hope of the cannibals that they would thus 
frighten the lads was not realized. Although both 
were horrified by the awful sight, they were sensible 
enough not to permit their enemies to see in their faces 
the slightest traces of fear. Turning to Mauai and 
Otu, Charley said boldly : 

“ The Great White Priest, Charleyo, laughs at your 
threats. If the spirit of the man comes here to trou- 
ble him, Charleyo by his magic will bid him go look 
for you, and will also raise a greater spirit to punish 
you for daring to touch him and his friend who have 
been declared by the gods of your people to be taboo- 
taboo. Charleyo dares you to come back here in an 
355 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


hour or so, when he will show you how much stronger 
his magic is than yours.” 

After the men had left the room, Harold inquired: 

“ What do you intend to do, Charley ? Can you 
really frighten them with some new magic ? ” 

“ I think I can,” was the reply. Knowing how 
easily these people are scared, and remembering what 
the doctor once said in fun about my being able to 
show some great magic to the cannibals should they 
come here, when we left Jackson House for the cliffs 
I slipped this little bottle in my pocket. It contains a 
small quantity of phosphorus dissolved in olive oil.” 

‘‘ What are you going to do with that stuff? ” 

“ Watch,” said Charley, ‘‘ I’ll show you.” 

As he uncorked the bottle a glow of phosphorescent 
light was seen escaping from the mouth. Dipping 
into the liquid one of the camel-hair brushes he em- 
ployed in his India-ink sketches, he skilfully began to 
apply it to the face of the dead man. A few touches 
to the white eyeballs caused them to glare with light 
as if they were on fire, thus giving a peculiarly awful 
appearance to the severed head. In a similar manner 
by covering the lips with the liquid they too glowed 
as if being slowly burned, and in the same way the 
forehead, cheeks, and part of the crown of the head 
where the hair had been removed for the tattooing, 
added to the awful appearance. 

When Harold saw it he cried : 

“ How horrible you have made it look, Charley. I 
cannot look on it without shuddering ! ” 

356 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ And yet,” replied Charley, “ you must help me by 
pretending to care nothing for it when Mauai and Otu 
come.” 

ril do my best,” was the reply. ‘‘ But do you 
think they’ll come ? ” 

I am almost sure they will,” was the reply; and, 
moreover, I do not believe they will come alone; for 
when it is heard that some wonderful magic may be 
tried here, I think they are curious enough to come 
and see what it may be. But I am not through with 
my work.” 

Charley then began rapidly marking on the wall 
below the skeleton of a man attached to the awful- 
looking head, so that the two parts appeared to be 
connected. 

As Charley had predicted, Mauai and Otu came to 
the Dead Man’s House followed by some fifteen or 
twenty of his warriors. 

When, crowding around the door, the men saw the 
awful sight of the head glowing as if on fire and the 
skeleton attached to it they were terrified. But Char- 
ley was by no means through with his so-called magic. 
He had something still more horrible in store for them. 
Suddenly, by ventriloquism, he so threw his voice as 
to make it seem to come directly from the lips of the 
cannibal corpse. It seemed to them that the spirit of 
the dead man was addressing Mauai. They were still 
more terrified at what they heard it say: 

“ See how I am burning, punished for daring to 
come to this island to fight against the two lads who 

357 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


are taboo-taboo. Young White Priest commands me 
to punish you and your warriors,” addressing Mauai, 
“ because you have eaten my body and only left my 
bones.” 

This threat so greatly frightened the warriors, some 
of whom knew they were guilty of having eaten the 
flesh of the glowing skeleton, that they rushed with 
cries of horror out of the room, followed by Mauai and 
Otu, so that soon the boys were completely alone. 

“ Come, Harold,” said Charley, “ let’s take this 
chance and get out of this.” 

The two lads ran rapidly toward the lagoon where 
they remembered their captors had left their boat. 
They were fortunate in finding it still there, and enter- 
ing, they pulled rapidly from the island toward the 
entrance to the grotto on the mainland. 


3S8 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XXXI 

Preparations for the Battle 

It was long after midnight when their boat touched the 
shore of the mainland. As they sprang to the land, 
Hiram and Oliver, who had been eagerly looking for 
them, grasped them warmly by the hands. Hiram 
seemed especially excited : 

“ We be wery glad to see ye again, Mr. Charley, and 
you too, Mr. Harold,” he exclaimed. Arter waiting 
fer ye fer two hours we took chances of being seen, 
and went keerfully to whar we hed left the boat. 
When we found it gone, I needn’t say how skeered we 
was; fer then we felt sartin ye had been took by the 
cannibals.” 

‘‘We have been searching for you ever since we 
found the boat missing,” said Oliver, “ fearing we 
might never see you again.” 

“Ye see, Mr. Charley,” continued Hiram, “ thet 
when the cannibal fellers took away our boat we were 
left very awkwardlike. We could not very well safely 
go to Jackson House fer fear of the sharks. Besides,” 
he added affectionately, “ we didn’t care to go away 
and leave ye with the cannibals until we were sartin 
we could do nothing to help ye.” 

“ We were hoping to find you and Oliver here, 

359 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Hiram,” said Charley, and are awfully glad to see 
you.” 

‘‘ Afore we take the boat back to the settlement or 
to Jackson House, Mr. Charley,” said Hiram, “ I 
would ax ye ef there be anything thet ye would recom- 
mend us to do ? ” 

Don’t you think,” replied Charley, it would be 
well to take a load of powder back with us? We may 
need it badly to-morrow.” 

Thet be a wery excellent idee, Mr. Charley,” said 
Hiram. ‘‘ The powder is near here, and we will take 
a lot of it with us.” 

They loaded the boat with a number of canisters, but 
as they were again ready to push ofif, Harold said : 

Why can’t we take the small cannon back, carriage 
and all ? We may be able to do something with it.” 

While none of them had any doubt as to the value 
the cannon might be to them, yet the question was, 
could they do this without taking too great risks. 
None of them was willing to take the responsibility of 
deciding. At last, Hiram said: 

Mr. Charley, how many of them cannibals were 
with ye in the boat when they took ye and Mr. Harold 
to Mauai and Otu ? ” 

“ Five,” was the reply. 

Then, even if all the other fellers hevn’t been so 
skeeredlike at what they seed during the fight in the 
grotto thet they were willing to take the risk of going 
back by swimming, there kain’t be a-many of them left 
in this part of the island.” 

360 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


'' That’s so, Hiram,” said Charley. Besides, I 
heard some of them telling how they had returned 
safely from the mainland by swimming the lagoon.” 

“ Then, my lads,” said Hiram, “ I say let’s take the 
resk, bring the small gun from the cliffs, and take it 
with us in the boat.” 

But let us again go in imagination to see what had 
been occurring at the settlement, the schoolhouse, and 
at Jackson House when the exciting events recorded 
in the last chapter were taking place. Young Wahea- 
toua’s report as to the capture of Kooloo, Otoa, and 
Frank cast a deep gloom over all. 

Both the white and the brown people were grieving 
for the great danger in which their friends had been 
placed. There was no one on the island whose sorrow 
was deeper than that of Mrs. Higgenbotham. She 
found it impossible to rid her mind of the awful 
thought of the little fellow being in the power of the 
dreaded cannibals. Again and again she summoned 
young Waheatoua, who had brought back the report 
as a spy, of what he heard had been determined on by 
Mauai as regards the prisoners. Each time he assured 
her it was only the two native lads who were to be 
killed the next morning, and that the little fellow was 
to be kept for a ransom. But when she wished to be 
assured by young Waheatoua that there was no dan- 
ger of Mauai and his men changing their minds, the 
lad bluntly, but honestly, remarked : 

Cannibal man may change mind heap quick. Very 
361 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


fond of cooked people. Maybe he like brown boys so 
much that he kill and eat little boy.” 

As this was just what the good lady feared, the an- 
swer greatly increased her anxiety. 

By this time she saw, although reluctantly, how fool- 
ish it would be to make individual efforts to rescue the 
little fellow ; that everything must wait until the great 
battle. She therefore sensibly determined to do her full 
share in the coming engagement. 

“ If them cannibal fellows come in reach of this gun, 
Mandy ’Iggenbotham will do her best to kill some of 
them. How glad I am ’Iram taught me to use it. I 
wish,” she said, pondering deeply on the part she was 
to play, “ that the gun carried more than one ball. I 
wonder,” she said, ‘‘ if I put in a big lot of powder and 
then load the gun up to the muzzle with the bullets that 
’Iram cast for the revolvers, it wouldn’t kill more of 
them. I’ll try it,” she continued. ‘‘ I’ll not fire until 
they get near, then I guess the bullets will scatter and 
kill a-many of them.” 

But, wishing to do work with her gun at long range, 
she did not intend using the bullets until she was ready 
to fire the last shot. She got them ready and put them 
and the wadding where she could get them quickly. 

Mr. Clarkson had so much to do that he hardly had 
time for individual worriment. 

When he had returned that morning to Jackson 
House with the boys from the school and the people 
from the settlement, he could account for all except 
four Three of these had been captured. The fourth 
362 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


was David Bates. David certainly had not returned 
with them. They had now been at Jackson House and 
the settlement a long time and the lad had not yet put 
in an appearance. Mr. Clarkson feared that he too 
had been captured, but on talking the matter over with 
Maro he was surprised to see the look of contempt that 
came over the face of the warrior when he informed 
him that his people had missed one of their canoes, and 
that evidently the white lad had taken it and gone alone 
to Jackson House, for they had found the canoe on the 
shore near that place. 

Now Mr. Clarkson had great command over his 
temper. It was afterward said that this was the only 
time any of the people at the settlement had ever seen 
him very angry. But when he heard about David and 
the canoe he made no attempt to hide his anger. 

“ I can hardly believe,” he said, that any white 
boy could be so cowardly. If I find David has taken 
the canoe and sought safety for himself, thus basely 
deserting his companions, I shall certainly recommend 
Captain Harding to send him away from the school 
on the first ship that touches at this place.” 

A careful search for the lad failed to discover him. 
But that evening when the rest of the boys were 
seated at supper, David put in an appearance. 

“ Where have you been ? ” inquired Mr. Clarkson 
sternly. Why did you not wait to return to the 
island with the rest of us? Did it not occur to you 
that by stealing the canoe you might have left those 
to whom it belonged without means of escape ? ” 

363 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“ I was not feeling well,” was the reply, so I took 
one of the canoes and came back to the island with it.” 

'' And where have you been all this time? ” inquired 
Mr. Clarkson. 

• I have been lying on my bed,” was the reply; for, 
as I have told you, I was not feeling well.” 

The Polynesian lads, who had been taught from 
childhood to conceal their feelings, found this display 
of cowardice too much for them, and began openly to 
taunt him, saying : 

'' David heap coward. Ran away cause he feared 
cannibals would eat him. David heap thief. Steal 
canoe. How could people who came in canoe get back ? 
David no care.” 

David,” said Mr. Clarkson, “ you have played a 
coward’s part. I am ashamed to have such a boy in the 
Harding School.” 

David made an impertinent reply to Mr. Clarkson, 
and said something about not wishing to remain in a 
school with a lot of Niggers, as he called the brown 
people. Because Mr. Clarkson was ordinarily an easy- 
going man, whom he had never seen lose his temper, 
David supposed he could safely say anything to him. 
But he had made a great mistake ; for, seizing a rattan 
he sometimes carried with him, Mr. Clarkson gave the 
lubberly, cowardly boy such a thrashing as he had 
never before received. 

It was not so much the stinging blows of the rattan, 
applied in a vigorous manner by the indignant teacher, 
that hurt David, but rather the public manner in which 

364 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the punishment was given. The brown boys had un- 
derstood the contemptuous term, ‘‘ Nigger,” and hailed 
with delight the punishment he was receiving. When 
the thrashing was over, Mr. Clarkson read the follow- 
ing notice : 

“ ‘ David Bates is assigned as guard to watch the 
shore eight hundred yards east of the settlement.’ ” 

The place referred to was at a considerable distance 
from the settlement. The knowledge that here he 
would be away from most of the people greatly fright- 
ened the cowardly fellow, who cried : 

‘‘ I will not do it. I didn’t come to the Harding 
School to do this kind of work.” 

But Mr. Clarkson paid very little attention to what 
he said. He merely remarked : 

“ It don’t matter what you came here to do. While 
you are here you will obey orders.” 

‘‘ Please don’t send me there, Mr. Clarkson ! ” cried 
the lad, now so thoroughly frightened that he began to 
beg. I will be sure to be captured.” 

But Mr. Clarkson merely instructed some of the boys 
to take David to Maro with the request that he place 
him as guard at the point assigned, with the additional 
statement that Maro would know what to do to any 
sentinel who failed to keep strict watch at his post. 

But there were two who willingly did their share in 
watching lest the cannibals should surprise the settle- 
ment, and these were Rompey and Flora. Indeed, their 
anxiety led them to attempt to do more than their 
share. Both were greatly worried, and kept running 

365 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


from one person to another, asking as well as they 
could for help in finding their young masters. 

On several occasions Flora had run into the kitchen 
at Jackson House and, looking up earnestly into the 
face of Mrs. Higgenbotham, had commenced whining 
and moaning and shaking her tail as if begging her to 
find Frank. It was too evident what the dog wanted. 

“ Bless your dear ’eart, doggie,” said she. “ I can’t 
help you. I only wish I could.” 

The dumb beast, as if it understood what was said, 
gave a few mournful barks and ran out of the room to 
search for aid from some other quarter. 

We will now follow Kooloo, Otoa, and Frank, who, 
when having been taken across the Harding Channel by 
Charley and Harold, began walking rapidly in the 
direction of the settlement and Jackson House. 

As was natural the conversation turned on their 
wonderful escape. 

“ Charleyo heap big warrior,” said Kooloo to Otoa. 

Not afraid to go into Dead Man’s House. Might be 
taken prisoner, but Charleyo no care. Come right 
there and cut our bonds.” 

“ Yes,” agreed Otoa. Charleyo let us out of 
Dead Man’s House. Never forget what Charleyo did 
for us.” 

Pleased to hear this praise of Charley, to whom he 
was much attached, Frank, in his childish way, added 
his testimony to that of his companions. 

Long before they reached the settlement, Rompey 

366 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


and Flora came rushing up and greeted them joyfully. 
Flora was almost beside herself with delight at seeing 
Frank. While Rompey did not fail to show his delight 
at seeing them again, yet there were others he wished 
for who were not there. He wanted Charley and 
Harold, and not finding them began earnestly begging 
they would tell him where his young masters were. 

The boys understanding him, pointed to Parker 
Cliffs, and said : 

“ Over there, Rompey.” 

The dog, as if understanding, disappeared in the di- 
rection of the Harding Channel. 

But a shout of delight and exultation was soon heard 
from the sentinels placed by Maro on that part of the 
coast. They had recognized the lads, and running to 
them eagerly began asking them questions. 

“ How you escape ? ” said one. 

Charleyo, the Young White Priest, came to island 
in a boat with Harealdo and Olivero and took us 
away.” 

‘‘ Where were cannibals ? ” inquired another. ‘‘ Why 
did cannibals not get Charleyo and Harealdo?” 

'' No one around,” was the reply. “ Charleyo drive 
them away by magic. But Charleyo brave ; not afraid 
of cannibals. Cut our bonds and took us across the 
lagoon in boat.” 

When Maro’s men heard of the brave rescue that 
Charley and his companions had made, they all praised 
his courage and skill. 

Charleyo heap great warrior,” they cried. “ Char- 

367, 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


leyo great white priest. Maybe he help us fight to- 
morrow by his magic.” 

“ He’ll do the best he can, I’m sure,” said Mr. Clark- 
son, who had by this time joined the crowd. “ But, of 
course, every one will also have to do his best to- 
morrow.” 

When at last the news of the safe arrival of the 
three lads reached Jackson House, Mrs. Higgenbotham 
came running up to the place where the three lads were 
standing. But before she could say a word Frank 
sprang into her arms, crying : 

“ O Mrs. Hiram, I am glad to be back again ! ” 
and then he began telling the good lady how it was that 
Charley and the other two boys had rescued them. 

“ God bless you, my little darling ! ” cried Mrs. Hig- 
genbotham, hugging and kissing him. ‘‘ Tell me how 
you left Mr. Hiram.” 

“ Mr. Hiram is all right,” was the reply. ‘‘ After 
we told him what had been done to us he said to Har- 
old and Oliver, ‘ Take the boat across the channel. 
Take Frank quick to Mrs. Hiram, and let Kooloo and 
Otoa go to Maro and help him.’ They brought us, and 
here we are.” 

“ My ’Irani,” said Mrs. Higgenbotham, “ has done 
the right thing. But come with me, my little lad,” she 
said. “ Come with me to Jackson ’Ouse and I’ll get 
you something to heat.” 

I wish you would, Mrs. Hiram ; I am awful hun- 
gry,” said the youngster. 

But the good woman did not go to Jackson House 

368 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


with Frank only. Seeing that Kooloo and Otoa were 
also hungry, she obtained permission from Maro for 
them to accompany her, promising to send them back 
in a short time. Wishing to obtain detailed informa- 
tion as to what was going on at Twin Island No. i, 
Mr. Clarkson accompanied them to Jackson House. 


Y 


369 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XXXII 

The Battle at Jackson House 

When Mr. Clarkson had heard all he wished to hear 
from Kooloo and Otoa, he left them and went again to 
the settlement. Rompey, who had returned from 
Harding Channel when he had failed to find Charley 
and Harold, now approached him and seemed much 
distressed, begging to be told where Charley and Har- 
old were. Mr. Clarkson was so busy with his thoughts 
that he paid no attention to the dog until, forced to do 
so by his persistence, he said : 

‘‘ What is it, Rompey ? Do you want me to find 
Charley and Harold ? ” 

At the mention of the names so dear to him, the dog 
again so evidently begged the man to help him that 
he was greatly affected. 

“ Poor dumb beast,” he said, you show more af- 
fection than many a human being would. I don’t 
know where they are, Rompey. I think over there,” 
he said, pointing to Parker Cliffs. 

Again, as if he understood what was said, the dog, 
wagging his tail, started off on a run toward the Hard- 
ing Channel, soon disappearing in the dim light. 

Maro was too good a warrior to fail to send out 

370 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


scouts to keep him posted as far as possible as to what 
the enemy were doing. He recognized that the attack 
might be made not from a point directly in view of the 
settlement or Jackson House, but from some place to 
the west and north. 

Maro expressed his opinion as to this matter as fol- 
lows : 

‘‘ Cannibals no boat. Too many sharks to swim la- 
goon. Must use raft. Hard to cut down trees to 
build raft. But easy to build large raft by tearing 
down the walls and roof of Maddox House. Good 
place to cross lagoon. Can’t be seen from Parker 
Cliffs. If they do this, will attack from the west of 
Jackson House.” 

When the matter was thus explained, Mr. Clark- 
son said : 

“ I think you are right, Maro. If so, they will come 
in this direction, so you had better send scouts further 
along the coast toward the west to see when they 
come.” 

In accordance with this plan the scouts were sent for 
a distance of several miles toward the west and north, 
with instructions to bring in word as quickly as possi- 
ble if they saw any signs of the coming of the enemy. 

Those who have read the other books of the series 
will remember that Jackson House had been erected on 
the highest land on this part of the reef, almost mid- 
way between the waters of the lagoon and the ocean. 
It was therefore planned that if they discovered the 
enemy approaching from the west, Maro and his war- 
371 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


riors should rapidly march along the ocean shore of 
the island and hide at some place about three-quarters 
of a mile to the west of Jackson House. Then, as soon 
as about half of the enemy had passed, they would sud- 
denly attack them from the shore. 

About half an hour before sunrise the scouts from 
the west brought word that the enemy were approach- 
ing at a rapid rate along the lagoon side of the main- 
land from the west and north of Jackson House. Maro 
hurriedly massed his warriors about three-quarters of 
a mile from Jackson House, and silently waited for the 
beginning of the battle that would decide the fate of all 
on the island. 

As the warriors stood quietly waiting the approach 
of the enemy, Maro began an impassioned speech, the 
words of which we will not attempt to repeat. It was, 
however, to the following effect. That the battle be- 
fore them was a battle of life and death. That their 
enemies would give no quarter. That all killed were 
almost certain to be eaten, which, according to their 
religious belief, would prevent them after death from 
reaching that happy country to which all good Polyne- 
sians go. That they must therefore fight to the end. 
He also bid them remember that the great Mahinee and 
Otoa were their friends; that if they were killed they 
would be avenged; that these two chiefs might even 
yet arrive in time to help them in the coming struggle. 

He also reminded them that the white people were 
great magicians; that perhaps they might do some 
great thing to help them overcome their enemy. He 

372 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


finally cautioned them not to make any shouting, since 
they did not desire to reveal their presence to the 
enemy. His men therefore contented themselves when 
he ceased talking with crying in a low tone : 

“ We will fight to the last, Maro, if you will only be 
our leader.” 

But we must now leave them awhile, awaiting the 
approach of the enemy, and join the scientific expedi- 
tion to see what it is doing. It will be remembered 
that the captain, doctor, and Jack, accompanied by 
Waheatoua and Kapiau, had left Harding Island on a 
journey of many days in order to study some of the 
peculiarities of formation of a kind of coral islands 
they wished to mention in the doctor’s great work, 
'' The Physical Geography of the Sea.” From what 
both had individually seen, as well as from the informa- 
tion they had obtained from Waheatoua, they were 
convinced that many points about the formation of is- 
lands that somewhat resembled Harding Island needed 
further careful observation and study. 

It may be interesting to remark here that the islands 
they intended thus to study belonged to the drowned is- 
lands referred to in the third volume of this series. 
These islands consisted of a great number of very small 
islands arranged in a more or less circular form so as 
partially to enclose a clear space in the ocean, the 
small islands being connected at a short distance below 
the surface by a narrow reef of coral rock. The sub- 
merged reef was only covered by water a few feet 
373 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


in depth. But within the enclosed space, as well as 
in the region outside the reef, the water was very 
deep. 

They soon convinced themselves that the encircling 
reef of partially submerged land corresponded with the 
reef of an ordinary coral island, but that the sinking 
had gone on so rapidly as partially to submerge it, only 
permitting the formation to be continued here and 
there. Where this formation was continued the ten- 
dency was to form miniature islands, consisting of an 
encircling reef and a tiny central spot corresponding to 
the lagoon. 

They had made a number of observations on several 
islands of this character, had spent several weeks at the 
work, and were pleased with the results of their ob- 
servations. 

There can be no doubt, Harding,’’ said the doctor, 
“ that these islands are of the same general formation 
as Harding Island, and are due, as Dana asserts, to 
a gradual sinking of an ordinary island. Only,” he 
added, as you see here, the sinking has gone on too 
rapidly to permit the encircling reef or atoll to form a 
continuous land mass.” 

The idea of spending so much time in merely 
measuring the varying depth of the water, both inside 
and outside the submerged reef, was difficult for Wa- 
heatoua and Kapiau to understand. 

Heap stupid,” they said. Hard work. No 
good.” 

However, they both had a very high idea of the 

374 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


ability of the captain and the doctor, and therefore kept 
this opinion to themselves. 

There was something about these islands that pleased 
both Waheatoua and Kapiau. The clear water inside 
the sunken reef, although very deep, contained many 
large turtles, and being able to catch a number of them 
they kept the party well supplied with fresh meat. 

In this connection it may be said that they had 
brought the sucker-fish with them, and were able to use 
them in the catching of the turtles. 

One day while the measurements were going on the 
keen sight of Waheatoua discovered the approach of a 
solitary canoe. Asking the doctor to loan him his 
glasses, when he returned them he said : 

Man coming in canoe. Waheatoua knows him. 
Waheatoua glad. Now he hear all news.’' 

Waheatoua was a great gossip, and dearly loved to 
hear about what was going on among his friends and 
acquaintances in the neighboring islands. 

As soon as the man reached them a long conversa- 
tion at once began. This being in Polynesian was only 
partially understood by the captain, but the doctor 
understood every word. It soon became evident to the 
captain that the news brought by the man greatly dis- 
turbed the doctor. 

“ Tell me all about it. Parsons,” said the captain. I 
see that you have heard something that worries you.” 

I have indeed, Harding,” was the reply. This 
man tells Waheatoua that Mauai and Otu, the thieves 
who escaped from Harding Island, have raised a big 
375 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


fleet of canoes and started with a hundred and twenty- 
five men for Harding Island/’ 

That is terrible news, indeed,” said the captain. 
‘‘ What can we do? ” 

“ I am afraid it will be too late to do anything,” was 
the reply. “ But I am certain you will agree with me 
that we must at once start for Harding Island. Let’s 
ask Waheatoua what chances we have of reaching the 
island before the cannibals.” 

When the question was put to Waheatoua, he gave it 
as his opinion that if they kept on rowing night and 
day they might be able to reach Harding Island two or 
three days after the arrival of the cannibals, but cer- 
tainly not sooner. 

Let us start at once,” said the doctor. ‘‘ Our peo- 
ple may have been able to beat off the attack for a few 
days.” 

‘‘ I agree with you. Parsons,” said the captain. 

But first let us ask the man if he thinks there is any 
chance that the news of the expedition of Mauai and 
Otu could have reached the ears of Mahinee and Otoa ; 
and if so, whether he believes these men would be able 
to reach the island with their warriors in time to help 
those we left on the island.” 

This question being put to Waheatoua, they were 
informed that Mauai and Otu had experienced much 
trouble in finding men willing to join their expedition. 
That all the people near their islands knew that a taboo 
had been placed on Harding Island both by Mahinee 
and Otoa, and feared the vengeance of these great 

376 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


chiefs should they dare to disregard it. That Mauai 
and Otu had therefore been obliged to visit a number 
of islands, and in this way the news had spread and 
Mahinee and Otoa had heard what was going on. He 
assured them that they had promptly assembled their 
men, together with a few neighboring chiefs who 
were their friends, and had already left with a big 
fleet of war canoes for Harding Island. They did not 
think, however, that at the best it would be possible for 
this force to reach the island until two or three days 
after the arrival of the cannibals. 

The captain and the doctor were confident that both 
Mahinee and Otoa, now they knew of the expedition, 
would try to reach the island as soon as possible — and 
this for many reasons. In the first place both had 
placed their taboo on the island, and unless they were 
able promptly to bring severe punishment on the men 
who had dared to disregard it they would be laughed 
at by their people. In the next place their only sons, 
Kooloo and Otoa, formed a portion of a settlement that 
consisted almost entirely of people taken from Mahinee 
and Otoa’s islands, so that if they permitted these peo- 
ple to be destroyed by their enemies it would necessarily 
bring them into general derision. Besides all these 
things, the friendship of both chiefs toward some of the 
people who were now on Harding Island was very 
sincere. Mahinee looked on Charleyo and Harealdo 
as his two half-sons, and had become almost as much 
attached to the little boy Frank as he was to the other 
two boys. 


377 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


But while the captain and his companions, as well as 
Mahinee and Otoa and their allies, are striving their 
utmost to reach Harding Island, we will again return 
to Hiram and his companions on the northern shore of 
the Harding Channel. They had succeeded in placing 
the small cannon in their boat, with a small quantity of 
powder, and were ready to start on their way to Jack- 
son House. 

The day was just beginning to dawn as they started. 
Their position prevented their seeing the eastern hori- 
zon, but soon the morning light thrown back from 
clouds high in the sky lighted both land and water. 

“ I wonder, Charley,” said Harold, “ whether any 
of us will live through this day.” 

‘‘ We’ll hope so,” was the reply. ‘‘ Don’t forget that 
we asked ourselves the same question yesterday. 
Though we have passed through great dangers during 
the past twenty-four hours, we are still alive and, so far 
as we know, our friends are still safe. Let us then keep 
our courage.” 

Hiram, who had been closely examining the south- 
ern shore of Twin Island No. i with Harold’s glasses, 
remarked : 

** I kain’t see anything thar, Mr. Charley, so I reckon 
the people hev gone. Well, my lads, let’s git back to 
the settlement. Onless thar be something else ye would 
like done, Mr. Charley.” 

‘‘ No, Hiram. Let’s hurry back.” 

They were soon approaching the shore of the main- 
land not far from the settlement. While the boat was 

378 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


still several hundred yards from the shore they heard 
a glad barking they recognized as Rompey’s. 

Rompey was the only one there to meet them, but the 
greeting of the dumb animal made up to some extent 
for the absence of their friends. After doing his best 
to show his joy, Rompey ran ahead barking as if he 
wished them to follow him. 

They were surprised that no one besides the dog 
had greeted them. Even when they reached the set- 
tlement there was a strange absence of every one 
around the place, and just as Harold commenced to 
ask his companions where they supposed the people 
were, they heard shouting and the noise of battle evi- 
dently coming from a point considerably to the west of 
Jackson House. 

'' The battle is going on,” cried Charley. “ See how 
anxious Rompey is that we follow him. Let us go 
and see where he wants to take us.” 

Following the dog they soon came up to Jackson 
House. Here they saw only Mrs. Higgenbotham and 
Frank, both of whom were standing near the gun. 

But the fight had begun and there was no time for 
conversation. Shouting a welcome to her husband and 
the boys, she bade them go join the fighting where they 
were so greatly needed, and then turning to the gun she 
motioned to Frank, who had affectionately shouted 
greetings to his brother and the boys, to bring her 
another ball and charge. They shouted good-bye to 
the brave woman and the little fellow, and left them 
loading the gun. 


379 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Dragging after them the gun they had brought from 
the boat, which had been left mounted on its gun- 
carriage for ease in transportation, they hurried to- 
ward the place where, from the sounds they heard, the 
battle was evidently going on. 


380 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


CHAPTER XXXIII 

Timely Arrival of Mahinee, Otoa, and the 
Scientific Expedition. Conclusion 

The canoes of Mahinee, Otoa, and their allies had at 
length reached Harding Island. The battle had already 
commenced. On hearing the sound of the fighting 
they urged their canoes at their utmost speed through 
the Harding Channel, and soon came in view of the 
settlement. To their surprise, there was no one in sight 
but Mrs. Higgenbotham and Frank standing near the 
gun. Frank was first to note their approach, for Mrs. 
Higgenbotham was looking eagerly toward the west, 
from which the noise of the battle was heard. Run- 
ning down the beach toward the boats, Frank was at 
once recognized by Mahinee, when one of his warriors 
jumping into the water picked up the little fellow and 
placed him in the arms of Mahinee. 

‘‘ O Mr. Mahinee,’’ cried Frank, the wicked men 
have come to Harding Island. They have been here 
since day before yesterday. Most of them landed on 
swimming-pool island. Some came here and were 
chased away by Mrs. Hiram’s gun. Mr. Maro stole 
all their boats so they can’t get here without swimming 
the lagoon, and they don’t like to do that for fear of the 
sharks. Kooloo, Otoa, and I were caught by them.” 

381 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


“And what happened to Kooloo and Otoa?’' in- 
quired Mahinee anxiously. “ Have the cannibals killed 
and eaten them? ” 

“ No,” replied the little fellow; “ they took us before 
Mauai and Otu, who said they were going to kill Koo- 
loo and Otoa the next morning, but Charley wasn't 
afraid of them and came over in a boat to Dead Man’s 
House, where we were, and took us away.” 

“ Charleyo brave warrior,” exclaimed Mahinee, 
greatly relieved at the good news of their escape. 

Mahinee gave orders for his fleet of canoes to stop 
at Jackson House boat-landing. The sight of a woman 
standing by a gun, with no help whatever save that of 
a little boy, had excited no little admiration from the 
savages. Courage and determination are qualities they 
especially admire. 

The good lady was delighted with their timely ar- 
rival, but she did not leave her gun. 

Mahinee approaching, anxiously inquired : 

“ How many fighting cannibals here ? ” 

When she informed him that there were something 
in the neighborhood of a hundred men the two chiefs 
appeared much pleased, Mahinee remarking to Otoa 
that they must have lost something in the neighbor- 
hood of twenty-five men; for he seemed to be well 
informed as to their strength. 

No time had been lost while this conversation was 
going on, for Mahinee had given orders to his chiefs 
to draw up their men and march to the scene of action. 

Hurriedly obtaining additional information from 
382 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Mrs. Higgenbotham, and leaving Frank with her, Ma- 
hinee and Otoa at the head of their men marched 
rapidly in the direction of the noise of battle. 

Following their plan, the Harding Island forces had 
concealed themselves on the ocean side of the island, 
about three-quarters of a mile north and west of Jack- 
son House. Allowing more than half of the cannibals 
to pass them, they had fallen on them unexpectedly. At 
first they had succeeded in routing them, but rallying 
their forces the enemy soon had all their men attack- 
ing Maro’s forces. It was a brave fight and many were 
slain on both sides. As Maro had feared, he was so 
greatly outnumbered by the cannibals that he was be- 
ginning to retreat, when suddenly Mahinee’s men ap- 
peared, completely changing the fortunes of the battle. 
Before long Mauai’s forces began a retreat along the 
shore of the lagoon toward Jackson House. 

Seeing he had the enemy in his power, and wishing 
to prevent any escaping, Mahinee permitted them to 
retreat along the lagoon shore, while he hurriedly led 
a portion of his men along the ocean shore. His plan 
was to get ahead of the retreating enemy with a part of 
his men and thus simultaneously to make an attack 
from the front, the rear, and the center. 

The boats containing the captain, the doctor, and 
their companions had approached Harding Island from 
a direction somewhat different from that taken by the 
fleet of Mahinee and Otoa. They had seen this fleet 
enter the Harding Channel a few miles ahead of them. 

383 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


Hurrying their boat they had passed through the chan- 
nel and had landed it some distance to the east of 
Jackson House when they heard the noise of battle, and 
quickly landing had run at a rapid gait toward Jackson 
House. 

It was about this time that Hiram and the three boys 
who, as already related, had left Mrs. Higgenbotham 
and Frank, had dragged their gun a short distance 
toward the west. Seeing the approach of the enemy 
they had fired a ball that had done some execution. 
Then, finding themselves alone, they had retreated with 
the gun and again placed it on the high land near 
Jackson House and had sent another ball into the ap- 
proaching enemy. 

Immediately after the firing of this ball, Charley and 
Oliver had hurriedly placed two of the canisters in po- 
sition on the beach near the lagoon and, connecting 
them with long pieces of safety fuse, had retreated to 
the gun and stood ready to ignite the fuse at the proper 
time. 

In the meantime Mrs. Higgenbotham was standing 
bravely at her gun. She had already fired several 
times. Now she motioned to Frank, whom she had in- 
structed to bring another charge of powder, and load- 
ed the gun with both the powder and the bullets, which 
were tightly rammed in place by wadding. 

It was at this moment that the captain and his party 
appeared from the east, and Mahinee and his warriors 
from the ocean had reached that portion of the main- 
land immediately west of Jackson House. They could 

384 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


see the approaching enemy rapidly nearing Mrs. Hig- 
genbotham and Frank, but were too far off to aid her 
before the cannibals reached her. 

Why don’t she fire ? ” anxiously inquired the cap- 
tain of the doctor, as he and his companions were run- 
ning at their highest speed toward the woman. 

“ Big warrior,” cried Mahinee to Otoa. “ Only one 
woman and a little boy, but not afraid to fight crowd 
of men.” 

And they too hurriedly approached the woman. 

But Mrs. Higgenbotham knew what she was doing. 
She was aware of the fact that the bullets would scat- 
ter, but would not carry as far as the ball. She had 
therefore waited until the cannibals were comparatively 
near the gun and had then fired it with awful effect; 
for the deadly rain of bullets mowed down many of the 
enemy. The remainder, urged by desperation, hur- 
ried on to wreak summary vengeance on the two lone 
adversaries. 

But at this moment something else happened. Char- 
ley had ignited the fuse at such a time that the powder 
exploded when many of the enemy were directly 
over it. 

And now Mahinee had reached the position he de- 
sired, and attacked the enemy simultaneously from 
three different directions, so that in a short time the 
battle was over, 
z 


385 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


The loss of life had been so great on the part of the 
cannibals that only Mauai, Otu, and about a dozen of 
their men had been left alive. 

Mahinee motioning to his warriors, who had taken 
these men captives, to bring Mauai and Otu before 
him, addressed them in a terrible voice : 

‘‘ Who are you,” he said, who dare to set at naught 
the taboo of Mahinee and Otoa, as well as the taboo of 
the gods of these islands? Who are you who dare to 
so treat the warriors of Mahinee and Otoa as to devour 
their dead bodies ? Listen to what Mahinee and Otoa 
say: You are unworthy to die the death of brave men. 
We will give you to the sharks, to be eaten as you have 
eaten our people.” 

Though brave men, Mauai and Otu and their war- 
riors, hearing the awful sentence that had been pro- 
nounced on them, implored Mahinee that he would 
command them to be killed with war clubs. But Mahi- 
nee was inexorable. Not only the taboo of himself and 
Otoa, but also of the gods of their islands had been dis- 
regarded by these people, and he knew that unless some 
awful punishment was meted out to them trouble might 
arise in the future. The people in the neighborhood 
must know that they were not permitted to make any 
raids on Harding Island. He therefore commanded his 
warriors to drive the prisoners into the lagoon, and 
although they fought against the sharks they were soon 
all devoured. 

When Mr. Clarkson heard the awful punishment 
Mahinee had pronounced against Mauai, Otu. and the 
386 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


remainder of their followers, he said to the captain: 

“ This is horrible, Harding. Can’t you prevail on 
Mahinee to forgive these miserable people and let them 
escape ? ” 

But without waiting for the reply of the captain, 
the doctor said : 

Clarkson, take my advice and don’t attempt an 
impossible thing. These men richly deserve all they 
are getting. They are inveterate man-eaters; and al- 
though they might perhaps repent for a while, yet the 
next opportunity they get they will go back to their 
horrible practice. Besides, you must not forget that 
they have disregarded the taboo of Mahinee and Otoa 
concerning Harding Island. Now, unless the people 
in the cannibal islands are given to understand that they 
cannot make raids safely on Harding Island, we never 
will be safe here.” Then, turning to the captain, he 
said: ‘‘How do you feel about it, Harding?” 

“ I feel just as Clarkson does,” was the reply. “ It 
is horrible to think of those men being fed to the 
sharks. I think, however,” he added, “ it makes no 
difference now how we feel ; for, unless I am mistaken, 
the men have already received the punishment Mahinee 
pronounced on them.” 

The captain was right. Mauai, Otu, and his men 
had already been forced into the waters of the lagoon, 
where they were soon devoured by man-eating sharks. 

The great battle of Jackson House, as they after- 
ward called it, was over. The formidable army of 
Mauai and Otu, consisting of one hundred and twenty- 

387 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


five men, had not only been defeated but annihilated 
by Mahinee and Otoa, aided by the forces of Maro. 
It was an object-lesson that would never be repeated. 

The people of the island who had so long been sepa- 
rated now began congratulating one another and 
exchanging experiences. It required several hours 
before the questions they put to one another were all 
answered. 

The meeting between Mahinee and Kooloo and Otoa 
and his son was characteristic of the people of these 
parts of the world. There was very little said, since 
the Polynesians are not given to demonstrations, but to 
those who know them it was evident their feelings were 
none the less deep because so effectually concealed. 

When Kooloo and Otoa informed their fathers of 
the brave manner in which Charleyo and his friends 
had entered the Dead Man’s House and, cutting their 
bonds, had been taken away in safety, both of these 
great chiefs were greatly affected. 

‘‘ Mahinee will never forget what the Great White 
Priest and his two friends have done in saving Kooloo 
from the cannibals. Charleyo can ask nothing from 
Mahinee that he will not be glad to give him.” 

And Otoa made a similar declaration. 

When the doctor heard of the manner in which 
Charley and Harold had been able to make their own 
escape from the Dead Man’s House by painting the 
head of a cannibal, he turned to Charley and laugh- 
ingly said : 

Don’t you remember, Charley, that one of the 

388 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


reasons I gave for wishing you to remain at Hard- 
ing Island, instead of going with us, was that I was 
sure, should the cannibals visit the island, you would 
be able to scare them off by your great magic? ” 

I remembered what you said, doctor,” replied 
Charley. “ Indeed, it was because you said it I took 
the bottle of phosphorus with me. I felt sure I could 
frighten the people by the magic light that would be 
given off. When, therefore, the horrible head of the 
cannibal was left on the wall of the Dead Man’s House 
for the purpose of frightening us, I saw how easily I 
could use this to turn the tables on them. I was cer- 
tainly successful in this, for they were frightened all 
right.” 

“ One cannot blame them for being frightened, doc- 
tor,” said Harold, who was present while the conver- 
sation was going on. It was more horrible than you 
might suppose. The eyes, teeth, mouth, and indeed 
the whole face of the awful head appeared to be on fire. 
This was enough in itself to frighten the cannibals, 
but when Charley by his ventriloquism made the men 
believe the head was talking to them, telling about the 
horrible sufferings he was undergoing by reason of 
having disregarded the taboo of the gods, they became 
so frightened that they ran away from the house, giv- 
ing us the opportunity to escape.” 

What had happened during the rescue of Kooloo, 
Otoa, and Frank, had to be gone over a number of 
times to different people. So too, the fight in the 
grotto, and Charley’s method of blowing the enemy off 

389 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


their feet when they attempted to climb up the steep 
ascent, had to be described many times. 

To Mahinee’s men the different things Charley had 
done convinced them more than ever of his great magic 
powers. To them Charleyo was the Great White 
Priest.’' 

As to be expected, there had been a loss of life of 
some of the people of the settlement; but, curiously 
enough, none of the white people or of the Polynesian 
boys of the Harding School were among the slain. 
Instead, however, of returning to their islands with a 
decreased number of warriors, Mahinee and Otoa re- 
warded some of Maro’s forces by appointing them as 
warriors in the place of those slain. This they looked 
on as a great reward, for with them it was considered 
a marked honor to be selected as warriors of either of 
these great chiefs. 

Mahinee and Otoa remained on the island for several 
weeks. During their stay Frank spent much of his 
time in the company of Mahinee, much to their mutual 
satisfaction ; for the liking of these two for each other 
had mutually increased. 

When the captain heard of the cowardly conduct of 
David he determined to send the lad back to his peo- 
ple, with a brief statement of his reasons for so doing. 
He soon availed himself of an opportunity for doing 
this, since a ship, bound for Australia, unexpectedly 
visited Harding Island for a supply of fresh water. 

It was fully a week after Mahinee and Otoa left 
Harding Island before regular work was resumed at 

390 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the school. But soon everything was going on as 
usual. 

The information obtained by the captain and the 
doctor as to the peculiarities of the formation of coral 
islands of the submerged or sunken type, had been suf- 
ficient to permit them to complete the chapter on coral 
islands. 

But we must now leave our friends on the Harding 
Island; an island that after its experience with the 
cannibals, could together with the islands of its lagoon, 
properly be rechristened The Cannibal Islands.” 

The school was so successful that when the parents 
of Charley and Harold visited the island, as agreed, 
they were so much pleased with the condition of their 
sons and the progress they had made, that they con- 
cluded to give them another year at the school. Frank 
had so markedly improved in health that his parents 
concluded to let both their boys continue at the school 
for another term. 

Mr. Clarkson continued at the school long enough to 
master completely the Polynesian language, when he 
built a school in one of the large islands in the neigh- 
borhood of the Island of Captivity. 

The Harding School continued and increased in 
numbers. The captain and the doctor went on with the 
preparation of the great book. Now, however, when 
they came to subjects that required them to make visits 
to other parts of the Pacific, they were able to do this 
readily, since the steam yacht purchased by Mr. Pleas- 

391 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


anton and Mr. Harding had been sent to the island for 
their use. It was when cruising among a group of 
islands lying midway between Asia and Australia, and 
known as the Malay Archipelago, that Charley, Har- 
old, and the doctor were taken prisoners by some of 
the people of Borneo, who are perhaps the most pro- 
nounced cannibals in the world. Were it not for the 
fact that The Pacific Series ” has already exceeded 
the number of volumes originally intended for it, 
another volume might have been added. While this 
is very improbable, yet it may be said here that should 
such a volume be prepared it would be called In 
Borneo With the Head-Hunters.” 


THE END 


392 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


APPENDICES 

A. Legendary Kraken or Octopus. “ According 
to the ancient legend, the kraken is a foul, colossal 
beast, of shapeless body, with arms as long as the long- 
est serpents, and covered with innumerable suckers. 
He does not content himself with attacking the other 
denizens of the ocean ; he lusts after the flesh and blood 
of man. It is especially at night and in the fury of 
the tempests that he rises from the bottom of the 
abyss to assail the unhappy voyagers overtaken by 
the whirlwind. It then embraces the masts and rigging 
with its gigantic arms, and endeavors to drag down 
under the seething waters the ship and all on board. 
The sole means of escape is by severing its tentacles 
with blows of an axe ; yet it is by no means certain that 
they will not grow again immediately, like the heads of 
the hydra. It is easy to understand the terror with 
which the recital of the frightful exploits of such an 
enemy must formerly have inspired ignorant minds 
prone to superstitious fancies.” (Mangin’s Mysteries 
of the Ocean.”) 

B. Norwegian Sea-serpent. The Norwegian 
fishermen,” says Pontoppidan, all affirm, without the 
least contradiction in their accounts, that when they 

393 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


sail several miles out to sea, particularly during the 
hottest days of the year, the sea seems suddenly to 
grow shallower under their boats ; and if they drop the 
lead, instead of finding eighty or a hundred fathoms 
depth, it often happens that they obtain scarcely thirty. 
It is a sea-serpent which thus interposes between the 
depths and the surface waves. Accustomed to this 
phenomenon the fishermen cast their nets, assured that 
there will be in those parts an abundance of fish, es- 
pecially of cod and ling, and draw them in richly 
loaded. 

“ But if the depth of the water should continue to 
decrease, and if this movable and accidental shallow 
rises higher, the fishermen have no time to lose; it is 
the serpent awakening and moving, rising to respire 
the air, and extend its huge folds in the sun. The 
fishers ply their oars lustily, and when at a safe dis- 
tance they see, in fact, the monster which covers a mile 
and a half of ocean with the upper portion of its back. 
The fish, surprised by its ascent, flutters a moment in 
the humid hollows formed by the protuberances of its 
external envelope; then from the floating mass issue 
numerous spikes or shining horns, which rear them- 
selves erect like masts, crossed by their yards. These 
are the arms of the kraken.” 

'' After remaining some time on the waves, the 
monster redescends with the same slowness, and the 
danger is not less for the vessel which may be within 
its range ; for, while sinking, it displaces such a volume 
394 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


of water as to occasion whirlwinds and currents not 
less terrible than those of the famous maelstrom.” 

C. The Massachusetts Sea-serpent. In the 
archives of the town of Plymouth is preserved a long 
abstract of verbal depositions made by a multitude of 
seamen, which all affirm the existence in the ocean of 
this mysterious animal. And it is a remarkable circum- 
stance that all these depositions, with the exception of 
some slight differences of detail, fully agree upon the 
general conformation and enormous dimensions of the 
monster. 

A fisherman attests upon oath to have seen a 
strange animal, of a serpent’s shape, extraordinary 
size, and brown hue, sometimes basking tranquilly on 
the surface of the water, sometimes swimming with in- 
credible swiftness. Another witness affirms that he 
saw in the same locality an immense beast, whose head, 
said he, resembled that of a rattlesnake. A third had 
seen the monster open its enormous mouth, which he 
also compares to that of a terrestrial serpent.” 

“ In the month of August, 1819, the ‘ United Service 
Journal ’ inserted a letter in which an eye-witness de- 
scribed the appearance of the sea-serpent on the shore 
of Nahant. ‘ I had with me,’ says this witness, ‘ an 
excellent telescope. When I reached the strand I 
found many persons assembled, and soon afterward 
we saw appear at a short distance from the shore an 
animal whose body formed a series of blackish curves, 
395 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


of which I counted thirteen. Other persons estimated 
the number at fifteen. The monster passed thrice at a 
moderate speed, traversing the bay, whose waters 
writhed in foam under its huge bulk. We could easily 
calculate that its length could not be much less than 
fifty to sixty feet. . . This, at least, I can affirm with- 
out presuming to say to what species belongs the ani- 
mal which I have just seen, that at least it was neither 
a whale, nor a cachalot, nor any strong souffleur, nor 
any other enormous cetacean. None of those gigantic 
animals have such an undulating back.’ ” 

A short time afterward the officials of Essex County, 
in the State of Massachusetts, received the deposition 
formally drawn up, which follows: 

I, the undersigned, Gresham Bennet, second 
master, declare that on the sixth of June, 1819, at 
seven A. M., while navigating on board the sloop 
Concord, on her way from New York to Salem, the 
vessel being about fifteen miles from Race Point, in 
sight of Cape St. Anne, I heard the helmsman cry out 
and call me, saying there was something close to the 
ship well worth looking at. I ran immediately to the 
side which he pointed out and saw a serpent of enor- 
mous magnitude floating on the water. Its head rose 
about seven feet above the surface; the weather was 
clear, and the sea calm. The color of the animal and 
all its visible parts was black, and the skin appeared 
smooth and free from scales. Its head was about as 
long as that of a horse, but was the perfect head of a 

396 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


serpent, terminating on the upper part in a flattened 
surface. We could not distinguish its eyes. I saw it 
clearly from seven to eight minutes; it swam in the 
same direction as the sloop, and went nearly as quickly. 
Its back consisted of humps or rings of the size of a 
large barrel, separated by intervals of about three feet. 
These rings appeared flxed, and resembled a chain of 
hogsheads fastened together; the tail was beneath the 
water. The part of the animal which I actually saw 
measured about fifteen feet in length ; the movement of 
its rings seemed undulatory.” (Mangin’s “ Mysteries 
of the Ocean.'’) 

D. Harrington’s Sea-serpent. “ Captain Har- 
rington professed to have seen the serpent very dis- 
tinctly. According to him, the monster’s head was 
shaped like a barrel whose major diameter would be 
between two and three feet. On the top of the head 
rose a sort of membranous and wrinkled crest. For 
upwards of a hundred feet around the animal the sea 
was agitated and discolored, so that the captain’s first 
impression was that his ship had got into what the 
sailors call “ broken waters,” and which are attributed 
to some submarine volcanic phenomenon. But a closer 
examination convinced him that before his eyes was a 
living being of extraordinary length, apparently direct- 
ing its slow course toward the land. At the time his 
ship was sailing too swiftly for him to measure the 
animal’s dimensions; but according to such calculations 
as he was able to make, it appeared to be more than two 
397 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


hundred feet long. ' I am convinced,’ added Captain 
Harrington, ‘ that this animal belonged to the serpent 
species; it was of a somber color, and covered with 
white spots.’ 

“ The narrative in all its details was clear and pre- 
cise. The captain wrote boldly to the admiralty that, 
as a seaman, he could not be deceived, and that he 
should be as capable of mistaking an eel for a whale, 
or algae or any other marine production for a living 
animal. ‘ If it had been some distance off,’ he said in 
conclusion, ‘ I should have thought myself mistaken ; 
but I saw it pass within twenty yards of my vessel. A 
score of persons saw it as well as myself and my two 
officers, and I can assure you that I saw it as distinctly 
as I see at this moment the jet of gas in whose light I 
write you this description.’ ” (Mangin’s ‘‘ Mysteries of 
the Ocean.”) 

E. Capture of the Sea-serpent. In the month 
of December, 1848,” says Mangin, Mr. Smith was 
sailing on board the ship Peking, belonging to his 
father, when near Moulmein in calm weather he saw 
at a certain distance ‘ something extraordinary balan- 
cing itself on the waves, and which appeared to be an 
animal of immeasurable length. With our telescopes,’ 
he added, ‘ we could from the Peking perfectly dis- 
tinguish an enormous head and a neck of monstrous 
size, covered with a mane, which alternately appeared 
and disappeared. This appearance was likewise seen 
by all our crew, and everybody agreed that it must be 

398 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


the great serpent. I took the resolution of making the 
closer acquaintance of this celebrated monster, and im- 
mediately ordered a boat to be lowered, with an officer 
and four men on board, furnished with some arms and 
a few fathoms of rope. I watched them attentively. 
The monster did not seem disturbed by their approach. 
At length they arrived quite close to its head. They 
appeared to me to hesitate ; then I -saw them busily un- 
rolling the rope with which they were provided, while 
the monster still continued to raise its head and unfold 
its enormous length. Suddenly the boat began her 
course to regain the vessel, followed by the formida- 
ble monster. In less than half an hour the latter was 
hauled on board. The body appeared to be endowed 
with a certain suppleness so long as it remained sus- 
pended. But it was so covered with marine parasites 
of every species, that it was not until some time had 
elapsed we arrived at the discovery that this terrible 
animal was neither more nor less than a monstrous 
alga, upwards of one hundred feet long and four feet 
in diameter, whose root at a distance had represented 
its head, while the motion communicated to it by the 
waves had given it the semblance of life. 

‘‘ ‘ In a few days this curious alga, growing dry, 
spread through the ship so infectious an odor that I 
was compelled to have it cast into the sea. Immediately 
after my arrival in London the Daedalus reported its 
encounter with the great serpent in nearly the same 
parts, and I cannot doubt but that it was only the 
floating wreck of the alga whose history I have just 
399 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


related. Nevertheless, this illusion is rendered so justi- 
fiable by the appearance of the object that, if I had 
been unable to despatch the boat at the moment 
as I did do, I should have remained all my life in 
the conviction that I had seen the great serpent of 
the sea.’ ” 

F. Mussel Cultivation. “ There is a branch of 
industry known as mussel culture just as there is oyster 
culture. It is carried on in many localities, particularly 
at Esnandes, at Marsilly, and at Charron, in the Bay of 
Aiguillon, near Rochelle.” 

“ Piles are driven into the mud, some five or six feet 
of their length remaining out of it. Long rows of 
these are placed, running out to the sea sometimes even 
for two or three miles. Between the piles wickerwork 
is interlaced, upon which the bivalves fasten them- 
selves. 

“ Numbers of these lines of posts are so placed that 
their seaward extremities are close together, and they 
diverge as they spread to the shore. Locally they are 
termed houchots, or parks, while the fishermen who 
attend to them are boucholenrs. These parks belong 
sometimes to one man, but usually they are the property 
of a co-operative society, every boucholeur having a 
share in the concern. The shellfish are gathered in at 
all times, except during the period of their spawning; 
and also if the weather be very hot the fishing is sus- 
pended. When the tide has gone out the mud flats are 
400 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


much too soft to bear the weight of the boucholeur. 
Walton’s genius, however, soon found a means of over- 
coming this difficulty, and he built what is now called 
an aeon, which, in fact, is a light punt, some six feet 
long, made of four thin planks, two forming the bot- 
tom and two the sides, while the front, or prow, is fin- 
ished with a slope. 

‘‘ Many of the aeons are so constructed as to carry 
two persons, and it is astonishing with what rapidity 
they can glide over the yielding surface of the mud. It 
must not be supposed that the whole of the work is 
completed when the piles are driven and the wicker- 
work run between them; that then the mussels attach 
themselves and the fishers have nothing to do save to 
gather those which are full grown. Experience has 
taught that the process of development is greatly aided 
by moving the mollusks from one position to another, 
positions in which they are successively exposed for 
longer periods to the air.” 

The Bay of Aiguillon is the scene of a vast in- 
dustry, a wonderful monument to the genius of one 
man. Thousands of people are employed in the culture 
and transportation of the mussels. Some idea of the 
enormous produce of the bay may be gathered from the 
fact that although they are sold at the rate of about 
ten pounds a penny, yet the revenue of the whole bay 
is more than four hundred thousand pounds ; and why 
should not a like harvest be gathered in on every 
coast ? ” (Tandon’s ‘‘ The World of the Sea.”) 

2 A 401 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


G. Tyrian Purple. “ Lesson thinks that the pur- 
ple of the Tyrians was also procured from the common 
Janthina. When one of the mollusks which produce 
this purple dies, not only is that part which contains the 
coloring matter tinted but all the surrounding tissues. 
It has often been remarked by the curators of museums 
that alcohol and other preservative liquids in which 
specimens of these mollusks are kept become tinted 
with the various shades of purple. Until lately we have 
been ignorant as to the whereabouts of the organ which 
secreted this coloring matter. Many naturalists sup- 
posed that the liquid in reality consisted of the juices 
which supplied the stomach with its digestive property. 
Others, who were nearer the truth, believed that there 
was a special organ for its secretion. M. Lacaze-Du- 
thiers has given his attention to the subject, and has 
discovered that beneath the mantle, between the intesti- 
nal canal and the respiratory organs, there is a white 
band, in which the liquid is secreted. This organ 
scarcely differs either in position or shape in any of the 
species. The liquid is faintly yellow, and when sub- 
mitted to the action of the sunlight, as we have already 
said, it passes through green to purple, which becomes 
deeper and deeper. The most disagreeable odor is ex- 
haled during this process, which may be compared to 
burnt onions or assafoetida. The smell is retained by 
the fabric for a long time, and even after a year has 
elapsed the scent is perceived when the material is 
moistened. When the purple fabric is washed the first 
time it loses its color a little, but this is almost inappre- 
402 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


ciable, and ever after it is ‘ fast.’ So the sailor’s idea of 
marking his linen with it is excellent. In its yellow or 
green condition it can be washed out. M. Lacaze-Du- 
thiers has often, in gathering the liquid from the gland, 
touched his finger-nail with it, and so strong is the 
dye that the nail would remain colored for five weeks. 

‘‘ Probably the property which rendered the dye so 
valuable was not only its brilliant color, but the fact 
that the sun’s light did not injure it. All our purple 
and mauve colors are almost immediately affected ; but 
the purple cloak of a Roman dandy as he promenaded 
along the thronged terraces of the great city caused 
him no anxiety; he had learnt by experience that the 
purple owed its existence to the sun, and that exposure 
to the bright Italian sky only deepened its rich tints. 
Duhamel, who has studied this property, thinks that it is 
due to the same power by which the sun paints the rosy 
cheeks of the apples and peaches. But this can hardly 
be ; for in the one case the sun acts upon matter which is 
under the influence of a vital force, but in the other 
the liquid is acted upon when separated from the mol- 
lusk ; hence it must possess this property within itself. 

'' The purple is thus entirely a photogenic substance. 
M. Lacaze-Duthiers has conducted some important ex- 
periments upon its sensitiveness, and the uses to which 
it might be put. He advises that the dyeing matter 
should be gathered with a flat, short brush; the secre- 
tive organ should be gently rubbed several times, by 
this means the brush becomes laden with the viscous 
liquid. Then the fabric which it is wished to color 

403 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


should be covered by frequently passing the brush over 
it, thus a layer of the liquid is spread which is at first 
frothy, but soon the air-bubbles disappear and it be- 
comes uniform. To wholly cover the surface this proc- 
ess may have to be repeated two or three times. To 
obtain the color the prepared substance must now be 
exposed to the sunlight. The rapidity with which the 
tint is developed varies with the actinic power in the 
rays. In Spain exposure for two or three minutes will 
suffice. If the sky be overcast three-quarters of an 
hour will be required. The process is quickened if the 
fabric be moistened with a little sea-water. When 
only a thin layer of the matter is applied the deep shade 
cannot be obtained by any length of exposure.” (Tan- 
don’s The World of the Sea.”) 

‘‘ A very common shell may often be found on the 
seashore, looking like a small whelk with a smooth 
whitish shell, boldly banded with reddish brown. This 
is the common purple snail, or purpura {Purpura 
lapillus), another member of this genus, and worthy 
of notice as being one of the shells which furnish the 
celebrated Tyrian purple of the ancients. This color 
which, by the way, contains so little blue as to be unlike 
the tint which we now call by the name of purple, is 
evidently the analogue of the ink found in the sepia, 
and is secreted in a little sac by the throat, containing 
only one small drop. 

“ For the very best dye this material was extracted 
carefully from the individual shells, but for an inferior 
404 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


kind it was obtained by pounding a quantity of the pur- 
purae in a mortar and straining off the juice, which 
was thus mixed with the blood and general moisture 
of the animals, and consequently of less value than the 
pure dye. So expensive was the dye obtained by this 
latter process that a pound of wool stained with it could 
not be purchased under a sum equaling thirty pounds 
of present money. Any one can try the experiment of 
dyeing a little strip of linen with the matter obtained 
from a single shell. After breaking the shell carefully 
so as not to crush the inhabitant, the cell containing the 
coloring matter will be seen lying across the head or 
neck of the animal, and can be removed by opening the 
sac and taking up the yellowish-white contents with a 
small camel’s-hair brush or the point of a new quill 
pen. When the linen is imbued with this liquid and 
placed in the rays of the sun it immediately begins to 
change its color, and passes through a series of tints 
with such rapidity that the eye can hardly follow them, 
unless the slanting rays of the rising or setting sun are 
chosen for the purpose. 

Light green is the first tint, which soon deepens 
until the yellow is driven out by the mysterious power 
of light, and the substance assumes a blue color. After 
a while another primary color makes its appearance 
and a gradually deepening red being diffused through 
it, the blue changes to rich purple. Even the blue, how- 
ever, has a comparatively feeble hold ; for if the empur- 
pled linen be well washed with soap and water and 
again exposed to the sun’s rays the blue gradually fades 

405 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


before the increasing red, and a deepish crimson will be 
the ultimate result. Thus we have the curious phe- 
nomenon of a semi-liquid, almost destitute of color 
while shielded from light, assuming in regular succes- 
sion the three primary colors, first mixed so as to form 
the secondary tints, and gradually separating and retir- 
ing before the superior power of their successors.” 
(Wood’s Illustrated Natural History.”) 

H. Change of Color of Squids. “ These mol- 
lusks possess the property of changing their colors at 
will, and rival even the chameleon in the rapidity with 
which the varied tints flit over their surface like cloud 
shadows over the fields. The structure by which this 
process is achieved is very interesting. Over the surface 
of the animal is spread a thin integument, containing a 
vast number of circular or oval vesicles filled with a 
colored fluid. This fluid is of various tints, such as 
black, brown, yellow, indigo, azure, and red, and in 
many species three or four of these colors are found. 
The vesicles are gifted with a most mysterious power 
of contraction and expansion, though they have no ap- 
parent connection with the nervous system. The least 
touch will set them in motion, and exposure to light has 
the same effect, even after the death of the animal or if 
a portion of the skin be removed from the body. It is 
evident that the tint of the surface is caused by the 
particular vesicles which are expanded, and its depth 
by the degree of expansion.” (Wood’s Illustrated 
Natural History.”) 


406 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


L Calmars and Poulpes. ‘‘ In times long past we 
read of calmars and poulpes of sizes far greater than 
any which now are found upon our coasts ; indeed, the 
naturalists and sailors who narrate the stories describe 
them as approaching the gigantic dimensions of the 
whale. Pliny relates the history of an enormous cut- 
tle-fish which haunted the coast of Spain, in the neigh- 
borhood of Castria, devouring all the fish and destroy- 
ing the fishing-grounds. At last the monster was 
captured. Its body was found to weigh seven hundred 
pounds, and its arms were more than thirty feet long. 
Its head was as large as a tun, and the fragments of 
the creature filled fifteen amphoree (nine Greek or six 
Roman gallons), and were sent to the proconsul, 
Lucius Lucullus. Olaus Magnus gives credence to the 
report that the northern seas were infested by a mon- 
ster — a colossal poulpe, which was a terror to the 
mariners. Its length was asserted to be not less than 
a mile, and when seen on the surface of the water it 
appeared to be an island. Denis de Montfort gives a de- 
scription of this monster, accompanied by a representa- 
tion of the kraken, as it was called, enwrapping a three- 
masted ship in its vast arms. Even Linnaeus himself 
seems to have believed this fable, and in the first edition 
of his ‘ System of Nature ’ he catalogues the kraken as 
the Sepia microcosmos; but afterward he seems to have 
had cause to discredit his information, for he omitted it 
in the next edition. Batholin says that the bishop of Mi- 
daros found the kraken quietly reposing on the shore. 
Mistaking the enormous creature for a huge rock, the 
407 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


reverend prelate erected an altar upon it and performed 
mass. As soon as the bishop had had his say, the re- 
spectful poulpe waited until his reverence was safely on 
shore and then plunged beneath the waves. Another 
bishop, Pontoppidan of Bergen, assures us of the exist- 
ence of the kraken, and asserts that a whole regiment 
could maneuver upon its back. But in spite of the 
church’s authority, the existence of the kraken is con- 
sidered fabulous. We no longer live in a time when we 
could credit, on mere hearsay, that there existed a sea- 
monster capable of rendering the Straits of Gibraltar 
impassable! Yet, in our own time, really enormous 
cephalopods have been captured both in the Mediterra- 
nean and in the ocean. Although they were not so 
large as a ship, nor yet an island, neither could block up 
a strait, still they deserve the name gigantic. Aris- 
totle speaks of a great calmar which was taken in the 
Mediterranean more than ten feet long. The famous 
diver, Piscinola, who went down in the Straits of Mes- 
sina at the request of the Emperor Frederick II, is said 
to have seen enormous poulpes attached to the rocks, 
whose arms were some yards long and quite powerful 
enough to master a man. But even this statement is 
not sufficiently scientific to be received as truth. 

“ Modern naturalists have noted the capture of sev- 
eral very large cephalopods. M. Verany speaks of a 
calmar a yard and half long, and which weighed 
twenty-four pounds. One was caught near Nice weigh- 
ing fifteen pounds. An equally large one was found in 
the Adriatic, and its body is still preserved in the mu- 
408 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


seum at Trieste. Twenty years ago a calmar was caught 
off the south coast of France six feet long; it is still to 
be seen in the collection of the Faculty of Sciences at 
Montpillier. Peron, the naturalist, met in the Australian 
seas a huge cuttle-fish rolling heavily on the surface of 
the waves, its arms, more than eight feet long, twisting 
about like hideous snakes. Rang, in the same part of 
the world met a cephalopod with a reddish body, which 
was the size of a tun cask. Swediaur reports that some 
whalers took out of the mouth of a whale pieces of a 
cuttle-fish that were twenty-five feet long. In the mu- 
seum of the College of Surgeons there is one of the 
mandibles of a cuttle-fish larger than a hand. These 
are scientific accounts, and can be credited ; from them 
we gather that the cephalopods reach a size far exceed- 
ing that attained by any other invertebrate animals.” 
(Tandon’s The World of the Sea.”) 

J. Chambered Nautilus. 

This is the ship of pearl, which poets feign 
Sails the unshadowed main — 

The venturous bark that flings 
On the sweet summer wind its purpled wings, 

In gulfs enchanted, where the siren sings 
And coral reefs lie bare. 

Where the cold sea-maids rise to sun their streaming 
hair. 

Its webs of living gauze no more unfurl; 

Wrecked is the ship of pearl! 

And every chambered cell. 

Where its dim dreaming life was wont to dwell, 

409 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


As the frail tenant shaped his growing shell, 

Before thee lies revealed — 

Its irised ceiling rent, its sunless crypt unsealed! 

Year after year beheld the silent toil 
That spread his lustrous coil; 

Still, as the spiral grew. 

He left the past year’s dwelling for the new, 

Stole with soft step its shining archway through. 

Built up its idle door. 

Stretched in his last-found home, and knew the old 
no more. 

Thanks for the heavenly message brought by thee. 
Child of the wandering sea. 

Cast from her lap, forlorn! 

From thy dead lips a clearer note is born 
' Than ever Triton blew from wreathed horn! 

While on mine ear it rings. 

Through the deep caves of thought I hear a voice 
that sings: 

Build thee more stately mansions, O my soul, 

As the swift seasons roll! 

Leave thy low vaulted past; 

Let each new temple, nobler than the last. 

Shut thee from heaven with a dome more vast. 

Till thou at length art free. 

Leaving thine outgrown shell by life’s unresting sea.” 

— Oliver Wendell Holmes. 

N. The Rock Squid. ‘‘ While upon the Bonin Is- 
lands searching for shells upon the rocks which had 
just been left by the receding sea tide, I was much as- 
tonished at seeing at my feet a most extraordinary 
looking animal crawling toward the surf, which had 

410 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


only just left it. I had never seen one like it under such 
circumstances before; it therefore appeared the more 
remarkable. It was creeping on its eight legs which, 
from their soft and flexible nature, bent considerably 
under the weight of its body, so that it was lifted by 
the efforts of its tentacles only a small distance from 
the rocks. 

“ It appeared much alarmed at seeing me and made 
every effort to escape, while I was not much in the 
humor to endeavor to capture so ugly a creature whose 
appearance excited a feeling of disgust, not unmingled 
with fear. I, however, endeavored to prevent its career 
by pressing on one of its legs with my foot, but al- 
though I made use of considerable force for that pur- 
pose its strength was so great that it several times 
quickly liberated that member in spite of all the efforts 
I could employ in this way on wet, slippery rocks. 

‘‘ I now laid hold of one of the tentacles with my 
hand and held it firmly, so that the limb appeared as if 
it would be torn asunder by our united strength. I 
soon gave it a powerful jerk, wishing to disengage it 
from the rock to which it clung so forcibly by its 
suckers, which it effectually resisted. But the moment 
after, the apparently enraged animal lifted its head, 
with its large eyes projecting from the middle of its 
body, and, letting go its hold of the rocks, suddenly 
sprung upon my arm, which I had previously bared to 
my shoulder for the purpose of thrusting it into holes 
of the rocks to discover shells, and clung with all its 
suckers to it with great power, endeavoring to get its 

41 1 


AT SCHOOL IN THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS 


beak, which I could now see between the roots of its 
arms, in a position to bite. 

‘‘ A sensation of horror pervaded my whole frame 
when I found this monstrous animal had affixed itself 
so firmly upon my arm. Its cold slimy grasp was ex- 
tremely sickening, and I immediately called aloud to 
the captain, who was also searching for shells at some 
distance, to come and release me from my disgusting 
assailant. He quickly arrived, and taking me down to 
the boat, during which time I was employed in keeping 
the beak away from my hand, quickly released me by 
destroying my tormentor with the boat knife, when I 
disengaged it by portions at a time. This animal must 
have measured across its expanded arms about four 
feet, while its body was not larger than a large clenched 
hand. It was that species of sepia which is called 
by the whalers rock squid.” (Wood’s ‘‘ Natural His- 
tory.”) 


413 













I. -• ■ , • 

- . * 


r 


V 




\ 


4 


\ 



► . » 

f.' 




I 


4 


{ 






























